JP6821298B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

Conventionally, for example, there is known a game machine in which a winning or losing of a big hit is drawn when a game ball is won at the starting port, and an effect image corresponding to the result of this lottery is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like.

In this type of gaming machine, a variable display of a symbol or an expected effect using a character is performed on a liquid crystal display device, for example, based on the result of a lottery. As an example of such an expected effect, there is a so-called pseudo-continuous effect in which the symbol is temporarily stopped and then changed again before the result of one lottery is displayed (for example, paragraph [Patent Document 1]. 0007], [0017], etc.).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-278945

As for the expected production represented by the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous production, when the expectation of winning the lottery is high, the expected production based on the result of one lottery is often performed for a long time, but it takes a long time. If the expected production is performed over a period of time, the game may be delayed and the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an entrance that can accept a game ball and a lottery means that can execute a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball at the entrance, and the result of the lottery is specific. A gaming machine in which a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed based on the result.
An effect including a variation effect of a plurality of symbols is displayed, and a display means for displaying the result of the lottery depending on the stop mode when the symbol is stopped.
From the start of the variation effect of the plurality of symbols to the display of the result of the lottery, the special effect execution means for performing the special variation effect by the plurality of symbols in a form different from the normal variation effect. With
The special effect executing means is
A special symbol suggesting the execution of the special variation effect can be displayed, and the special symbol is not used when displaying the result of the lottery, and when the special variation effect is executed. It is stopped by the display means only in
The special effect executing means is
The first special variation effect that can execute an effect with a higher expectation of hit by stopping all the fluctuating plurality of symbols and fluctuating the plurality of symbols even after the plurality of symbols are stopped. And, while the plurality of symbols are being changed, only the special symbol is stopped, and even after the special symbol is stopped, the plurality of symbols are changed to produce a more promising effect. The second special variation effect that can be executed can be executed as the special variation effect.
The special symbol is used not only as the second special variation effect but also as a symbol to be stopped in the first special variation effect.
As the effect displayed by the display means, a special stage effect configured so that the hit expectation is different depending on the stage is provided, and the fluctuation period of the plurality of symbols and the special symbol before the special symbol is stopped are The special stage effect can be executed during the fluctuation period of the plurality of symbols after being stopped.
After the special symbol is stopped, a special stage effect that has a higher expectation than the stage of the special stage effect performed in the fluctuation period of the plurality of symbols before the special symbol is stopped is performed. It is feasible to use the area where the special symbol overlaps with the stopped area during the fluctuation period of the plurality of symbols.
The second special variation effect is shorter than the time from the change of the plurality of symbols in the first special variation effect to the stop of all the plurality of symbols, and the plurality of the second special variation effects. It is possible to perform the effect from the change of the symbol to the stop of the special symbol.
In the variation effect of the plurality of symbols performed in response to one lottery by the lottery means, only the first special variation effect is executed a predetermined number of times as the special variation effect, and the special variation effect is described as the above. The first special variation effect and the second special variation effect may be executed a predetermined number of times in total, and in any case, if the predetermined number of times is a specific number of times, the result of the lottery is a win.
The dynamic display mode of the special symbol from the appearance of the special symbol to the stop in the first special variation effect and the period from the appearance of the special symbol to the stop in the second special variation effect. It is possible to display the dynamic display mode of the special symbol in the same display mode.
The special effect executing means is
The number-of-times suggestion display indicating the number of times the special variation effect is executed can be displayed on the display means, and the same display mode is used when the first special variation effect is executed and when the second special variation effect is executed. By displaying the number-of-times suggestion display, it is not possible to distinguish which of the first special variation effect and the second special variation effect is executed by the appearance of the number-of-times suggestion display. Game machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of a pachinko game machine, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 8 as viewed from the front by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the function display unit in the game board enlarged in the state which attached to the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 15 to the peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of winning a start opening. It is a figure which shows an example of the control data table at the time of winning a start opening. It is a figure which shows an example of the area which stores the random number for a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the memory look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows the table related to the advance notice permission determination data, (A) is the advance notice permission determination data address table, (B) is an example of advance notice permission determination data. It is a figure which shows the table related to the special symbol hold ball number command, (A) is an example of a special symbol hold ball number command address table, (B) is an example of a special symbol hold ball number designation command creation table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern selection determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the variation pattern selection determination process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation type determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the special symbol change waiting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol / flag setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of passing through a gate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a pre-reading judgment prohibition period. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol hit determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure of a main control program. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure warning signal interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the decorative pattern variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a story reach setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the production selection pattern in story reach. It is a figure which shows the change of a random number extraction range in chronological order. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pseudo continuous effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pseudo continuous production control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern table for selecting a scenario in the case of a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure explaining the production example of the pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure explaining the timing of the control of a pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure explaining the modification of the control timing of the pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure explaining the control timing of the special pseudo-continuous production. This is an example of a lottery table used for the special symbol variation pattern setting process and the variation type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fake pseudo-continuous production lottery. Tables used for fake pseudo-continuous production lottery, (a) table for variable type 10H, (b) table for variable type 11H, (c) table for variable type 12H, (d) for variable type 13H It is a table of. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the decorative pattern variation processing. A time chart for explaining the step-up effect, (a) a time chart for explaining the degree of expectation for the step-up effect, (b) a pseudo-continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, and a pseudo / pseudo-continuous effect. It is a time chart for explaining the relationship between each fluctuation of the above and the step-up effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode when the pseudo continuous effect is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode when the fake pseudo-continuous effect is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the production mode at the time of performing the pseudo / fake pseudo-continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fake pseudo-continuous production timing lottery. This is an example of a timing lottery table used for the counterfeit pseudo-continuous production timing lottery when the number of special symbol stops (number of counterfeit pseudo-continuous production times G) is 1, and is (a) a table for variable type 10H, (b) variable. A table for type 11H, (c) a table for variable type 12H, and (d) a table for variable 13H. This is an example of a timing lottery table used for a pseudo-continuous production timing lottery when the number of special symbol stops is two, and is (a) a table for variable type 10H, (b) a table for variable type 11H, and (c). ) This is a table for variable type 12H. This is an example of a timing lottery table used for a pseudo-continuous production timing lottery when the number of times of special symbol stop is three, and is a table for variable type 11H. This is another example of the timing lottery table used for the pseudo-continuous production timing lottery when the number of times of special symbol stop is two, and is a table for variable type 11H. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fake pseudo-continuous production setting processing performed as the processing on the peripheral control board side at the start of fluctuation. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode when the fake pseudo-continuous effect is executed during SP reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure look-ahead effect control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of a normal look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the continuous look-ahead effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table for selecting the mode (specific effect) of a continuous look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen transition of the continuous look-ahead effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the normal drawing look-ahead effect processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a pre-reading effect. This is an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of the command related to the special figure look-ahead among the commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and is a modification of the command of "8-10. Other" described above in FIG. It is an example of a table showing an example. This is an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of the command related to the special figure look-ahead among the commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and is a modification of the command of "8-10. Other" described above in FIG. It is an example of a table showing an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the memory look-ahead processing of a modification. (A) is an example of a simplified flowchart in which the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the variation distribution table described above, and (B) is a reach according to the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. This is an example of an executeability table. (A) is an example of a table showing a condition for prohibiting pre-reading by the main control board 4100 of the modified example, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting pre-reading at the time of state transition. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the received command analysis processing of the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead prohibition count processing in the reception command analysis processing of the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the received command analysis processing of the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the input unknown flag setting processing in the reception command analysis processing of the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the unknown count processing in the reception command analysis processing of the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure look-ahead execution determination processing in the reception command analysis processing of the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot opening display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect transition in the probability change time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect mode transition process executed by the peripheral control MPU450a.

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko game machines]
Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine as the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. Yes, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and a box that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and has an open front side. A game board 4 having a frame-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a player side of the main body frame 3 and the front surface of the game board 4 It is provided with a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the door frame 3. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko game machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 are stored. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. , Is equipped.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when viewed from the front, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction, and the horizontal widths in the left and right directions are substantially the same. In addition to the dimensions, the vertical width in the vertical direction is formed so that the dimensions of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than those of the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 to open the door frame 2.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when viewed from the front, the gaming area 1100 in which the gaming ball is driven is facing through the substantially circular gaming window 101, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the gaming window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the inside of the game area 1100 can be visually recognized by the player, the player inserts a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to play the game. It is not possible to touch the game balls, obstacle nails, various winning openings, and accessories in the area 1100.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (up and down) direction, and their respective frame plates. It is provided with four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of 10, 11, 12, and 13, and by connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 to each other with the connecting member 14, a vertically long rectangular shape ( It is assembled in a square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. An upper support metal fitting 20, which will be described later, is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal mold materials (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape. It should be noted that a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when installing the pachinko game machine 1 in the pachinko island facility of the game hall. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

The outer frame 2 is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. A support metal fitting 21, a reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. 23 and. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. The main body frame shaft support formed on the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 is inserted. After inserting into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 can be easily locked by locking the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 to the support hook hole 20c. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) attached and fixed to the inside of the right side frame plate 13 which are arranged apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054, 1065 (FIG. 1) of the locking device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are connected by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. The engagement can be released and the closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released.

[3. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided on the front surface side of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming the skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 are pivotally supported, A ball launching device 650 attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600 to drive a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A prize ball unit 700 for paying out balls and a game ball from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. It is provided with a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 that blocks the flow of the door.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a unit, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view to open / close the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and to open / close the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is mainly provided.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is formed so as to have a predetermined amount of depth in the front-rear direction. Has been done. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port 601 capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 through a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part, and the main body frame. The U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the base 600 in front view, and the front end frame portion 602 are recessed from the front to the rear, and the door frame 5 is recessed from the lower end to the rear of the door frame base body 110. The protruding door frame projecting piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent projecting piece 167 (see FIG. 1) projecting rearward from the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It is provided with an engaging groove 603 into which an open-side outer bent projectile 164 (see FIG. 1) projecting rearward is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. It includes a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 (upper and lower left end portions when viewed from the front) so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed by forming the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and mounting the game board 4 on the game board mounting portion 606 and the game board mounting portion 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a game board stop of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. A game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fastened, and a plate-shaped upper end regulating rib 609 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and has a lower end that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And have. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. There is. Further, the game board locking portion can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. .. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in the front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step toward the rear side from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the ball striking device is formed on the right front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The ball launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the 650 is accommodated in the solenoid accommodating recess. When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a foul space 626 extending to the left and downward is formed on the left side of the front view of the upper end of the launch rail 660 in the ball launching device 650. It has become like. In the present embodiment, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e in the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626.
(See FIG. 1) is located, and the game ball descending the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, and the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300 (FIG. 7). It is designed to be discharged to (see).

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and a plurality of openings on the upper side of the openings and on both the left and right sides in the front view. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating through. The opening of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal plate cover 692 from the front side, and the substrate unit is attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main door relay terminal plate 880 of 800 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 face the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction through the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. A door frame opening switch 618 is attached to the door frame, and when the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It has become like. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released so that the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 will be described. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, so that the door frame 5 can be attached to the main body frame 3. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 while being able to be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable.

The upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped forward extending that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The shaft pin 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633 (FIG. 7). The door frame shaft support hole 634 that penetrates in the vertical direction into which the door frame 5 is inserted, and the front extension portion 632 that hangs downward from the left end portion in the front view to regulate the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. It is equipped with a stopper. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 631, a front extending portion 632, and a stopper by bending and molding a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642 to pivotally support the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Main body frame shaft support bracket 644 and. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 has a plate-shaped mounting portion that is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front The extension portion 642b is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion in the front view and regulates the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 has a mounting portion, a front extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 has a plate-shaped mounting portion that is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b to be extended and a main body frame shaft support hole penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is also integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion and a front extending portion 644b.

The lower shaft support bracket 640 is in a state in which the mounting portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame shaft support bracket 642 The front extension portion 642b and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion of the main body frame base 600.

With the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 attached to the main body frame base 600, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are coaxially above each other. The main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 fits into the support protrusion 21d (see FIG. 4) of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. The front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 so as to be inserted, and then the shaft of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hook hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support metal fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. It has become like.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached. The door frame is positioned coaxially with 642c, and the door frame is inserted so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of 5 (see FIG. 7) on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed on the door frame of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting it into the shaft support hole 634, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. Is once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 overlap each other, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 will be described. The ball striking device 650 is attached to the launch base 652 of a metal plate attached to the front predetermined position of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so that the rotation drive shaft 654a projects forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. The launching solenoid 654, the hammer 656 fixed integrally with the rotation drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654, the mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the predetermined position on the movement trajectory of the mallet 658. The hammer tip 658 at the tip of the ball hammer 656 passes between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660, which extends diagonally to the upper left from the position as the base end. A ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and a game held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662. It is provided with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position where the ball can be hit.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the rotation drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. .. Further, the ball striking mallet 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape to the axial center of the rotary drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a solenoid portion 656b in which the tip 658 is fixed to the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can come into contact with the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a It has. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

When the ball striking device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. It is located below 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601), and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction with the lower end of the outer rail 1111 in the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed at. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game is played. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the area 1100 falls in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko island facility in the hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, after storing the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko game machine 1, the upper plate 301 of the pachinko game machine 1 is stored based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is to be paid out to. The prize ball unit 700 receives and stores the prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and the game balls attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and supplied from the Pachinko Island facility side. The 720, the tank rail unit 730 arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and storing the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730 are predetermined. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction and the game ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. It is mainly equipped with a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer circumference of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. One end side of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, so that the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and allows the game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 to be leveled and aligned.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls to be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction, and has a left end (shaft support side) end in front view. The bottom is tilted so that

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuously connected to the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in the front view. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the rail 731, and a ball stop piece 735 that can advance and retreat into the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port side. , Is equipped. Two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a supply passage that opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball, and a predetermined width that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage. The distribution space with space, the prize ball passage that communicates with the lower end of the left side (open side) of the distribution space and opens in the left side of the back view, and the right side of the back view of the distribution space. (Shaft support side) It is equipped with a ball pulling passage that communicates with the lower end and extends downward to open at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 is integrally rotatably fixed to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 and is arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate. The first gear, the second gear that meshes with the first gear, and the second gear mesh with each other. The third gear, the payout rotating body that rotates integrally with the third gear and is arranged in the distribution space, and the payout rotating body are fixed so as to be integrally rotatable on opposite sides of the third gear and are equal in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a rotation detection board in which a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) detection slits are formed at intervals, a ball-out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage. Holds a counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down inside, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with a payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752. It includes a rotation angle switch board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and a prize ball case inner board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle switch 752 and the payout control board described later.

The payout rotating body is provided with three recesses having a size capable of accommodating each game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the payout rotating body, one game ball supplied from the supply passage is provided. They are housed in recesses one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage or the ball removal passage side. Further, the three detection slits formed in the rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are formed in equal parts (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detection board, and correspond to the recesses of the payout rotating body. Each position is provided, and by detecting the detection slit with the rotation angle switch 752, the rotation position of the payout rotating body can be detected. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (delivery rotating body) is designed to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the payout motor 744.

In the prize ball device 740, when the payout rotating body is rotated in the direction counterclockwise when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the prize ball passage, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted one by one by the counting switch 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation member is operated by a clerk in the hall or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are discharged to the ball removal passage, and the game balls discharged to the ball removal passage are discharged. It can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the full tank branch unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end to win the prize ball device 740. The prize ball socket that receives the game ball that has flowed down the ball passage, the branch space that is located below the prize ball receiver and spreads in the left-right direction, and the game from directly below the prize ball receiver in the branch space to the front side. The normal passage that guides the ball, the normal ball outlet 774 that discharges the game ball that has passed through the normal passage forward and opens at the right end of the front view, and the normal ball outlet 774 that opens at the right end of the front end It is equipped with a full tank passage that guides the game ball from the vertical position toward the front side, and a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball that has passed through the full tank passage to the front and opens to the left side of the front view of the normal ball outlet 774. ing.

In addition, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port that opens upward to the left end of the upper rear end in front view and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball ejection passage of the prize ball device 740, and a ball ejection / receiving port. A ball pulling passage that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side, and a ball pulling passage that circulates through the ball pulling passage and is discharged forward at the left end of the front view at a position behind the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776. It is equipped with an open ball outlet.

In the full tank branch unit 770, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first ball inlets 542a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. And the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1) and communicate with each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and serves as a dish. The game ball supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. Further, the ball ejection port is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the rear view of the main body frame base ball extraction passage in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball extraction outlet is formed in the main body frame of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be handed over to the base ball removal passage.

When the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls and the game balls are further discharged from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the upper plate 301 of the foul cover unit 540 is above the first ball outlet. The game ball that cannot go out to the plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the upstream normal passage through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball socket cannot normally enter the passage, starts to move laterally in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved laterally is full. It penetrates into the tongue passage and is supplied from the full tank outlet to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball entrance 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage, and the second ball outlet. It has become.

[3-5. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the board unit 800 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a substrate. The power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 810 and the power supply board box attached to the rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820. The 850, the payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and the terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in the front view. A main door relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810 are provided.

The power supply board box holder 840 has an discharge ball receiving portion 841 that is opened upward and receives the downwardly discharged game ball discharged from the out ball discharging portion of the game board 4 on the left front side of the left and right center when viewed from the front. The discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 are opened forward and upward in front of the side (right side in front view). The entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is formed so as to be recessed toward the front side, and includes a box accommodating portion capable of accommodating the front end of the power supply board box 850.

Further, in the power supply board box holder 840, the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. It is formed and flows down through the opening of the board unit base 810 to the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the main body frame base ball pulling passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600. The game ball and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharging part of the game board 4 and received by the discharging ball receiving part 841 can be discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 through the discharging passage 842. It has become.

The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. The power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

The payout control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has an open rear, a thin box-shaped cover 862 that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and has an open front, and a box base 861. A payout control board 4110, which is attached to the rear surface and whose rear surface is covered by the cover 862, is provided. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are crimped and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation cutting portion 863 must be cut before the separation can be performed, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

Further, in the payout control board box 860, the operation switch 860a (error canceling unit) attached to the payout control board 4110, the inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through the cover 862. Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated when the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 are cleared when the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. When an error is notified, it is operated to clear the error, and the function to clear the RAM at the time of turning on the power and the period to play the function as clearing the RAM have passed after turning on the power. It has a function to cancel the error in (later). A detailed description of this point will be described later.

The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the rear surface of the board base 871 and fixed to the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 toward the rear, and a board base. A board so that the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, which is attached to the rear surface of 871 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 is fixed to the rear, and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. It includes a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency display for displaying the operating status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko island facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, and is for connecting to a CR unit relay. Terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided on the door frame 5 together with the peripheral control board 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. The purpose is to relay the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so that they face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

The front side of the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is covered by the relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the relay terminal plate cover 692 Only the connection terminals face the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a neat appearance.

Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a loan balance display unit 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the full switch 550 of the switch 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Regarding the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362, the loan balance display unit 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540. The description will be described later.

Further, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. , To relay the connection between various switches that detect the operations of the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401, and the pressing operation unit 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Is. The decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor 414 and dial operation provided on the operation unit 400. A description of various switches for detecting the operation of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape), and a door. The right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and the left side attached to the left outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame base unit arranged below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It includes a pair of side speaker covers 290 that are attached to the front of the 100.

Further, the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100, the plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101, the operation unit 400 attached to the center of the upper part of the plate unit 300, and the right side of the plate unit 300. The handle device 500, which is attached to the lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 through the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the plate unit 300 and is used to drive the game ball, sandwiches the door frame base unit 100. A foul cover unit 540 arranged on the rear side of the plate unit 300 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a door frame. A glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the base unit 100 so as to close the game window 101 is provided.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body 110 having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape with an inner circumference penetrating in the front-rear direction and a door frame. An upper bracket 120 attached to the center of the upper part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the base body 110 to fix the upper decorative unit, and a pair of sides attached to the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. It includes a speaker 130 and a handle bracket attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and a game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower portion, and a glass unit locking member 190 (FIG. 1) rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. 1) and the launch cover 191 (see FIG. 1) which is arranged on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101. , A handle relay terminal plate attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 under the launch cover 191 and relaying the connection between the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and the main control board 4100 provided in the game board 4 described later. 192 (see FIG. 1), the handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and the launch cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 with the center in the left-right direction sandwiched. Frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 (see Fig. 1), which is arranged on the opposite side (rear view, to the right of the center in the left-right direction (shaft support side)) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body, and frame decoration drive. It includes a frame-decorated drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the amplifier board 194.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. It is provided with an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. Although specific illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, each decorative board provided in the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided in the operation unit 400. The wiring that electrically connects the switch, the handle relay terminal board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. is the rear view of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. After being bundled at the position on the right side (shaft support side), it extends rearward and is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base body 110 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape, and is formed in such a form that the game window 101 having a vertically long inner shape and a substantially elliptical shape is offset upward as a whole through the front and rear directions. Has been done. In the game window 101, the left and right side and the upper inner peripheral edge are formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the door frame base body 110 on the lower side of the game window 101, a square notch is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view) through which the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted. The right (open side) end of the front surface, which is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101 and is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view to attach and fix the side speaker 130. A handle mounting part for mounting the handle bracket, a wiring passage port that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting part and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and an upper side of the handle mounting part. A lock hole 116 is formed which is formed in a tubular shape extending shortly toward the front and through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in the front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a shaft support attached along the back surface of the shaft support side of the door frame base body 110. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the open side of the door frame base body 110, and the game window 101 of the door frame base body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 1) that is attached along the lower back surface of the lower side, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

At the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, an upper shaft support 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface thereof in the vertical direction and a lower shaft support 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface thereof are provided. It is provided integrally. Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 630 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 is provided in the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating the main body frame 3 in the direction opposite to the opening direction with respect to the outer frame 2), the hook portion for the door frame The engagement between the 1041 and the hook cover 165 is disengaged, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 will be described. The plate unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740, and launches the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 via the ball feeding unit. It can be supplied to the device 650.

The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to project forward from the left side to the center when viewed from the front, and is linearly forward from the center to the right direction. It is formed so as to protrude. An operation unit mounting portion to which the operation unit 400 is mounted is formed in the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a liquid crystal mounting portion 314d for mounting the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit mounting portion. .. The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 on which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and when a player presses this portion downward by hand, for example, the upper plate upper panel 314 bends downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, so when the player presses the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. By bending the upper plate upper panel 314, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is damaged. If the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 will be replaced. In this case, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is removed from the broken upper plate upper panel 314 and attached to the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 to be replaced for reuse.

Further, the plate unit 300 has an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341, and a lower plate ball removing button 354. A lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward through the lower plate ball removing hole 324b in response to the operation of, and a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1 (not shown). It is equipped with a ball rental unit 360 that operates a CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is arranged in front of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and has a dial operation unit 401 (operation unit) that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) that the player can press. It is equipped with an operation unit), which can accept the player's operation and the dial operation unit 401 to move according to the game state, and not only the player can drive the game ball. , It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game. The rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by the rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is detected by the pressure detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 stepwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation of rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward direction and the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 in the reverse direction in small steps.

[4-2-2. Ball rental unit]
The ball lending unit 360 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the residual frequency display 365c can be visually recognized via the loan residual display unit 363. The CR unit lamp 365d is arranged adjacent to the residual power display 365c, and the light emitting mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized via the rental residual display unit 363. The ball rental switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining frequency indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display board 365, and the frequency display plate 365 is mounted inside the ball rental unit 360. .. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1, and then presses the ball lending button 361 to release a predetermined number of game balls into a plate unit. You can rent (pay out) into the upper plate 301 of 300, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of cash and prepaid card that you put in after subtracting the rest of the lent amount will be returned. ing. In addition, the loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball feed unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be used as the upper plate balls. It can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the pulling mechanism 340.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. , And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball outlet that opens under the entrance and the rear is open, and a box-shaped front that closes the rear end of the front cover and is open in the front, penetrating in the front-rear direction. Rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover having a hit ball supply port 582a for supplying the game ball invading from the entry port of the front cover to the hit ball launcher 650, and the rear cover and the front cover. A ball pulling member that is pivotally supported and has a partition portion that separates the entrance and the ball pulling port on the rear side of the front cover, and a game ball on the partition portion of the ball pulling member are hit by the rear cover one by one. A ball feed member rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover and the rear cover to the supply port 582a, and a ball feed solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feed member are provided. There is.

When the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member accepts one game ball, while when the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member accepts one ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launching device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 includes a handle base that is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 and has a cylindrical shape and a front end that bulges round in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base that can rotate relative to the handle base. It is arranged in front of the rotary handle body front 506, which is fixed to the front surface after the annular rotary handle body arranged on the front side, and which can rotate integrally with the rotary handle body rear, and the rotary handle body front 506. It is also provided with a front end cover 508 that is fixed to the handle base and rotatably supports the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear of the rotary handle body in cooperation with the handle base.

Further, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed to the rotation center in front of the rotary handle body so as to project from the front side to the rear side, and is fitted with a shaft member having a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end and a bearing portion of the shaft member. Detection of the potentiometer 512, which has a rotating detection shaft and is non-rotatably fitted to the front of the handle base, and the potentiometer 512, which is fixed to the front of the handle base so as to sandwich the potentiometer 512 with the handle base. A switch support member having a through hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a launch stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member from the touch switch 516. , A single-shot button that is rotatably supported by the switch support member to operate the launch stop switch 518, and is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member, and the original rotation position (front) is in front of the rotary handle body 506 and after the rotary handle body. It is equipped with a handle return spring that urges the player to return to the rotating end in the counterclockwise direction. The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. Further, the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear of the rotary handle body rotate from the original rotation position to the limit rotation position (rotation end in the clockwise direction in the front view) which is the maximum rotation position in the clockwise direction in the front view. To do.

Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear of the rotary handle body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. .. Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512. The game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle in front of the main body 506 and after the main body of the rotary handle, that is, the rotation position in front of the main body of the rotary handle 506 and after the main body of the rotary handle. There is.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is a game despite being fired by the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the hit ball launching device 650. The game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base whose front side is open and which has a plurality of game ball flow paths inside, and a front cover that closes the front end of the cover base.

The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 is arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Inside the one-ball passage, the second ball entrance 542c, which is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side when viewed from the rear) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a, and inside the cover base that communicates with the second ball passage. The second ball entrance 542c, which extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view, is provided. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. It is formed at a position opposite to each other. In the second ball passage in the cover base, the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball, and a predetermined amount of game ball can be used. A storage space that can be accommodated is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 communicates with the foul ball entrance 542e, which is arranged at the substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and the foul ball inlet 542e, which can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream side of the second ball passage. It has a ball passage and. Further, the cover base is provided with an opening / closing operating piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing actuating piece comes into contact with the spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank and open / close the shutter 792. It can be in the open state.

The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, and is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base and penetrates in the front-rear direction. It includes an exit and a second ball outlet that is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to the upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through the notch of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port of the door frame base main body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 allows the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a to pass through the first ball passage from the first ball outlet to the plate unit 300. It can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port. Further, the foul cover unit 540 allows the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c from the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. It can be supplied to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter and the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300.

Further, in the foul cover unit 540, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located at the lower part of the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and the hit ball launching device. When the game ball launched by the 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game ball received at the foul ball entrance 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. You can do it.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in the front view) of the accommodation space in the second ball passage, and is oscillated by a game ball stored in the accommodation space and is pivotally supported by the cover base. It includes a member, a full tank switch 550 that detects the swing of the swing member, and a spring that urges the swing member in a direction in which the swing member is not detected by the full tank switch 550. The lower end of this swing member is rotatably supported with respect to the cover base, and the upper end rotates to the left side when viewed from the front, so that the left side wall of the accommodation space is substantially vertical. It is designed to form. Further, the swing member is urged by a spring to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member is formed with a detection piece protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full tank switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 8 as viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is driven by a player operating a handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110 that divides the outer periphery, and a position that can be visually recognized from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko game machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front component 1110 A function display unit 1180 arranged in the above, and a plurality of openings 1158 attached to the rear side of the front component 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1150, a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

Further, the game board 4 is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A liquid crystal display device that is detachably attached to the rear side of the panel lens member 2500 and the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image that is visible from the player side according to the game state, and the lower part of the back unit 3000. The board holder 1160 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the game panel 1150 from the rear side, and the main control board box 1170 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 will be described. The outer shape of the front component 1110 is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape, and the game is played by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The outer circumference of the region 1100 is partitioned. The front component 1111 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The inner rail 1112, which is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the inner rail 1112 so as to be smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. The inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) and outer rail 1111 of the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary between the abutment portion 1114, which is connected to the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 can come into contact with the game ball, and the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, the game area 1100 From the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close between the out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowermost end and lowered toward the rear and the outer rail 1111 rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112. It is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward and the open position where it rotates clockwise in the front view and opens between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. It includes a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring.

Assuming that the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 of the front component 1110 is the launch rail 660 in the ball launching device 650 of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 1). It is designed to be located on the extension line of). A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launcher 650 is formed. The space is jumped over, and the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to invade the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the abutment portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the abutting portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. Even if the game ball that has entered (dried) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. As a result, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

Further, if the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is not accepted by the start ports 2101, 1022 and the winning ports 2103, 2104, 2201 of the front unit 2000, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. The out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 guides the game panel 1150 to the out port 1151 and discharges the game board 4 downward from the out port 1151. ..

On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 are combined. A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, rolling downward in the opposite direction. (See FIG. 1) will fall and will be accepted by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the bottom of the foul space 626 in the dish unit 300. It is designed to be discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7).

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 to improve the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. Further, the abutting portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides with the abutment portion 1114, the impact is alleviated. In addition to being able to repel the game ball inward.

Further, the front component 1110 is vertically separated from the left end of the front view, and is vertically separated from the pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged, a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side in the front view and opened downward, and the upper side formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side, and the lower end in the front view. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the above, a notch portion 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with the positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the game board holding port 601 (see FIG. 5) is fitted. ), The left end of the front view of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be locked to the game board clerk. By locking the stop portion, it is possible to restrict the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction.

Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a game board fixing tool 690 (FIG. 5) pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 with the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When the game board fixture 690 is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view), the fixing piece 690a (see FIG. 5) of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board 4 is inserted by the game board fixture 690. The lower end of the clock is restricted from moving forward. Further, in the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110, a similar ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the state of being inserted into, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the notch portion 1122, 1152 for the ball passage.

A function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged at the lower right of the front view of the front component 1110.

[5-2. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The front unit 2000 is an attacker unit 2100 arranged above the out port 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and an outer circumference of the game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A side winning opening member 2200 arranged along the above and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged along a substantially central portion of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150. There is.

The table unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. The portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is located within the game area 1100. As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and with the obstacle nails planted in the front surface of the game panel 1150, the movement of the game ball It is possible to give a change. Further, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) that allow the game balls driven into the game area 1100 to be accepted, and specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction. A rectangle that is located below the start port 2101, the lower start port 2102 located below the upper start port 2101, and below the lower start port 2102, and extends significantly in the left-right direction from the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. It is provided with a large winning opening 2103 having a shape and a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly above the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103. The game balls accepted by the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the large winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

The upper start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, in the lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by the starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 100) are arranged between the lower starting port 2102 and the upper starting port 2101. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stands up substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make the game ball unacceptable to the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces are movable. When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be accepted into the lower starting port 2102. That is, the lower starting port 2102 is a variable winning opening (variable winning device) by the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the start port solenoid 2105 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

Further, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2107 is rotatably supported by the shaft, and in a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it difficult to accept the game ball, and the upper side moves to the front side. When it is rotated to, the large winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be easily accepted. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal gaming state, and a special lottery is drawn when a game ball is accepted (starting prize) in the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102. Depending on the lottery result (when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit"), it is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 100), and the variable winning opening (variable winning device). Consists of.

Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward so that the game ball can always be accepted (winning).

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball received by the lower start port 2102 and a count switch that detects a game ball received by the grand prize opening 2103. 2110 is further provided, and the game ball detected by the lower start port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the board holder 1160. The upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball accepted by the upper starting port 2101 and the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball accepted by the general winning opening 2104 are provided in the back unit 3000. ..

[5-2-2. Side winning opening member]
Next, the side winning opening member 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 was inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 in which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower part of the game panel 1150 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction. Above, two are fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and are oriented so as to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 2100. It is equipped with a general winning opening 2201. These two general winning openings 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can always be accepted (winning), and the game balls accepted into the general winning opening 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

Further, the side winning opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end portion is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end portion thereof, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right end portion. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on opposite sides and lower sides of the two general winning openings 2201 and are located on the left-right center side of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 and the large winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). It is provided with a second shelf portion 2203 that becomes lower toward (2103 side), and the game ball that has flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202 can be moved toward the center side of the game area 1100. You can do it.

The two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game ball is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. Further, a third shelf portion 2204 inclined so as to be lowered toward the center side of the game area 1100 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning openings 2201.

The side winning opening member 2200 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning opening decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf portion 2203. At the same time, the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 in the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged behind the side winning opening member 2200, and the side winning opening decorative substrate and the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 provide the side winning opening member 2200. Is luminescent and can be decorated.

[5-2-3. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape so as to occupy most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is arcuate so as to form a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball with the outer circumference of the game area 1100. In addition to being formed, the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so as to form a region having a predetermined width from the outer circumference of the game area 1100.

The center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined to the left from a position slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the upper outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150 so as to decrease toward the left. When the game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf part 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2300 and on the right side of the upper shelf part 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (invaded) passes through the right side of the center accessory 2300 and flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at once. That is, if the game ball is driven so that the game ball invades to the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced, so that the driving force of the game ball is strong. It is possible to adjust the sphere as appropriate, and it is possible to maintain a feeling of tension and suppress the game from becoming a vague game.

Further, the center accessory 2300 has invaded the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. A warp outlet (not shown) that discharges the game ball into the frame, and a center accessory that rolls the game ball released from the warp outlet in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. The stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame of the 2300 is mainly provided.

Although detailed illustration of the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is omitted, the first stage to which the game balls released from the warp outlet are supplied and the game balls arranged in front of the first stage are arranged from the first stage. It is provided with a second stage, which is supplied and capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially center in the left-right direction is lowered. Further, a chance entrance 2313 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the first stage substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball invading the chance entrance 2313 is a chance at the lowermost front of the center accessory 2300. It is designed to be discharged into the game area 1100 from the exit 2314. The chance exit 2314 is arranged directly above the upper start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is accepted (wins) in the upper start port 2101 with a high probability. ing.

The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and the decorative body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the stage 2310. It has become.

Further, the center accessory 2300 has a transparent outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150, which extends to the left so as to be substantially in contact with the inner rail 1112 above the warp entrance 2302. It further includes an arch portion 2315. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf portion 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch portion 2315. ..

Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of the game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects a gate entrance on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion, which is arranged above the arch portion 2315 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. The gate switch 2352 and the gate outlet for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100 are provided. In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is an arch. It looks as if you have dived in part 2315.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction in a circular or × shape at a position outside the opening 1158 in which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150. The decorative holes are luminescent and decorated. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the upper left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of panels arranged on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510 on the surface. It is arranged behind the upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, the transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and the lower panel lens 2520. It is provided with a lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface.

The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 project forward from the plate-shaped lens base portion and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion guide guides having substantially the same shape as the shape of the light emitting decorative hole to be inserted. It has a part. When the insertion light guide portion is inserted into the light emitting decorative hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip thereof is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is designed to have as little effect on the sphere as possible.

By appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate, the panel lens member 2500 can illuminate and decorate the area where the gaming ball flows down even if an opaque gaming panel 1150 such as veneer plywood is used. The decoration of the game panel 1150, which has never been seen before, can be shown to the player, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be made to stand out to be differentiated from other pachinko game machines.

[5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and has a back box 3001 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position separated from the game panel 1150 to the rear side by a predetermined distance, and a liquid crystal display in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 arranged on the upper side of the device 1900, the character unit 3400 arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and the gear decoration arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. It mainly has a body unit 3500.

Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A game ball attached to the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 and the lower front end of the back box 3001 and accepted by the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game accepted by the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. The left guiding member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and the right that is arranged on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and guides the game ball received downward to the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2104 on the right side. It mainly includes a guide member 3018.

Further, although detailed illustration of the back unit 3000 is omitted, a horizontally long rectangular lamp drive board box 3423 arranged at the lower rear side of the back box 3001 and accommodating the lamp drive board 4170 and below the lamp drive board box 3423. The horizontally long rectangular motor drive board box 3430 arranged on the side and accommodating the motor drive board 4180, and the lamp drive board box 3423 and the motor drive board box 3430 fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 and arranged on the left side in the rear view. A panel relay terminal board 4161, a horizontally long rectangular upper resistance board arranged on the rear upper side of the back box 3001, and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 to hold the liquid crystal display device 1900 detachably. , Is further equipped.

In the present embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and the units 3100 and 3400 shaped into a predetermined shape are formed. , 3500, etc. make it possible to characterize the concept of the pachinko game machine 1. Further, in the back unit 3000, each unit 3100, 3400, and 3500 can be moved independently or in cooperation with each other according to the game state, and the movement causes the player to change the game state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance, etc., and entertain the player.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portions 3001a. It is designed to be fixed. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed substantially in the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side through the opening can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the back box 3001 is formed with mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3014, and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, although not shown, the back box 3001 inserts and locks a fixed piece 1902 on the right side of the opening in the rear view, which protrudes outward from both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the right side in the rear view). A liquid crystal support portion is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side when viewed from the rear of the opening. The lock member supports the other fixed piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the left side when viewed from the rear) to form a liquid crystal. The display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-4-2. Guidance member]
Next, the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game ball received into the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths. Each flow path is provided with a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of a game ball. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received by the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2104 on the right side through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The flow path corresponding to the upper start port 2101 is provided with the upper start port switch 3022, and the flow path corresponding to the general winning port 2104 on the right side is provided with the general winning port switch 3020. Further, the right guide member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the board holder 1160, and are discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the board holder 1160 to the lower side of the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is formed in a horizontally long shape as a whole, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is arranged in the front at substantially the center in the left-right direction and is arranged in a circular shape in front view, and is arranged behind the rotating decoration unit 3200 to raise and lower the rotating decoration unit 3200. Mainly provided with 3250, a swinging decorative unit 3300 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction behind the elevating mechanism 3250, and movable ceiling units 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decorative unit 3300. ing.

The rotary decorative unit 3200 can be moved in the vertical direction by the elevating mechanism 3250 between the ascending position located at the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the descending position located at substantially the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. In the rotating decoration unit 3200, the rotating decoration formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface rotates, and the rotation causes the rotational radius of the rotating decoration to increase due to the centrifugal force. It has become like.

Further, in the rotating decoration unit 3200, not only the rotating decoration rotates at the end but also the rotating decoration unit protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the turning radius of the entire rotating decoration body is expanded and the appearance is greatly changed. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game, and strongly attract the interest of the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the pachinko gaming machine that plays a game with a great difference from other pachinko gaming machines.

The swinging decoration unit 3300 is provided with swinging decorations arranged on the left and right sides on the rear side so as to be adjacent to the rotating decoration unit 3200 located at the raised position, and the swinging decorations on the left and right are arranged according to the gaming state. The body can be swung left and right all at once.

The movable ceiling unit 3350 is provided with plate-shaped ceiling decorations extending in the horizontal direction at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. The ceiling decoration is rotatably formed around an axis extending in the left-right direction around the front end side, and the rear end side of the ceiling decoration rotates in the descending direction according to the game state. It has become.

[5-4-4. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 is provided with a character body that is modeled and three-dimensionally shaped as a ninja, and the character body moves from the rightmost position to the position closer to the center side in the left-right direction according to the game state. Can be done. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, the character body rotates by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction with the movement.

Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around an axis whose head extends in the left-right direction, and reciprocates around an axis whose right arm extends in the vertical direction. Can be done. As a result, by rotating the head back and forth, it is possible to make the character move as if it were nodding. In addition, by rotating the right arm back and forth in the horizontal direction, it is possible to make the character act as if he were throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration unit]
Next, the gear decoration unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration unit 3500 includes gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in the vertical direction, and the gear decorations are simultaneously arranged according to the game state. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 protruding outward from both the left and right sides, and can be attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing piece 1902.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral substrate box 1905 accommodating a peripheral control substrate 4140 on the rear side thereof.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on a gaming board in a state of being attached to a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 is a game state indicator including LEDs for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end of the front view. It consists of 1183 and two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game status display 1183. The upper special symbol storage display 1184 for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball to the upper starting port 2101, and the upper special The upper special symbol display which is arranged on the right side of the symbol memory display 1184 and consists of a 7-segment LED for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 as the first special symbol. From 1185 and the 7-segment LED for displaying the result of the second special lottery, which is arranged diagonally to the right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and is drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102, as the second special symbol. It consists of a lower special symbol display 1186 and two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186. Lower special symbol storage for displaying the number of reserved game balls to the lower starting port 2102. It is equipped with a display 1187.

The display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186 to display the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game ball. The normal symbol memory display 1188 consisting of the four LEDs of the above, and the normal symbol lottery result arranged under the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing the game ball through the gate 2350 are displayed as the normal symbol. The opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" arranged side by side on the diagonally upper right side of the ordinary symbol display 1189 and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. It is provided with a round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of.

The game status indicator 1183 is a full-color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and various gaming states (depending on the combination of the emission color and lighting / blinking). For example, a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probability change time reduction state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

The upper special symbol memory display 1184 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball is accepted by the upper start opening 2101 when the first special symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 ( The number of reserved first special symbols (stored) is displayed. The upper special symbol storage display 1184 has an upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and an upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b, and depends on the lighting / blinking pattern of the upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of holdings is, the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holdings is two, the upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both turned on. When the number of holds is 3, the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up, and when the number of holds is 4, the upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both blink. .. In this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

The lower special symbol memory display 1187 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball is accepted by the lower starting port 2102 when the lower special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner (1187). The number of reserved second special symbols (stored) is displayed. The lower special symbol storage display 1187 has a lower special symbol storage lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a lower special symbol storage lamp 1187b, and depends on the lighting / blinking pattern of the lower special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of holdings is, the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holdings is 2, the lower special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are both turned on. When the number of holds is 3, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of holds is 4, the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b both blink. .. In this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

The upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. The 7-segment LED is stopped after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are played by the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. It is designed to be recognized by the person (variable display game).

The ordinary symbol display 1189 is a full-color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the gate portion 2350 is played by combining the emission color and lighting / blinking. It is possible to display the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the ball passes through. As with the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the display is changed for a predetermined time.

In the normal symbol storage display 1188, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, the start of the variable display is suspended (stored). It displays the number of holds (the number of memories) of. This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a are arranged from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting ~ 1188d, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, up to four variable displays of ordinary symbols are reserved (stored).

The round indicator 1190 includes a 2-round indicator lamp 1190a and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b composed of predetermined LEDs, and the number of rounds in the "big hit" game can be displayed by turning on each lamp. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. There is. Game status indicator 1183, upper special symbol memory indicator 1184, upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, and The round display 1190 is attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191. A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protruding portion of the function display unit 1180.

In the present embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, it is compared with the case where the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150 are provided. The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the gaming board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table). Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko game machine 1) is different, the position of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player and the game The position of the function display unit 1180 can be recognized by a clerk in the hall without any confusion.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. 11 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 14 is a block diagram around the VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit.

As shown in FIG. 11, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on, and also performs the game operation. The detection signals from the main control MPU4100a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in various control programs such as the main control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 4100b, main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure or momentary voltage of a predetermined voltage. It is mainly equipped with a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e that monitors signs of stoppage.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU4100a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Further, the main control MPU4100a has a built-in non-volatile storage means. In this non-volatile storage means, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile storage means, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU4100a can take out the ID code from the non-volatile storage means and refer to it.

The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 4100b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The upper start port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball entering the upper start port 2101, the lower start port switch 2109 for detecting the game ball entering the lower start port 2102, and the general winning opening 2104 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning port switch 3020 for detecting the entered game ball and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. There is. Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the gate switch 2352 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2350, the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball entering the general winning opening 2201, and the large winning opening 2103 are entered. The detection signals from the count switch 2110 that detects the game ball and the magnetic detection switch 3024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet are relayed to the panel attached to the game board 4. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the terminal plate 4161 and the main control input circuit 4100b.

The main control MPU 4100a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from the 4100ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the start port solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, the upper special symbol display is displayed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function via the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191. 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, upper special symbol storage indicator 1184, lower special symbol storage indicator 1187, ordinary symbol display 1189, ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188, game status indicator 1183, and round indicator 1190 It outputs a drive signal.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the board 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

In the present embodiment, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas they are generally used. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the winning opening switches 3020 and 3020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so that the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. The detection of game balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count switch 2110 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning openings 210 and 2201 in which the game balls do not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100 kb without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100 cc without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 4110. When the payout control board 4110 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data in the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b can be used for the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game production and various commands related to the state of the pachinko game machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100 bc without the reset function. As a result, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cc without the reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured around the main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main control serial I / O ports such as the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae are circuited via the bus 4100ah. It is connected. The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like. When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec outputs a command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100ea and transmission is started to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec. The transmission of various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 is not limited to the method of transmitting as serial data, and may be a method of communicating as parallel data. When transmitting as parallel data, a dedicated process for transmitting as parallel data is provided as a program process, and the command is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the timing when the command is stored in the ring buffer or when the command is stored). Therefore, individual commands may be transmitted at the required timing.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is described as.) BC0 is provided. With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 4100a. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, and a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and a precision plate side liquid crystal display device 470. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs drawing control and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second, and a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is provided with a speaker housed in the door frame 5 and a volume adjusting volume 4140a for adjusting the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 by rotating a knob portion.

[7-2-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. From the peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Peripheral control unit that is executed each time a V-blank signal is input Various information that is continued across the steady processing (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission of various LEDs, etc. Peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores information for managing schedule data that defines the mode, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot game states and special Peripheral control SRAM 4150d that stores information for managing various production flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 4150e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external" for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU4150a is operating normally WDT4150e ”) and.

The peripheral control RAM 4150c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power failure occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 851. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 851 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d has stored contents. Can no longer hold and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU4150a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT4150e to the peripheral control external WDT4150e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the reset is applied. When the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT4150e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT4150e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU4150a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 4100 are received, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board to transmit game board side motor drive data for transmission to drive board 4170 and output drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 4. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 5 from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided on the operation unit 400 The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame. It is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a via the peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is adapted to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT4150e together. It is diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-2-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I. It is composed of a / O port 4150ae, a WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 4150ag, and a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak.

Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT4150af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT4150af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 4150ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT4150af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 4150ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 4150ah, various serial I / O ports 4150ae with peripheral control, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports 4150ag with peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Between the O port 4150ae, the WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d via peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 4150ae, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, via peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h to control the peripheral control CPU core 4150a central processing device, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 4150ae are serial I / O port for lamp drive board, serial I / O port for motor drive board, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring operation unit information.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU4150a is out of control. When this timer is up, it resets in hardware. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT4150e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU4150a can be output, or the upper decoration on the door frame 5 can be output. It outputs a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit 280. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so as to have the volume set in the board volumes 0 to 6. Music and sound effects are played from the provided speaker 130. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. ..

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1, contents related to the game production, etc. (For example, the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player. The notification sound for) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows independently of the sound, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source described later) by a program. .. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating. In the form, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side will be produced as more powerful, or the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-2-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sounds and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP4160a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the above, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid arranged in chronological order, and the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid is specified.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is done is read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b has brightness correction for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side as various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. The program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is an LED type. , The date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, in 5% increments, and presently. It includes the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the first power-on date and time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the LCD display device on the game board side. When the backlight of 1900 is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is the correction information acquired for this 75%, which is added by 10%. The brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-2-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc, and the peripheral control ROM 4150b, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca. Various control program copy areas 4150cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. Various control data copy areas 4150ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 4150cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150 cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cc, and backup second area 4150cc, the power-on command (see FIG. 15) from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. (For example, when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the start of the effect is instructed. ), It is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 4150ca is production information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later. Bank0 (1fr) that exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 4150 cc to the backup second area 4150 cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. In "(1fr)", as will be described later, when the VDP4160a with built-in sound source outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the peripheral control MPU4150a Since a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU4150a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V-blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning.) “(1ms)” is defined as “(1ms)” because the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 in the transmission data storage area 4150ca on the lamp drive board side. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 4150cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, and the like. Has been done. In the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the frame decorative drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 in the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. Dial operation unit 401 created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). (Rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set in this storage area.

Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The 4150 cg of the transmission data storage area on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is placed in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. To. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is in the first and second areas of the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cg. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc, which exclusively store a copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The production information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 4150cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

In addition, the backup second area 4150cc includes Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4.
(1fr) is one pair, Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. Bank0, which is a normally used storage area
The content stored in (1fr) is copied to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every 1 frame (1frame). At the same time, the memory stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. ) Is copied at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). ) Depends on whether or not the contents match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2
This is an area for managing a total of 2 pairs as one page, with (1 ms) as one pair, and the backup second area 4150 cc has Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and This is an area for managing a total of two pairs as one page, with Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame). Each time a steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and are stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area. The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 4150ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-2-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d include a power-on command (see FIG. 15) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure). It instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even when it is), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cc, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot game state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

The backup management target work area 4150da is used to manage various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and a special effect flag), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 4150db to the backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 4150a is backed up in "(RAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 4150db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 4150dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[7-2-2. LCD and sound control unit]
Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3, and music, sound effects, etc. played from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG. 12, the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 that perform sound control include a built-in sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"). Displayed on the sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Music Speaker) 4160a that controls the drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b that stores various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen to be displayed, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 that uses serialized music and sound effects as audio data. It is provided with an audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmission. The liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b include image data of a suggestion display object used for displaying a suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the operation unit 400 should be operated, and a main body frame as seen from the player. The position of each part on the back of 3 can be visually recognized. The back image data of the main frame used for displaying the back image of the main frame, the service mode screen image data used for displaying the service mode screen, and the break timer setting used for displaying the break timer setting screen. The screen image data and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is set to 4150 cae, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various types of peripheral control RAM 4150c. After extracting from the control data copy area 4150ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, when the V blank signal described later is input, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, each time a V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP4160a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is set in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control of the peripheral control unit 4150. After extracting from various control data copy areas 4150ce of RAM 4150c and outputting to VDP4160a with built-in sound source, when a V blank signal is input, the first sound according to the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next sound command data following the command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU4150a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP4160a.

[7-2-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP4160a is a game board from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. 14 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP4160a outputs the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are synchronized. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a becomes Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is output from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and the upper plate side. The image data for the liquid crystal display device 470 is output from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and outputs image data for the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 470, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU4150a is configured to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Further, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted.

The sound source built-in VDP4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

Further, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on the command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP4160a has music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set and the music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. ..

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of the above and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1. A subvolume value that adjusts is incorporated. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound is calculated. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified production sound is serialized as audio data. It is designed to output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 is amplified to the master volume value. The volume flowing from the speaker housed in the door frame 5 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a is rotated to adjust the substrate volume, and the volume of the combined production sound is actually transmitted to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the accommodated speaker and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, and this amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Is based on the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment, is combined, and the volume of the combined notification sound is actually combined with the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. It is amplified from 130 to the master volume value that is the volume that flows, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, a problem occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 or the pachinko game machine 1 is affected. To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of fraudulent activity, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are combined and this is performed. The volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that actually flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. Then, the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the effect sound is for sound generation described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute is subordinated to the board volume that is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. It is set again as a volume value (at this time, if it is adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode, it is a sub of the adjusted effect sound. The volume value is set), and the sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, a defect occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 or the pachinko game machine 1 occurs. When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent act against the above, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is provided in the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the sound flows from the speaker 130, the muted production sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound is housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 after a predetermined period of time has passed. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but follows the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-2-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b are for drawing on the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-2-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right side audio data as positive signal and negative signal to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which a positive signal and a negative signal are used. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make the left audio data. Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-2-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU4150a. The effect based on this can be developed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side, or on New Year's Eve, a new year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is of the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the panel side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side, is included.

Further, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU4150a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the year when the input date and time information was input on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is of the LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period when the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side can be desired. It can be adjusted to brightness. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is installed. The decrease in brightness due to the aging of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU4150a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. The current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[7-2-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 4140a rotates the knob portion to control the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by doing. As described above, the resistance value of the volume adjusting volume 4140a is changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source) are controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided. Music and sound effects are played from the speaker 130.

In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. .. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Announce the contents related to the game production (for example, it is highly possible that the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is produced as more powerful, or the game state is likely to shift to an advantageous game state for the player. The notification sound for playing, etc.) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are operated by rotating the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the above, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source) by a program. ing.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating. In the form, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a, the dial operating portion 401 of the operation unit 400 and pressing are performed. By operating the operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period when the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. Therefore, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. .. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume adjusting volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 3 is open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated, or the pachinko game machine 1 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the operation unit 400 is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is felt loud and the music or sound effect is noisy, the operation unit 400 can be used. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, is in a waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the gaming board side is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). ), The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, this time, the front of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. A player who sits and plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels the volume adjusted loudly and the music or sound effect is noisy, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game is the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400. The volume can be reduced to a desired level by operating 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. 15 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 16 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. ..

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and status indicating the type of the command. It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). Further, these various commands include an effect-related command for controlling the effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140, a notification-related command for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power-on, the normal electric role effect, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[8-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special drawing 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and the classification is divided into the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands such as a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern, a special figure 1 symbol type, a special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and a state designation at the time of fluctuation regarding the above special symbol display 1185. To these various commands, "A * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is shown, and more specifically, it is shown in FIG. 15).

The special figure 1 variation pattern command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 1 symbol type command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command indicates the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable time state specification command is the game state (high probability state, time saving) at the time of the change start of special figure 1 or special figure 2. It is a command indicating the game state, etc.). The fluctuating state specification command has a value corresponding to the gaming state and the mode value, and is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation or when the gaming state is switched. In addition, other commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect include a special figure 1 fluctuation type command (status "A3H", mode "01H to 10H") for specifying the fluctuation type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special figure 1 symbol type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command, and the special figure 1 synchronization is performed. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed). Further, the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 symbol type command. The special figure 1 variation type command is transmitted after the special figure 1 variation pattern command. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[8-2. Special figure 2 synchronization production related]
The special drawing 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and the classification is divided into the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. It is composed of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, a special figure 2 symbol type, and a command named special figure 2 synchronization effect end regarding the lower special symbol display 1186. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is shown, and more specifically, it is shown in FIG. 15).

The special figure 2 variation pattern command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 2 symbol type command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The special figure 2 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect. Further, similarly to the special figure 1, the special figure 2 fluctuation type command (status “B3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying the fluctuation type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is included.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special figure 2 symbol type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern. The end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Further, as described above, in the case of the special figure 2 as in the case of the special figure 1, the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 symbol type command. The special figure 2 variation type command is transmitted after the special figure 2 variation pattern command. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-3. Big hit related]
As shown in FIG. 15, the categories related to big hits include big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open Nth display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. To these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 15, for example).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The opening of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2103 or the opening start) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (the large winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). It indicates (during closing or starting closing) between 2103 rounds, and the large winning opening 1 count display command has counted 0 to 10 counts (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2103) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command instructs the jackpot symbol information display. is there.

In the jackpot ending command shown in FIG. 15, only one type of status and mode is set, but the mode value may be set according to the gaming state after the jackpot. For example, if the game state after the big hit is a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the mode value is set to "01H", and if the game state after the big hit is a high-probability short-time game state, the mode value is set to "04H". The ending may be specified on the main control board 4100 side by setting or the like. Further, even if the game state after the big hit is the same, a plurality of endings may be specified. For example, when the game state is a high-probability non-time-saving game state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the winning probability of the special lottery, so whether the ending has a high probability or a low probability on the main control board 4100 side. May be specified. At this time, the ending may be selected on the peripheral control board 4140 side without specifying the ending with the jackpot ending command.

In addition, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command starts during the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is open or open. The small hit count display command indicates (start), and the small hit count display command is used when the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (during the small hit, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110). The production) is instructed, and the small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (large attacker unit 2100). It is sent when the Nth round of the winning opening 2103 is opened), and the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big winning opening 1 is closed (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 starts closing), and the big winning opening 1 is closed. The mouth 1 count display command is a count switch when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2103 is opened. (When detected by 2110), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is transmitted when the jackpot symbol is opened (when the jackpot 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). To.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), and the small hit ending command is It is sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 15, the power-on category is composed of various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned a status of "D * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 15, for example).

The power-on command commands the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. is there).

As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on processing described later is executed, and the periphery of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing. The power-on command is transmitted in the control board command transmission process.

[8-5. Fuzu synchronization production related]
The normal diagram tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and the classification is divided into the ordinary symbol display of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the device 1189, which are named as the start of the normal figure synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. Each of these commands is assigned a status of "E * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 15, for example).

The normal pattern synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol specification command specifies the miss, short open hit, and long open hit. The normal-figure synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal-figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Ordinary symbol is transmitted when the fluctuation time elapses (when the ordinary symbol is confirmed), and the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 11, and the division is as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named opening per figure, open display of solenoid, and ending per figure. To these various commands, "F * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 15, for example).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2106 expands in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2105). The ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is sent when the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the start port solenoid 2105). It is transmitted at the time of expanding in the left-right direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the notification display is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. ing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 for example).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit (even though it is not a big hit) other than during the big hit (condition device is operating). When the count switch 2110 detects it), the start of the winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, the connection abnormality notification is instructed to start, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. Instructs the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display when the electrical connection is broken / short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. In this case, the magnetic detection switch indicates the start of abnormality notification.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 5 opens with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In this state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is such that the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch. When it is in a state, it instructs the end of the door opening notification. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 3 is directed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When it is in the opened state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed, and the main body frame closing command closes the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch. This is to instruct the end of the main body frame opening notification when the state is set.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 when the command is sent to, the disconnection / short circuit error display command is among the upper start port switch 3022, lower start port switch 2109, count switch 2110, etc. , Which is transmitted when the wire is broken or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch), and the door frame is transmitted. The closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch), and the main body frame is opened. The closing command is transmitted when the closing of the main body frame is detected (when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 16, the status display division consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error clearing navigation command (corresponding to an error clearing command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 16 for example).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it outputs "7 * H" as shown in FIG. While setting it as a status, set the received command as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU4100a adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed. , And when the frame state changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 16, the test-related division is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 16 for example).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 12). It inspects various boards such as the decorative drive amplifier board 194).

The test command is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-10. Others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 16, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. To these various commands, "9 * H" and "5 * H" are assigned as statuses, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode ("*" is specific. It indicates that it is a hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 16, for example).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect, and when a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or the lower starting opening. When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal from the switch 2109, the starting port is instructed to win a prize. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command instructs the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state. The high-probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. The special symbol 1 storage command has 0 to 4 special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and a variable display of the special symbol is displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191. It tells the number of balls that have not been used yet (number of held balls). The special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 8 and the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191 displays the variation of the special symbol. It tells the number of balls that have not been used yet (number of held balls). The normal symbol memory command is still used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. It conveys the number of balls that have not been held (the number of pending balls).

The special symbol 1 hold number designation command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 1 operation hold balls increases (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 and the hold number increases). The special symbol 2 hold number designation command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation hold balls increases (when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the hold number increases). Further, the special symbol 1 hold number specification command and the special symbol 2 hold number specification command have a look-ahead when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are "1", and look-ahead when the upper bit of the mode value is "0". Represents none. When the special symbol 1 hold number specification command has a look-ahead, the special symbol 1 hold is read ahead and the special symbol is read before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191. 1 Instructs the start of the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on the hold. Similarly, when the special symbol 2 hold number specification command has a look-ahead, the special symbol 2 hold is read ahead before being used for the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191. Instructs the start of the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold. The symbol type look-ahead command, the variation pattern look-ahead command, and the variation type look-ahead command are transmitted when the special symbol hold number designation command is transmitted. Note that these commands may be transmitted only when the special symbol hold number specification command has a look-ahead.

The symbol type look-ahead command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot at the time of look-ahead. The variable pattern look-ahead command specifies an effect pattern (variable pattern) in the mode at the time of look-ahead. The variable type look-ahead command specifies the variable type in the mode at the time of look-ahead.

The normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is issued by the normal symbol display 1189 based on the normal symbol hold by pre-reading before the normal symbol hold is used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191. This is to instruct the start of the look-ahead effect that notifies the notice of the display result. Further, for the normal symbol, a normal symbol storage command, a normal symbol type look-ahead command, and a normal symbol variation pattern look-ahead command corresponding to the look-ahead may be prepared. Unless otherwise specified, the term "look-ahead" refers to the look-ahead of a special symbol.

Further, when executing the look-ahead determination, as will be described later, the same processing as at the start of fluctuation is executed to generate a command including the effect pattern and the symbol, but when the same command as at the start of fluctuation is transmitted, these Since it becomes impossible to distinguish whether the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the command is at the start of fluctuation or at the time of winning the start opening, only the status value is changed with the same mode value.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start port winning command is used when the start port is won (when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, or when the lower start port switch is used. When the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. The speaker 130 provided in No. 5 is transmitted mainly to notify the effect by voice, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (the stop period has elapsed). Will be sent later). The high-probability end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times" is exhausted.

The special symbol 1 storage command is still used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191 when the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol 1 changes (the game ball enters the upper start port 2101). When there is an unreserved number of holdings, when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings increases, it is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185. It will be sent when the number of holds decreases). The special symbol 2 storage command is still used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191 when the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol 2 changes (a game ball enters the lower start port 2102). When there is an unreserved number of holdings, when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings increases, it is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186. It will be sent when the number of holds decreases). The normal symbol memory command is the number of reserved balls that have not yet been used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 when the normal symbol 1 operation hold ball number changes (the game ball passes through the gate 2350 and the function display board 1191. In a certain state, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is reduced by using the normal symbol display 1189 for variable display of the normal symbol. ) Is sent. As with the special symbol, the normal symbol hold number specification command that changes depending on the presence or absence of pre-reading may be sent to the normal symbol. As with the special symbol, the presence or absence of pre-reading is indicated by hitting the upper 4 bits of the mode value.

The normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation increases (when the game balls pass through the gate portion 2350 and the number of reserved balls increases). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

Further, instead of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command, the normal symbol variation pattern and the pre-reading command related to the normal symbol symbol type may be separately transmitted, such as the normal symbol variation pattern pre-reading command and the normal symbol type pre-reading command. .. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the normal symbol hold number designation command, but it is not necessary to limit it, and if it is determined in advance, the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is normally used. It may be sent before the symbol hold number specification command. Further, instead of the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command, the same applies to the case of transmitting a look-ahead command related to a normal symbol variation pattern (normal symbol variation pattern look-ahead command) and a normal symbol symbol type (normal symbol type look-ahead command).

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is issued when the starting opening is won (when a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or from the lower starting opening switch 2109. When the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal of (1), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly by voice. Although it is transmitted to notify the fact, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 12 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraudulent activity is monitored. It is a specification that is also used for the purpose. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. There is also a specification that does not notify by voice from 130.

In addition to the above-mentioned commands, for example, a game machine-related information command for transmitting game machine-related information including model information of the game machine may be transmitted. The game machine-related information command is transmitted from the main board to the peripheral boards as a predetermined trigger. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the game machine-related information command can execute the effect control according to the model information included in the game machine-related information. For example, when there is a model that executes the look-ahead effect based on the normal symbol hold and a model that does not execute the look-ahead effect, the main control board is configured to always transmit the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command to the peripheral control board 4140. Then, when it is determined that the peripheral control board 4140 is a model capable of executing the pre-reading effect based on the normal symbol hold based on the game machine related information command, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect transmitted from the main control board 4100 is performed. The command is processed as a valid command so that the normal map look-ahead effect can be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the model cannot execute the normal figure look-ahead effect, the command is discarded as an invalid command. With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the processing on the main control board 4100 even when there are models that can and cannot execute the normal drawing look-ahead effect.

The main control board 4100 may transmit the game machine-related information command at a predetermined timing such as a process (any one before S10 to S46 in FIG. 17) that is executed only once when the power is turned on. Good, multiple times during the game (at the start opening prize, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of a big hit (in the case of a normal figure, at the time of hit), when a predetermined condition such as a change in the game state is satisfied, the timer interrupt process is executed. (Regular timing) may be transmitted. The case of transmitting at the time of power-on is not limited to the case of transmitting during the process at power-on, as long as it is executed with the execution of the process at power-on as an opportunity. For example, when the power is turned on, a game machine-related information command is generated and stored in the command buffer in advance, and the steady processing (main processing, timer interrupt processing) after the processing at the time of power on is completed is stored in the command buffer during execution. It also includes the transmission of the game machine related information command.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, based on the command transmitted from the main control board 4100, any effect that can be executed on the peripheral control board 4140 is processed as a valid command, and the unexecutable effect is processed. It is configured to discard the command as an invalid command. Therefore, even if the effect to be executed differs depending on the model of the game machine, it is possible to standardize the control program of the main control board 4100, and to develop the control program of the main control board 4100 for each model. There is no need to do this, and it is possible to shorten the development period and shorten the testing period at the testing institute.

[9. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 41. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then each process such as the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and a big hit for determining the initial value of the big hit judgment random number. Random number for determining initial value for judgment, random number for reach judgment to be used for determining whether to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game state is not generated, upper special symbol display 1185 and lower special symbol A random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the display 1186, and derived by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when the big hit game state is generated. A random number for the jackpot symbol used for determining the displayed jackpot symbol, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used for determining the initial value of the random number for the jackpot symbol, and the like are prepared. The above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol is a random number for the small hit symbol used for determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when the small hit game state is generated. It is also used as. On the other hand, the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol is also used as a random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106 and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106 are used to determine the initial value of the random number. A random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit, a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern to be used for determining a variation display pattern of a normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189, and the like are prepared.

For example, a counter that updates a random number for jackpot determination is composed of hardware (random number generation circuit) built into the chip, and has a predetermined fixed numerical range (from the minimum value to the maximum value by a predetermined calculation formula). In the present embodiment, it is updated according to a certain rule so that all the values appear within the value 0 to the maximum value 32767) as the minimum value. As a result, it is possible to extract an unbiased random number value. Further, the random number value is updated based on the internal system clock of 10 MHz obtained by dividing the clock of 20 MHz output from the crystal oscillator by the main control MPU4100a by two. Further, when the update of the random number sequence for one cycle is completed, the sequence of the random number sequence of the new cycle is updated so as to be different from the random number sequence of the other cycle. In this way, since the arrangement of the random number sequences generated for each cycle is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

The above-mentioned random numbers are so-called hardware random numbers, but may be random numbers (software random numbers) updated (generated) by software. Specifically, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0 to the maximum value is 32767). Then, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then from the minimum value (value 0) toward the initial value determined based on the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. Count up. Every time the big hit judgment random number is updated for one cycle, the start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the big hit judgment random number is determined based on the big hit judgment initial value determination random number, and the determined start value is determined. The update is repeated sequentially from. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is obtained by executing the initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. On the other hand, the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by the same method as the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number update method.

In the present embodiment, when the counter for updating the big hit judgment random number finishes counting up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, as described above, for determining the initial value for big hit judgment. The start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the jackpot judgment random number is determined based on the random number, and the update is repeated sequentially from the determined start value, but the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. The checksum value (sum) obtained by calculating the total of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU4100a as a numerical value in the case of being performed or in the processing at the time of turning on the power of the main control side, which will be described later. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the value) does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off), The jackpot determination random number is set as a start value of the jackpot determination random number based on an ID code that is a different value for each main control MPU4100a built-in and set for each main control MPU4100a, and is set based on the extracted ID code. The random number for jackpot determination is updated from this start value. Therefore, the initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value (ID code) is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the random number for jackpot determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for jackpot determination is derived using the ID code, and the ID code is mainly used as the non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. In addition to storing it as individual information for each control MPU4100a, the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. By doing so, it is analyzed by taking a second security measure in which the start value of the random number for jackpot determination always derives the same fixed value for each main control MPU4100a based on the ID code, and a two-step security measure by. Is prevented. Instead of the ID code, the initial value of the big hit determination random number may be set by extracting the above-mentioned hardware random number. As a result, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to set a different start value of a random number for jackpot determination each time even in the same game board, and security can be further enhanced.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a and using the extracted ID code as an initial value of a random number for jackpot determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains and disassembles the game board 4 by some method, and an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a. Is illegally acquired and the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot judgment and the timing at which the jackpot judgment value matches can be grasped, but the ID code has a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU provided in the other game board. That is, in other game boards, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in another game board, that is, another pachinko gaming machine. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each interval and a game ball is inserted into the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 at each predetermined interval, a jackpot gaming state cannot be generated.

[9-2. Initial value update type counter movement]
When the initial value update type counter clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU4100a takes out an ID code from the built-in non-volatile storage means, and is based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. In the first cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit judgment random number as the big hit judgment initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained in this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter In the third cycle, the value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, a value 32668 to a value 32767 is set as a range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas a value 31768 to a value with a high probability is set. 32767 is set, and it is read from the probability change determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a value as a minimum value to a value of 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. It is set.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range), a case where a value 10 to a value 209 is set with a low probability and a value 10 to a value 339 is set with a high probability is illustrated. That is, in the low probability, the number of random numbers for big hits (random numbers for big hit determination) is 200, and in the high probability, the number of random numbers for big hits (random numbers for big hit determination) is 330. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from synchronizing with each other, the number of other random numbers to be acquired at the same time is 200, except when the acquisition times of the random numbers are different. Other than that, for example, it is a prime number. That is, in the present embodiment, if the acquisition time of the random number value is different from that of the big hit determination random number, the number of random numbers that will be the big hit can be prevented from being a prime number. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit is, for example, a random number for determining a big hit, which is the number of big hit symbols (200) divided by 4 (50) with a low probability.

Considering the case where such a jackpot judgment value range is set, the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. It will be set in the range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) with. In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 to the time when the first value 10 in the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) becomes, and this value 10 Comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the probability that the former period is drawn by the above-mentioned initial value lottery process is extremely lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 to the last value (value 209 in low probability, value 339 in high probability) in the range of big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range). Comparing with the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter. The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the game ball is started upward by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the radio waves toward the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. When a fraudulent act pretending to have entered the mouth 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes one of the jackpot judgment value ranges (big hit judgment range). It can be said that the probability of becoming

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. If it is set to a range closer to the maximum value side, it is before the first value in the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0. The period from the initial value (value 32668 in low probability, value 31768 in high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) and the period until the value (value 32667 in low probability, value 31767 in high probability). In comparison with the above, the probability that the former period is drawn by the above-mentioned initial value lottery process is extremely higher than that of the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 (value 32667 in low probability, value 31767 in high probability). Comparing the range up to and the range from the first value (value 32668 with high probability, value 31768 with high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared with the latter range. Therefore, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 in low probability, value 31767 in high probability) in the range of big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range). Of these, one of the values becomes the value drawn by the initial value lottery process and is set in the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for jackpot judgment. Therefore, the value obtained in this lottery is directed toward the maximum value. It counts up, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter , The value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value.

That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side in both the low probability and the high probability. When the value is set to a range closer to, the value (low) before the first value in the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 The period until the value reaches 32667 in probability and 31767) in high probability is irregular, and is rich in randomness. As a result, for example, the game ball is raised by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 with radio waves. Even if a fraudulent act is performed that pretends to have entered the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot judgment value ranges (big hit judgment range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the minimum value (first value) in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the initial value to the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle The time required is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the third cycle from the time T0 is the time T1, and the time T1 is shorter than the time T0. .. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the 4th cycle from the time T1 is the time T2, and the time T2 is shorter than the time T1. .. In this way, in the initial value update type counter, by giving a fluctuation to the time when the updated counter becomes the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) (periodicity). (By eliminating the), it is not detected by the player.

[9-3. Main control side power-on processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing of the present embodiment, and FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. Do. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets the initial address on the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is composed of a comparator MIC which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC. The comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, is applied. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Following step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. In the determination in step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D-type flip-flop MIC, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on in step S14, the main control program causes a power failure at the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a with its logic as HI. Is entered in. As a result, the main control MPU4100a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC in the latched state. The D-type flip-flop MIC outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, when latching a state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal.

Following step S15, the main control program makes it possible to execute the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 to the main control MPU 4100a. It depends on whether or not it is done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 952 does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 952 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. (Game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability fluctuation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU4100a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU4100a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, the system that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. 7, is activated ( Wait until boot). In the present embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S26, the main control program sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S28). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30). The backup flag BK-FLG stores the game backup information such as the game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S32). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU4100a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" means that the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the state where high frequency is irradiated is detected and reset. The state of returning after that is also included.

Following step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In this power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S28. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control internal RAM. Clear the area (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing a value of 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU4100a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 indicates RAM clear and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the power is turned off on the main control side. When it is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means of the main control MPU4100a is taken out, and the random number for jackpot determination is updated based on the taken out ID code from the fixed numerical range of the counter. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set as the jackpot determination initial value determination random number to be used for determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number described above.

Following step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation process, a power-on command classified into power-on as shown in FIG. 15 is created to notify that the main control built-in RAM is cleared and the initial setting is performed, and the peripherals are created. Test commands classified in relation to the test shown in FIG. 16 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

Following step S42, the main control program sets interrupt enable setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S42.

Following step S44, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 (operation switch) when a predetermined time elapses from the power-on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. The execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the receipt is restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to send the detection signal input by the operation of the operation switch 952 to the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear process is executed with the input as an opportunity (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side), and the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error release navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed ( (Game control side normal operation control means), it is handled as a release switch for canceling the error notification associated with the generated error. That is, the operation switch 952 (error release unit), which was originally supposed to be used to release the error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit instead of the operation switch 952 (error release unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. It functions as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later), or after a predetermined time has elapsed, a game It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Following step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S48 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S48, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S50). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. The above-mentioned random numbers for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit, the random numbers for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, determines in step S48 whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and this power failure notification. If there is no signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S52). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC under the control of the main control MPU4100a.

Following step S53, the main control program includes a start port solenoid 2105, an attacker solenoid 2108A, 2108B, an upper special symbol display 1185, a lower special symbol display 1186, an upper special symbol memory display 1184, and a lower special symbol storage display. The drive signal output to 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

Following step S54, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S56, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S58). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S58, the main control program sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S60). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU4100a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the main control side power is turned on when the power is restored thereafter.

In step S28, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S30, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[9-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing on the main control side.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 4100a on the main control board 4100 (step S70). At this time, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing).

Following step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the generation of other interrupts is allowed. Further, the clearing of the interrupt flag may be executed after all the processes in the timer interrupt process are completed. By doing so, the management of the interrupt process is further simplified by preventing multiple interrupts due to the occurrence of another interrupt during the timer interrupt process.

Following step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program enters, for example, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game ball entered in the general winning opening 2104, 2201, and the large winning opening 2103. A detection signal from the count switch 2110 that detects the game ball, a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, and a lower that detects the game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102. A detection signal from the start port switch 2109, a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and a prize ball described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110, which conveys that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the control process, is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball entering the upper start port 2101 and the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 for detecting the game ball entering the lower start port 2102 are read. And the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 15 and classified into other categories is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. That is, if there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and if there is a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109, The corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 for detecting the game balls entered in the large winning openings 2103. Detection signal from, detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102. , And the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 is first read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. The second time, each is read again. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program first outputs the detection signals from the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. False detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of 2 readings, 2 readings for comparison over the 3rd time and 2 readings for comparison over the 2nd to 4th times. The reliability of the detection signals from the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 is improved. be able to.

Following step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, the normal symbol described later, and the normal symbol In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a) issues various commands and the control board 4110 is normal. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for notifying that the signal has been received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S76, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S78). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, the big hit judgment random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning judgment (big hit judgment), so each counter is used only each time the winning random number update process is performed. Counts up.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and has a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value). It is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the minimum value (value 0) is counted up toward the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. When the counter that updates the big hit judgment random number finishes counting up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. The above-mentioned random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining a normal symbol hit is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining a big hit described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are processed at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. The non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the side main process) and the hit random number update process in step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but this routine is performed every time an interrupt timer occurs. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs due to unevenness in the process time of , The random number for determining the initial value for big hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S50.

Following step S78, the main control program performs the prize ball control process (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and creates a prize ball command for paying out a game ball based on the input information, or with the main control board 4100. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. This main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data.

Further, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes the prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code, and is output from the count switch 2110 when the game ball is accepted into the grand prize opening 2103, for example. When the detection information based on the detection signal is written in the corresponding definition bit areas defined one bit at a time for several minutes of the prize opening 2103, for example, 15 balls as prize balls. A prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to the effect that the player should be paid out, and is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

In the present embodiment, since two large winning openings 2103 are provided as the large winning openings, the main control program has a plurality of definition bit areas prepared in advance in the main control RAM as the definition bit areas described above. From among them, each definition bit for two for the grand prize opening 2103 is used. Hereinafter, they are referred to as "first bit area" and "second bit area" in this order. In the case of a game board in which the number of large winning openings is, for example, one, the definition bit area of is used. These definition bit areas used are, for example, 1 bit, and are adjacent to each other. When the game ball is accepted by the grand prize opening 2103, for example, "1" is written in the first definition bit area which is, for example, the fourth bit as the detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. After that, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the large winning opening that identifies that the game ball has been accepted by writing, for example, "0", and prepares for the acceptance of the next game ball.

Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit region state to check. For example, in the main control program, if the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the large winning opening 2103 is set to the fourth bit, the pachinko gaming machine provided with only one large winning opening as in the present embodiment. In this case, the main control program acquires the information of the definition bit area of the fourth bit.

Further, the main control program executes mask processing on the detection information acquired in this way according to the prize ball effective range of the large winning opening 2103, which will be described later, creates a prize ball command, and writes it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether or not to output to the payout control board 4110. When it is determined that this prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program forces, for example, mask processing for each definition bit area in which the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 described above is written. The bit may be set to OFF (“0”) so that the prize ball command is not written in the transmission information storage area.

In this prize ball control process, the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been accepted by the large winning opening 2103 in the first special game state by the main control program is obtained. Taking the opportunity of being written in the above definition bit area corresponding to the large winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to the effect that 15 balls should be paid out as prize balls, and the above-mentioned transmission information storage area Write to. At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then transmits the command to the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the speaker, for example, ". Output a "pocon" sound.

On the other hand, in the main control program, in the first special game state, the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been accepted by the large winning opening 2103 is transmitted to the large winning opening 2103. If it is not written in the corresponding definition bit area, for example, a prize ball command is not created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as prize balls. In this case as well, the main control program writes the winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means). Prevent the payout operation of the game ball from being executed. After that, the main control program initializes the above-mentioned definition bit area corresponding to the large winning opening 2103, and clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 to allow the payout of the game ball. To do.

At this time, when the main control program pays out more than the specified number of game balls that can be paid out in response to the acceptance of the game balls to the large winning opening 2103, the winning excess abnormality command (not shown in FIG. 16 is omitted). ) Is written in the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step S92). Then, the peripheral control MPU4150a causes the speaker to perform a predetermined notification.

In this way, since the illegal game ball is not substantially paid out, the damage suffered by the game field (game hall) can be minimized.

On the other hand, instead, when the acceptance of the game ball into the large winning opening 2103 is detected, the main control program immediately writes the winning excess abnormality command to the transmission information storage area to control the peripheral control MPU4150a. , The speaker may be notified.

After that, the main control program reads the prize ball command from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

As described above, when the game ball is accepted for the large winning opening 2103, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning.

On the other hand, in this main control program, when the payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 A self-check command for confirming the connection status between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S80, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S82). On the payout control board 4110, the payout control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information that conveys that fact to the payout control board 4110 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 16 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). Navi command and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S82, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S84). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the count switch 2110 detects that the game ball has entered the big winning opening 2103 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program may perform the main control program. , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 16 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S84, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random value. Then, when the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the probability fluctuation state is subsequently established, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the transition to a gaming state other than the probability variation state is established (winning probability control). means). Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state). Details of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described later in FIG.

Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal so as to light the upper special symbol display 1185 according to the variation display pattern determined at the time of starting winning, or the lower special symbol display, according to the type of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal is set so as to light the 1186, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Further, when the main control program shifts to the jackpot gaming state, for example, various commands classified into the jackpot related commands (big hit opening command, jackpot 1 open Nth display command, jackpot 1) shown in FIG. Create a closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) and store them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or attacker solenoid 2108A or the attacker solenoid 2108A to open and close the opening / closing member 2107. The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108B is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control program performs two rounds so as to turn on the two-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the number of times (round) that the large winning opening 2103 is opened from the closed state is two times. Set the output of the lighting signal to the indicator lamp and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or when there are 6 rounds, turn on the 6-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190. The output of the lighting signal to the 6-round indicator lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 12 times, the 12-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is lit. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 12-round indicator lamp and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is 16, turn on the 16-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190. The output of the lighting signal to the 16-round indicator lamp is set so as to be lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. Further, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the game state indicator 1183 so as to light the presence / absence of the transition to the probability fluctuation state in a predetermined color, and stores it in the output information storage area as output information.

By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, a special symbol is changed and displayed and a big hit lottery is executed after the start winning of the game ball is triggered, and the predetermined winning conditions are satisfied and the predetermined probability change transition When the condition is satisfied, the lighting mode of the so-called probability change lamp as the game state indicator is changed and the state shifts to the probability fluctuation state. In the probability fluctuation state, the probability of the jackpot lottery described above is set to be relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and the jackpot is won. As a gaming machine that may shift to the probability fluctuation state after the end of the probability fluctuation state in this way, mainly, is the jackpot game looping by continuing the probability fluctuation state until the next big hit? Those that behave like (hereinafter referred to as "loop machine") and those that continue the probability fluctuation state until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number after the jackpot game is completed (hereinafter "ST (special time) machine"). ") And exist. In this way, the pachinko gaming machines of different models that continue the probability fluctuation state have different control of the game status indicator described above, and at the development stage, the control of the game status indicator must be designed one by one for each model. It was difficult to improve development efficiency.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is accepted by the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied. In the case, the transition from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state is performed, while the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied and the probability variation transition condition is also satisfied. The display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is set to the lit state while shifting to the high probability fluctuation state. After that, when the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the main control program sets the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 in a state in which the probability fluctuation state is continued and has a specific interrupt cycle. After the lighting state is temporarily turned off, the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is changed from the lighting state to the lighting state again within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

Specifically, first, as described above, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied after the game ball is accepted by the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102. (Lottery means) If the winning conditions are met, the game shifts from the normal game state to the jackpot game state, while if the winning conditions are met and the probability change transition conditions are met, the winning conditions are met. It shifts to a probability fluctuation state in which the probability is set relatively higher than the normal game state (game state control means). The main control program turns on the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 for the duration of the probability fluctuation state, while the display mode of the game state display 1183 is changed to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state. Is turned off (lighting mode control means). When the main control program turns on the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 with the transition to the probability fluctuation state described above as a trigger, and then the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability variation transition condition is further satisfied. In a state where the probability fluctuation state is continued, the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is temporarily turned off from the lit state within a specific interrupt cycle, and then the game is played within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle. The display mode of the status indicator 1183 is changed from the off state to the lighting state again (lighting state continuation control means). Even if the player wants to visually recognize that the probability fluctuation state continues, even if the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is changed over a very short time in this way, From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to make it appear that the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 has not changed.

In this way, due to the display mode of the game state display 1183, it is difficult for the player's eyes to visually recognize that the light has been turned off once, and the light state is visually recognized as if the light state continues. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability fluctuation state continuously continues, the probability fluctuation state of the special symbol continues up to a predetermined number of fluctuations after the jackpot game state ends. A program code that controls the display mode of the game status indicator 1183 between different models, even if it is a so-called ST (special time) machine that shifts to the probability fluctuation state again when the winning condition is satisfied within the specified number of fluctuations. Can be shared. This makes it possible to improve the development efficiency of pachinko gaming machines of different models.

Further, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal game state to the jackpot game state when the winning conditions are satisfied as described above, while further. When the probabilistic transition condition as an example of the transition condition is satisfied, the probabilistic game state as an example of the specific gaming state is also shifted (game state control means). Here, the main control program may shift to the probabilistic gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state without substantially paying out the gaming ball in the jackpot gaming state. The specific gaming state may be a state in which the time saving operation condition is satisfied as another example of the transition condition and the time saving function is operating, or both games are simultaneously performed in combination with the above-mentioned probability variation game state. It may be in a state. The main control program manages the remaining number of variable display times of the special symbol in the period from one game state to another game state, and transmits game state information indicating the managed game state. By writing to the transmission information storage area as, the command transmission process S92, which will be described later, transmits the command within the same timer interrupt cycle (game status notification means).

Specifically, when the main control program satisfies the above-mentioned probability variation transition condition, the remaining special symbol is changed and displayed until the gaming state shifts to a gaming state other than the probability variation gaming state, for example, a normal gaming state. Information about the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times information") is included in one of the commands transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern. By writing to the transmission information storage area as information, the command transmission process S92, which will be described later, transmits the command within the same timer interrupt cycle (remaining fluctuation number notification means). The main control program may include the above-mentioned remaining number of times information in other commands, or may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

By the way, a subroutine, which is a program module composed of a set of program codes, is generally called by a CALL instruction included in the main routine, and the program code group included in this program module is executed at the end. It is configured to return to the main routine with a return instruction. At first glance, it seems difficult to reduce the program capacity because an instruction for recalling is required in this way.

However, in the present embodiment, when the main routine includes a continuous subroutine, for example, instead of the main routine calling and executing the first subroutine with a CALL instruction and then continuously calling the next subroutine with another CALL instruction In addition, the return instruction may not be placed at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine and may be directly connected to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine. With a program module having such a configuration, the capacity of the entire program can be reduced.

Following step S86, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S88). Details of the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the process at the time of passing through the gate is performed based on the input information. In the gate passage processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as the gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

Further, following the gate passage processing, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, extracts the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination from the read gate information, and incorporates the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per ordinary symbol stored in advance in the ROM (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). The main control program determines whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2106 according to the determination result (lottery result by the ordinary lottery). When the main control program opens and closes according to this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 is opened, so that the game ball can be accepted by the lower starting port 2102, which is advantageous for the player. Migrate to.

Further, the main control program determines the variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to the above determination based on the value of the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and classifies the variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to the above determination into the normal symbol synchronization effect-related shown in FIG. Various commands are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Further, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program is related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. Various commands are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program is described above as the normal symbol variation display pattern random number. The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 15 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the determined normal. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and outputs various signals based on the output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. A start port solenoid that outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B that open and close the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2103, and opens and closes a pair of movable pieces 2106 when it is in a big hit game state. In addition to outputting the drive signal to 2105, 2 round jackpot information output signal, 6 round jackpot information output signal, 12 round jackpot information output signal, 16 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as an information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving / medium information output information, and a start opening winning information output signal, are output to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, this main control program reads transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits this transmission information as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 (command). Transmission means). This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related and various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 15, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. Various commands classified into commands and jackpot related commands (for example, when a game ball entered in the jackpot 2103 is detected, the jackpot 1 count corresponding to the jackpot count command based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 Display commands), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric service production, and various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. Commands (door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified into status display (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, frame state 2 command), test Various commands classified as related and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and a sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

As the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, a method in which the command stored earlier for the ring buffer is output first is used as a buffer for command transmission. The main control program transmits the commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order in which the commands are stored in the command transmission buffer. For example, in the same timer interrupt process, the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process (step S88) are executed after the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S86) are executed, so that the special symbol-related look-ahead is performed. Since the command is stored in the command transmission buffer before the Fuzu-related look-ahead command, the special figure-related look-ahead command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in preference to the Fuzu-related look-ahead command. To.

In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control unit) A frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 And sends an error clearing navigation command (second error clearing command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (1st main body frame opening command) A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 4110 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (1st main body frame closing command) A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (1st door frame opening command) A door frame opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S92, the main control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S94, the main control program switches (returns) registers (step S96) and ends this routine. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU4100a stacks the contents of the general-purpose register on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents loaded on the stack and saved are read and written to the original register. The main control MPU4100a sets interrupt enable after returning in step S96.

[9-5. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process in the present embodiment. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program updates the above-mentioned big hit determination random number by +1 by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102, that is, With the start winning as an opportunity (establishment of the start condition), for each start memory information (start information) for which the start condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned counter value is taken out and used as a big hit random number value, and this big hit random number value is the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also referred to as a "special lottery". The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot game state based on the lottery result, and when the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied). To shift from the normal game state to the big hit game state. The jackpot game state corresponds to a special game state, a first special game state, and a second special game state, and shall indicate a game state that collectively refers to these.

When determining the jackpot game mode, the main control program uses data for defining the mode of the jackpot game set in the jackpot game mode determination process, for example, the number of rounds, the opening time of the jackpot for each round, and the like. One of the main control built-in RAMs in which the definition data (table) representing the closing time of the large winning openings for each round and the number of winning limit counts of the game ball is offset by the address offset according to the number of large winning openings. It is read from the definition data area (not shown), which is the storage area of the unit. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the game ball has won the lower grand prize opening (large winning opening 1) ( Step S100). When a game ball wins a prize in the lower prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a command for designating a prize in the lower prize opening is set (step S102).

Similarly, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the upper prize opening (large prize opening 2) (step S104). When a game ball wins in the upper prize opening (the result of step S104 is "yes"), a command for designating a prize in the upper prize opening is set (step S106). Whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning opening is detected by the count switch 2110. Furthermore, when each prize designation command is set, it is not limited to the detection by the count switch, and each prize designation command is not limited to the detection by the count switch, and the corresponding large prize opening is opened and detected by the count switch. May be set. The condition for determining that the large winning opening is in the open state may be the gaming state according to S142 to S146, or the special symbol / special electric accessory operation number is a value corresponding to S142 to S146. It may be.

Further, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the upper gate (coupling gate) (step S112). When the game ball has passed through the upper gate (the result of step S112 is “yes”), a command for passing the winning combination gate indicating that the game ball has passed through the upper gate is set (step S110).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting winning opening (upper starting opening 2101, lower starting opening 2102). First, the start port 1 identification value is set in the start port identification area indicating the start port to be determined for winning (step S112).

Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the upper start opening 2101 (step S114). Whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the upper start port 2101 is determined by whether or not there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022. Specifically, in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19, the presence or absence of a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 is read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It is done based on the input information.

When the game ball wins the upper start opening 2101 (the result of step S114 is "yes"), the main control MPU 4100a executes the start opening winning process (step S116). In the start-up opening winning process, a start-up opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot judgment is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special symbol is used. It executes processing for executing the look-ahead effect. The details of the starting port winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU4100a sets a start port 2 identification value in the start port identification area (step S118), and determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the lower start port 2102 (step S120). When the game ball wins the lower start opening 2102 (the result of step S120 is "yes"), the start opening winning process is executed as in the case of the upper start opening 2101 (step S122). The start port 1 identification value and the start port 2 identification value are the start port winning process so that the start port winning process common to the upper start port winning process and the lower starting port winning process can be executed. Information for identifying whether the processing being executed is due to the winning process by the upper starting port or the lower winning opening process based on each identification value within, and is referred to or referred to in the starting opening winning process. It is a value set so that an area for storing the set data table and winning information can be identified.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a executes the corresponding processing based on the special symbol / electric accessory operation number which is the game progress state variable in which the type of branch processing executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process shifts to the branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control End the process. Since the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, it is backed up in the main control side power off processing.

In step S130 processing, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as branch processing, special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol changing process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), special Symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), big winning opening pre-opening interval processing (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step S144) ), The winning opening opening end interval processing (step S146), the winning combination operation gate valid waiting process (step S148), or the winning combination operation gate valid processing (step S150) is executed.

In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), the special symbol changes in the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the fact that the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. Performs processing such as starting display.

In the special symbol change processing (step S132), a process of controlling the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is performed.

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), whether or not the special symbol that has started to fluctuate and has been fixedly stopped causes a jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102. Is determined.

In the special symbol loss stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 and notifying the fact is performed. Do.

In the special symbol jackpot stop process (step S138), when a jackpot game state is generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 and notifying the fact is performed. Do.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed.

In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 is performed by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the closed state to the open state.

In the process during closing of the large winning opening (step S144), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 2103 is performed by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the open state to the closed state.

In the winning opening opening end interval processing (step S146), when the jackpot operation is completed, a process for notifying that fact is performed.

In the combination operation gate valid wait process (step S148) or the combination operation gate activation process (step S150), the upper gate (the combination operation gate) is activated or the passage of the game ball of the upper gate is detected. ..

[9-6. Start-up opening prize processing]
Next, the processing at the time of winning the starting port will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the starting port winning process in the present embodiment. The start port winning process is executed in the processes of steps S116 (upper start port 2101) and S122 (lower start port 2102) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG.

In the start opening winning process, the starting opening winning command shown in FIG. 16 is created with the acceptance of the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102. At this time, the starting opening winning command may be set for each starting winning opening, or may be common regardless of the starting winning opening. The main control program stores the command created in this way in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

First, the main control program sets the start opening winning command creation data for creating the starting opening winning command as the command data (step S200), and executes the command buffer setting process (step S202). As a result, the start opening winning command is created and stored in the command buffer. The start opening winning command of this embodiment is common regardless of the starting winning opening.

Further, the main control program sets a start port winning control data table corresponding to the winning start port based on the start port 1 identification value or the start port 2 identification value selected before the start port winning process starts. (Step S204). The start opening winning control data table stores data required for processing executed at the time of starting winning. Hereinafter, the control data table at the time of winning the starting port will be described.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a start port winning control data table according to the present embodiment. The starting port winning control data table defines a starting opening winning control data table 1 set when the upper starting opening 2101 wins and a starting opening winning control data table 2 set when the lower starting opening 2102 wins. .. Each table has the same structure as the command address table for the number of reserved balls for special symbols, the area for the number of reserved balls for special symbol operation, the reserved history special symbol identification value, and the offset value for referencing the reserved information storage area.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the process of step S204, the head of the start port winning control data table corresponding to the winning start winning opening is based on the identification value set in the process of step S112 or step S118. Set the address as the control data address. As a result, the necessary data is stored at a predetermined position from the start address of the set start port winning control data table, so the data corresponding to the start port is processed in common by the upper start port and the lower start port. Can be obtained. Specifically, the main control program acquires the number of reserved balls stored in the area indicated by the operation reserved ball number address set in the start port winning control data table set in the process of step S204 (step S206). ). The operation hold ball number address corresponds to the operation hold ball number address (special symbol operation hold ball number area) in FIG. 22, and the content stored in the operation hold ball number address is acquired as the hold ball number.

Then, the main control program determines whether or not the acquired number of reserved balls is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (step S208). If the number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of step S208 is “yes”), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is "no"), the main control program adds 1 to the number of reserved balls (step S210). Further, the total number of special symbol operation hold (contents of the special symbol total operation hold number area), which is the sum of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold, is added by 1 (step S212).

Further, the main control program specifies a storage location (special symbol hold storage area) of various random numbers such as a random number for jackpot determination extracted by the start winning. Here, the configuration of the special symbol hold storage area will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol reservation storage area (source code) related to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. In addition, the line described as "special symbol 1" on the right side of each line in FIG. 23 is a special symbol holding storage area for the upper start port 2101, and the line described as "special symbol 2". Is a special symbol hold storage area for the lower start port 2102. Further, in the case of "special symbol 1 random number storage N area for fluctuation pattern", "N" corresponds to the number of reservations. One corresponding random number value is stored in each area.

More specifically with reference to FIG. 23, first, the address (B_HIT_M1) of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination random number storage 1 area is set as the reference address. Then, as an addition value, a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls (specifically, a value obtained by multiplying the number of reserved balls by the size of the storage area (_TMEM1_KO)) is multiplied by the reserved storage area index value (offset value for reference to the reserved information storage area). ) Is added. The hold storage area index value is an offset value ("00H" if the value of the start port identification area is "00H" if the value of the start port 1 identification value is used, and an offset value ( _TMEM_ADD) is set. Finally, the calculated added value can be added to the reference address to calculate the storage location (transfer destination address) of the random number for jackpot determination. In this way, by using the index value, it is possible to specify an appropriate storage location by common processing even if the starting port is different. It is also possible to store data in different storage areas by making the index values different depending on the timing of executing common processing. For example, when the jackpot determination is performed at the time of pre-reading processing and at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to store the information required for the jackpot determination in different storage areas by setting different index values.

Here, returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 21, the main control program stores the big hit determination random number in the special symbol hold storage area (step S214). Specifically, the value stored in the big hit determination random number area (counter value of the big hit determination random number) is stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the number of reserved balls. In addition to the random numbers for jackpot judgment, random numbers for jackpot symbols, reach judgments, random numbers for fluctuation patterns (random numbers for fluctuation patterns 1, random numbers for fluctuation patterns 2, random numbers for fluctuation types), random numbers for special symbols, etc. Random numbers for determining the winning judgment or the fluctuation pattern are extracted at the start opening winning and stored in the corresponding storage area. For example, when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 is 0, the designated storage location B_HIT_M1 is set as the start address, the jackpot judgment random number is B_HIT_M1, the reach judgment random number is T_RIT_M1, and the variation pattern random number 1 is set. The variation pattern random number 2 is stored in T_HP1_M1, the variation type random number is stored in T_HTP_M1, and the special symbol random number is stored in T_ZUG_M1.

Subsequently, the main control program sets the special symbol identification value for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the symbol variation in the new hold storage based on the total number of pending special symbol operations in the corresponding hold identification history area (special symbol hold identification). Store in (area) (step S216). The special symbol hold identification area is assigned a continuous area of 1 byte each from the special symbol hold identification area 1 to the special symbol hold identification area 8, and is 1 from the total number of special symbol hold operations based on the special symbol hold identification area 1. The address shifted by the subtracted value becomes the area corresponding to the new hold storage. The special identification value is included in the start winning control data table set in the process of step S204. The special symbol hold identification area is an area for storing the order in which the upper start port (special symbol 1) or the lower start port (special symbol 2) is won, and at the start of fluctuation, the value of the head area of the special symbol hold identification area is set. By discriminating, it is judged whether or not it is possible to start the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Finally, the main control program executes a memory look-ahead process for executing the special figure look-ahead effect (step S218). The special figure look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests the lottery result of the special lottery in advance before starting the variable display of the special symbol. In the memory look-ahead process, various random numbers are acquired before starting the variable display of the special symbol, and the information (winning information, symbol type, variation) for determining the special symbol look-ahead effect on the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value. (Pattern number, etc.) is generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. At this time, the main control program may include in the command information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game, instead of the lottery result itself of the special lottery. For example, information on a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command. Details of the memory look-ahead process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

[9-7. Memory look-ahead processing]
Subsequently, the details of the memory look-ahead process (step S218) in the start opening winning process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the storage look-ahead processing in the present embodiment. In the memory look-ahead process, a process for executing a look-ahead that acquires the result of the special lottery in advance is performed. By transmitting a predetermined command (special symbol hold number designation command) to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the result of the special lottery acquired by the storage look-ahead process, the result is displayed before the variable display of the special symbol is started. It is possible to execute the suggested special figure look-ahead effect.

When the storage look-ahead process is started, the main control program first saves the address of the control data (control data table at the time of starting winning) (step S240). Further, a hold command with no look-ahead is set as a hold command (step S242).

Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern changes depending on the timing of the start winning and the timing when the fluctuation is actually started (step S244). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different between the start winning and the start of the fluctuation, and if the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different, pre-reading is prohibited. For example, when the number of times the time saving state is maintained (the number of games) or the number of times the variable table is maintained (the number of games) is the upper limit of the number of holds (for example, when there is one special symbol and the upper limit of the number of holds is four). 4 times, when there are 2 special symbols, and when the total value of the upper limit of each hold number is 8, 8 times, even when there are 2 special symbols, priority is given to one symbol and the variable display is started. In that case, pre-reading is prohibited if it is within the maximum number of pending numbers on the priority side. When the table for selecting the variation pattern changes (the result of step S244 is “yes”), the main control program executes the processes after step S282 without executing the process related to look-ahead.

On the other hand, when the table for selecting the variation pattern does not change (the result of step S244 is "no"), the main control program determines whether or not the look-ahead determination prohibition period is in effect (step S246).

Here, the determination of the look-ahead determination prohibition period will be described. Whether or not the read-ahead determination prohibition period is set is determined based on the advance notice permission determination data address table shown in FIG. Specifically, the advance notice permission judgment data address table corresponding to the winning start port (set value of the start port identification area) is set, and the notice permission judgment data according to the special symbol / electric accessory operation number and the time saving / medium flag is set. To get. If the acquired advance notice permission determination data is "00H" (_RENZOCK_OK), pre-reading is permitted, and if it is "01H" (_RENZOCK_NG), pre-reading is prohibited. The notice permission determination data is shown in FIG.

FIG. 25 shows an example of a table related to the notice permission determination data, (A) shows an example of the notice permission determination data address table, and (B) shows an example of the notice permission determination data. As the advance notice permission determination data address table, a determination table (RNEZO_CK1_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 and a determination table (RNEZO_CK2_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2 are defined. Further, the advance notice permission determination data is defined as data (RENZO_CK1_B) based on the special symbol operation number (T_JOB_NO) and data (RENZO_CK2_B, RENZO_CK3_B) based on the time saving medium flag (JITAN_FG).

As the basic structure of the advance notice permission judgment data address table, the first byte is the number of times the table is referenced, the second byte is the reference source information (lower address of the reference RAM area), and the third and fourth bytes are look-ahead. It is a reference table address for determining the prohibition period. With the data of the 2nd to 4th bytes (3 bytes) as the basic unit, the data of this basic unit is set for the number of times of reference. In the present embodiment, the data for two times is set as the number of times to be referred to, but as a matter of course, the number of times of reference is not limited to two, and may be one time or three times or more. By adopting such a data structure, it is possible to correspond to any specification by modifying only the data value without modifying the program code.

For example, if the special symbol / electric accessory operation number is changing (HEND), the advance notice permission determination data becomes “00H” (_RENZOCK_OK), and pre-reading is permitted. The special symbol / electric accessory operation number is numerical data. For example, the HEND indicating that the special symbol is changing is 1, and the waiting for the change of the special symbol (IDOL) is 0 or the like. Further, if the game ball wins the upper starting port 2101 and the time saving state (time saving flag (JITAN_FG) is 1), the advance notice permission determination data 2 (RENZO_CK2_B) is selected as the reference table for the look-ahead prohibition period determination, and the time saving flag is set. The value corresponding to is determined. At this time, since the time saving flag is 1, _RENZOCK_NG (“01H” = corresponding to the look-ahead judgment prohibition period), which is the data in the second line of the advance notice permission judgment data 2, is selected, and look-ahead is restricted in the judgment process of step S246. Will be done. The advance notice permission determination data 3 (RENZO_CK3_B) is a reference table for the look-ahead prohibition period corresponding to the special figure 2, and the data selection is the same as the advance notice permission determination data 2 (RENXO_CK2_B), so detailed explanation is omitted. To do.

In the example shown in FIG. 25, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are defined in separate determination tables, but if the contents are the same, a common table may be used, or each special symbol may be used. The content may be completely different.

Here, it returns to the explanation of the flowchart of the memory look-ahead process of FIG. In the case of the look-ahead determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “yes”), the main control program does not perform the look-ahead determination and executes the processes after step S282.

On the other hand, if the pre-reading determination prohibition period is not set (the result of step S246 is "no"), the main control program stores a special symbol hold storage area (random numbers for each hold number) corresponding to the winning start port and the number of hold balls. The random number value stored in the area to be held) is held. One special symbol holding storage area (7 bytes in this embodiment) is set. The special symbol holding storage buffer (special from the random number buffer for jackpot determination) is set. It is stored in (a general term for a random number buffer for symbols) (step S248). Then, the look-ahead determination and the determination at the start of fluctuation are performed based on the random numbers stored in the special symbol hold storage buffer. That is, at the time of pre-reading, the contents of the special symbol hold storage area stored corresponding to the number of holds are stored in the buffer, and at the start of fluctuation, the information of the first area of the special symbol hold storage area is stored in the buffer. Judgment can be made with a common reference destination at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation, and in any case, subsequent processing (processing such as jackpot judgment) can be shared and used.

The special symbol hold storage area is a random number storage N area for jackpot determination, a random number storage N area for reach determination, a random number 1 storage N area for variation patterns, and a random number 2 storage N area for variation patterns for the special symbol 1 and the hourly symbol 2. , Random number storage N area for variable type and random number storage N area for special symbol (N is 1 to 4). Further, the special symbol hold storage buffer includes a big hit determination random number buffer, a reach determination random number buffer, a variation pattern random number 1 buffer, a variation pattern random number 2 buffer, a variation type random number buffer, and a special symbol random number buffer.

In the process of step S248, for example, when the third reserved storage of the special symbol 1 is stored in the special symbol reserved storage buffer, the value of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination random number storage 3 area is set to the jackpot determination random number buffer. Special symbol 1 Reach judgment random number storage 3 Area value is reach judgment random number buffer, Special symbol 1 Variable pattern random number 1 storage 3 Area value is variable pattern random number 1 buffer, Special symbol 1 Variable pattern random number 2 storage 3 Area value is stored in random number 2 buffer for variable pattern, special symbol 1 random number storage for variable type 3 area value is stored in random number buffer for variable type, special symbol 1 random number storage for special symbol 3 area value is stored in random number buffer for special symbol To do.

Then, the main control program refers to each random number stored in the special symbol hold storage buffer set in the process of step S248, and executes a special symbol jackpot determination process for determining the result of the special lottery (step S250). .. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the result of the special lottery (big hit) (step S252). Details of the special symbol determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

Subsequently, the main control program sets the jackpot flag buffer as the jackpot flag storage area (step S254). The jackpot flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF)) is an area for storing the jackpot flag and the like at the time of pre-reading determination. At the start of fluctuation, the jackpot determination result is stored in the jackpot flag area (special symbol winning flag area).

In addition to the special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF), the buffer related to the look-ahead of the special lottery includes a jackpot symbol type buffer (BRZ_TPBF), a variable pattern buffer (T_HD_PTBF), a variable type type buffer (T_HD_TPBF), and a symbol type command buffer (T_HD_TPBF). TZTP_CMBF), a special symbol identification flag buffer (T_MOV_FGBF), and a special symbol operation pending ball count buffer (T_SID_CTBF).

As in the case of the special lottery, the ordinary lottery is also provided with a buffer for pre-reading the ordinary lottery. The buffer related to the pre-reading of the normal lottery includes a hit flag buffer (F_HIT_FGBF), a normal symbol type area buffer (F_FZ_TPBF), and a normal symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (F_SID_CTBF). By providing the buffer in this way, it is possible to standardize the processing at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation, as in the case of the special lottery.

Further, the main control program sets the special symbol variation distribution information source address table 1 as the special symbol variation distribution information source address table that holds the information for selecting the variation pattern (step S256). After that, the variation pattern selection determination process for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S258). The details of the fluctuation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

When the variation pattern selection determination process is completed, the main control program sets the variation pattern value extracted in the variation pattern buffer (step S260), and further executes the variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type type value (step S260). S262). The variation type type value is a parameter for specifying the variation type defined for each variation pattern. One or more variation types can be defined for one variation pattern. The variation type corresponds to, for example, the type of pseudo-continuous effect when a variation pattern corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect is selected. When the variation type type value is selected, the main control program sets the selected variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S264).

After that, the main control program clears the values from the big hit determination random number buffer to the special symbol random number buffer (step S266). This is to prevent malfunction due to the remaining value when performing the jackpot determination.

Further, the main control program sets commands (symbol type look-ahead command, variation pattern look-ahead command, and variation type look-ahead command) indicating the look-ahead result in the command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). .. Further, the hold command reference value with read-ahead is set to the hold command reference value (step S280).

Then, the main control program restores the address of the control data (control data table at the time of starting winning) saved in the process of step S240 (step S282). Finally, based on the set hold command reference value, the hold ball number command is acquired (step S284), and the acquired hold ball number command (special symbol hold ball number designation command) is set in the command buffer (step S284). Step S286).

Here, the procedure for acquiring the hold ball number command (special symbol hold ball number designation command) will be further described. In the address of the control data restored in the process of step S282, the address of the starting port winning control data table corresponding to the winning opening (value of the starting opening identification area) in which the game ball has won is set. As described above, since the structure of the start port winning control data table is common regardless of the value of the start port identification area, it is possible to standardize the subsequent processing.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a table related to the special symbol reserved ball number command, (A) is an example of a special symbol reserved ball number command address table, and (B) is an example of a special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation table. .. As shown in FIG. 22, the start opening winning control data table includes the address of the special symbol reserved ball number command address table (data (T1_SCT_CM_W, T2_SCT_CM_W) set as the start address of each data table). ), You can refer to the special symbol reserved ball count command address table from the address.

The main control program is a special symbol 1 reserved ball number command address table (T1_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the winning start port or a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command address table (T2_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2. Based on the hold command reference value set in the process of step S242 or step S280, the address of the corresponding special symbol hold ball number designation command creation data is specified from the special symbol hold ball number command address table. As shown in FIG. 26B, the special symbol hold ball number designation command creation data includes a hold command generation table when read-ahead is prohibited (upper row, T1_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B) and hold command generation when read-ahead is permitted. A table and (lower row, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) are defined.

Then, the main control program creates a special symbol reserved ball number designation command based on the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data. The data structure of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data (T1_SCT_CM1_B, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) is composed of 3 bytes of data. The 1st byte data is the lower address of the storage area (RAM) that refers to the number of holds, the 2nd byte data is the default value of the value set as the command mode data, and the 3rd byte data is the command status data value. Become. For example, when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 (T1_SID_CT) is 3 (when the number of reserved balls is 3) and the number of reserved balls for special symbol is read ahead, the special symbol 1 reserved number of balls specified command creation data 2 (T1_SCT_CM2_B) Created based on. Specifically, the status value is "62H", the mode value is "02H" (holding number 3-1) + "11H" (default value) = "13H", and the special symbol holding ball number specification command is "6213H". It becomes. Finally, set the created special symbol hold ball number specification command in the command buffer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), the second byte data (default value of the mode value) of the special symbol hold ball number designation command creation data is "01H" when read-ahead is prohibited, and read-ahead is permitted. In the case, it is "11H". Therefore, the high-order bit of the mode value of the special symbol hold ball number designation command is "0" when read-ahead is prohibited and "1" when read-ahead is permitted even after the number of holds is added. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the special symbol reserved ball number designation command can determine the presence or absence of pre-reading by referring to the mode value of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command. As a result, the peripheral control board 4140 waits until it receives the information (command) necessary for executing the special symbol look-ahead effect by receiving the special symbol reserved ball number designation command and referring to the mode value. You can decide whether or not. That is, if the high-order bit of the mode value of the special symbol hold ball number designation command is "0", the process can be continued without receiving the pre-reading related command. The order of the data configurations set in the special symbol hold ball number designation command creation data is not limited to the description order, for example, the lower address of the storage area that refers to the hold number is set in the second byte. It suffices if they are set in a predetermined order. Further, the data is not limited to 3 bytes (3 information), and may be set for other information such as that accompanies the output of the hold number command as long as the data structure is predetermined.

[9-8. Special symbol jackpot judgment processing]
Subsequently, the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S250) in the memory look-ahead process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol jackpot determination process in the present embodiment. The special symbol jackpot determination process determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a jackpot based on the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted at the time of starting winning. This process is commonly used at the time of pre-reading the special lottery and at the time of starting the change of the special symbol (when the change display is confirmed).

The main control program first acquires a jackpot determination random number from the jackpot determination random number buffer (step 300). Subsequently, the special symbol jackpot determination lower limit value for performing the special lottery is acquired from the special symbol jackpot determination lower limit value data (lower limit value table for jackpot determination) based on the probability variation flag (step S302). In the special symbol jackpot determination lower limit data (lower limit table for jackpot determination), the special symbol jackpot determination lower limit is defined corresponding to the probability variation flag. The probability variation flag is information indicating whether the probability state is a normal probability (low probability) or a high probability, and is set to "00H" if the probability is low and "01H" if the probability is high. The value of the special symbol jackpot judgment lower limit value data is set according to the probability state, the lower limit value data is selected based on the probability change flag, and it is possible to make the lottery probability different by making the lower limit value data different. It has become.

Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot determination random number acquired in the process of step S300 is smaller than the jackpot determination lower limit value acquired in the process of step S302 (step S304). When the big hit judgment random number is not smaller than the big hit judgment lower limit value (the result of step S304 is "no"), that is, when the big hit judgment random number is equal to or more than the big hit judgment lower limit value, the big hit judgment random number is the big hit judgment upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the value (step S306). In the present embodiment, the range in which the random number for jackpot determination is generated is from 0 to the upper limit value, and the range of the random number determined to be the jackpot is the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value for jackpot determination. ing. Therefore, normally, if the big hit judgment random number is equal to or higher than the big hit judgment lower limit value, it may be judged as a big hit, but due to the influence of noise or the like, a value exceeding the upper limit value is set for the big hit judgment random number. Even if it does, it may be judged as a big hit. In this embodiment, in order to prevent such a malfunction, it is also compared with the upper limit value.

The main control program hits the jackpot flag when the jackpot determination random number is not larger than the jackpot determination upper limit value (the result of step S306 is "no"), that is, when the jackpot determination random number is equal to or less than the jackpot determination upper limit value. Winning is set (step S308). Specifically, a jackpot winning is set as a flag setting value, and the flag setting value is stored in the jackpot flag storage area. As described above, the jackpot flag storage area is a jackpot flag area (special symbol winning flag area) at the start of fluctuation, and a jackpot flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) at the time of pre-reading determination.

On the other hand, in the main control program, when the jackpot determination random number is smaller than the jackpot determination lower limit value (the result of step S304 is "yes"), or when the jackpot determination random number is larger than the jackpot determination upper limit value (step). The result of S306 is “yes”), and no winning (missing) is set for the jackpot flag (step S310). As a result, even when it is determined that it is larger than the upper limit value, a value that exceeds the upper limit value is set by setting a value that causes the jackpot flag to be off, as in the case where it is determined that it is smaller than the lower limit value. Even if it is set, it prevents it from being mistakenly determined as a big hit. As described above, when the jackpot flag is set, the special symbol jackpot determination process ends.

[9-9. Special symbol judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol determination process (step S252) in the memory look-ahead process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol determination process in the present embodiment. The special symbol determination process identifies a special symbol based on a random number for determining a jackpot symbol extracted at the time of starting winning.

The main control program first acquires the jackpot flag from the jackpot flag storage area (big hit flag area or jackpot flag buffer) (step S320). Then, it is determined whether or not the content of the jackpot flag is a jackpot winning (step S322). If the content of the jackpot flag is not a jackpot win (the result of step S322 is "no"), the special symbol number value is deviated and the symbol command value (0) is set (step S330). Further, the special symbol number value is set to the mode value of the symbol type command (step S332), and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the content of the jackpot flag is the jackpot winning (the result of step S322 is "yes"), the main control program uses the jackpot symbol random number to obtain the jackpot symbol number and the jackpot symbol type from the special symbol determination data address table. Obtain the number (step S324). Since a plurality of jackpot symbols are defined, the jackpot symbol number is acquired from the special symbol determination data address table based on the jackpot symbol random number. The jackpot symbol type number is a number that has a one-to-one correspondence with the jackpot type. For example, 16R probable big hit with a ball (01H), 16R non-probable big hit with a ball (02H), 16R no probable big hit (no time reduction: latent probability change, 03H), 16R no probable big hit (with a short time: sudden) , 04H), small hit (05H), etc. Further, the jackpot symbol number is a value provided for a plurality of symbol type numbers. For example, 01H to 10H for a probability variation jackpot with a 16R ball, 11H to 26H for a non-probability variation jackpot with a 16R ball, 27H to 3FH for a probability variation jackpot without a 16R ball (no time reduction: latent probability variation), 16R. 40H to 55H are provided for the probability variation big hit without a ball (with a short time: sudden probability), and 56H to 5FH are provided for the small hit. In this way, a plurality of jackpot symbol numbers provided for the same jackpot type are displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 based on the jackpot symbol number. This is to make it difficult for the player to see the special design (this special design). On the other hand, since there is only one type of missing symbol, a predetermined value (missing symbol command value (0)) is set for the missing symbol number instead of being selected from the table.

Further, the main control program sets a symbol type command for notifying the peripheral control board 4140 of the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot symbol type number (step S326). Finally, the special symbol number value is set based on the jackpot symbol number (step S328), and the special symbol determination process is completed.

[9-10. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) in the memory look-ahead process will be described. 29 and 30 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process in the present embodiment. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol. Note that this process is executed at the start of fluctuation as well as at the time of look-ahead, and the same fluctuation pattern table is referred to at the time of look-ahead and at the start of fluctuation.

The main control program first acquires the variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variable table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variable information source table from the variable information source address table. The fluctuation information source table is a hit (hit fluctuation selection information status table), a miss (missing fluctuation selection information status table), a reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table), and a reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table) of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 according to the game state. This is a data table in which table information for referring to the reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and the variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Subsequently, the main control program acquires the special symbol identification value and stores it in the variation pattern selection value variation special identification area (step S342). Further, the area corresponding to the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the variable information source table is specified based on the special symbol identification value and the number of data for one block of the variable distribution information source table for each special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2). Step S344). Subsequently, the winning judgment value for deriving the result of the special lottery (the value of the winning result stored in the special symbol winning flag buffer at the time of pre-reading or in the special symbol winning flag area at the start of fluctuation (for example, 00H). : Off, 01H: Big hit, 02H: Small hit) is acquired (step S346).

The main control program determines whether or not the jackpot or small hit has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value or the small hit value (step S350). When a big hit or a small hit is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot variation selection information type table is searched from the hit variation selection information status table based on the status flag (step S352). At this time, the address of the searched jackpot variation selection information type table is saved. The jackpot variation selection information type table is a variation group at a stage before determining a jackpot variation pattern, and is a variation pattern that is finally determined, for example, SP1 system reach, SP2 system reach, and the like. It is a table for selecting a group (a group group). Depending on whether the result of the special lottery is a small hit or a big hit, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value set for the big hit symbol type, and the big hit symbol type number is big hit and small. Since different values are set for the hit, it is possible to select the fluctuation pattern by the common processing for the big hit and the small hit.

Next, the main control program acquires the jackpot symbol type (value stored in the jackpot symbol type buffer at the time of pre-reading or in the jackpot symbol type area at the start of fluctuation) (step S354). The set jackpot symbol type is used in the fluctuation information number search process in step S358.

Subsequently, the main control program selects a symbol type setting data selection table for variable pattern distribution according to the value of the variable special figure identification area at the time of variable pattern selection. (Step S356). The fluctuation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table is for determining the type for determining the hit fluctuation pattern selection value data table from the jackpot fluctuation selection information type table based on the (hit) symbol type value. It is a table of.

Next, the main control program executes the variation information number search process using the jackpot symbol type acquired in the process of step S354 as a comparison value, thereby executing the variation information number (the hit-time variation pattern selection value from the jackpot variation selection information type table). (Type value for determining the data table) is acquired (step S358). Further, the saved jackpot variation selection information type table is set as search data (step S360). Further, by the process of step S358, the variation information number which is the result of the variation information number search process is set as the selection value (step S362).

On the other hand, if the main control program has not won a big hit or a small hit (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control program sets a special symbol reach probability table as search data (step S364). Then, the special symbol reach probability data corresponding to the state flag is searched from the special symbol reach probability table (step S366). The state flag is set with numerical data corresponding to the game state, and in the present embodiment, 00H (low probability non-time saving (normal game) state), 01H (high probability time saving state), 02H. Either (low probability time saving state) or 03H (high probability non-time saving state) is set. This makes it possible to select the reach probability of the special symbol according to the game state. Further, a reach determination for determining whether or not to generate a reach based on the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 in the look-ahead or fluctuation). Acquire the threshold value (step S368). Subsequently, the main control program sets the reach variation selection information status table as the search data (step S370).

Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not to generate reach in the variation display corresponding to the start winning (step S372). Specifically, the reach determination random number is acquired from the reach determination random number buffer and compared with the reach determination threshold value acquired in the process of step S368. Reach is generated when the reach judgment threshold value is larger than the reach judgment random number.

When the main control program does not generate reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control program sets the out-of-order fluctuation selection information status table as the search data (step S374). Further, the out-of-order variation selection information holding table corresponding to the state flag is searched from the out-of-bounds variation selection information state table (step S376), and the searched out-of-range variation selection information holding table is set as search data (step S378). Further, the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the look-ahead or fluctuation is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is set in the selected value (step 380).

The process from step S374 to step S380 is a process of selecting a fluctuation pattern in the case of an outlier in which reach does not occur. Normally, in the case of deviation, it is necessary to change the fluctuation pattern according to the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time may be selected as compared with the case where the number of holds is small. The variation pattern table set so that is high is selected.

On the other hand, when the main control program causes a reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "yes"), the main control program sets a state flag as a selection value (step 382). When the reach is generated, the length of the fluctuation time is not determined by the number of holdings, but the fluctuation time may be changed by the number of holdings as in the case of normal deviation. Specifically, even with the same reach fluctuation, when the number of holdings is large, a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, a high-speed fluctuation time immediately after the start of fluctuation) may be adjusted as compared with the case where the number is small. In this case, since the fluctuation time is different, different fluctuation pattern commands are set.

When the processing of step S362, step S380 or step S382 is completed, the main control program selects the variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the selection value from the search data set at this time (step S384). Specifically, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit (step S362), the big hit variation selection information type table is set as the search data, and the variation which is the search result of the variation information number search process in step S358 as the selection value. The symbol type value for pattern distribution is set. Further, when the result of the special lottery is different and reach occurs (step S382), the reach variation selection information status table is set as the search data, and the status flag is set as the selection value. Further, when the result of the special lottery is out of order and no reach occurs (step S380), the out-of-order variation selection information holding table is set as the search data, and the number of reserved balls is set as the selection value.

Subsequently, the main control program acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern (step S386) and executes the fluctuation information number search process (step S388). The variation pattern selection data selection value is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table by the variation information number search process. Further, the main control program acquires the variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the variation pattern selection data selection value from the variation pattern selection data address table (step S390).

Subsequently, the main control program acquires the random number 2 for the variation pattern (step S392), and based on the variation pattern selection value data table acquired in the process of the random number 2 for the variation pattern and step S390, the variation information number search process. Is executed (step S394). After that, a variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

The variation pattern selection data table is composed of one or a plurality of sets of data, with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value and the variation pattern setting value as one set of data. By executing the variation information number search process, the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit set in the variation pattern selection data table are compared, and the variation pattern is more than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit. When it is determined that the value of the random number 2 is larger, the fluctuation pattern setting value corresponding to the lower limit value of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern is selected. If the value of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern is smaller than the lower limit of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern, the value of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern is higher than the lower limit of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern set next. It is repeatedly executed while changing the lower limit value of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern until it is determined to be large.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers, the variation pattern random number 1 (step S386) and the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern group such as XX reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. Further, from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally varied and displayed is selected. The lottery method is not limited to two stages, and a lottery method may be used in three or more stages, or a random number for one fluctuation pattern may be used to directly select a fluctuation pattern. Since each random number for each fluctuation pattern at present is composed of 1 byte, the result of determination with 2 random numbers is the same as the result of determination with a total of 2 bytes of random numbers. When selecting a variation pattern with one variation pattern random number, the variation pattern random number may be composed of 2 bytes.

[9-11. Fluctuation type judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation type determination process (step S262) in the memory look-ahead process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation type determination process in the present embodiment. As described above, the variation type determination process is a process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

The main control program first searches the variation type determination data table for the variation type determination data corresponding to the state flag (step S400). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern set value is restored and set as a comparison value (step S402), and the fluctuation information number search process is executed (step S404).

Different variation type determination data are set in the variation type determination data table according to the gaming state, and the variation type determination data corresponding to the gaming state is selected by the process of step S400. Further, the fluctuation type determination data is composed of one or a plurality of sets of data with the fluctuation pattern lower limit value and the fluctuation type selection data selection value as one set of data. Then, by executing the fluctuation information number search process, the fluctuation pattern selection value is compared with the fluctuation pattern lower limit value set in the fluctuation type determination data, and the fluctuation pattern selection value is larger than the fluctuation pattern lower limit value. When it is determined, the fluctuation type selection data selection value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern lower limit value is selected. If the fluctuation pattern selection value is smaller than the fluctuation pattern lower limit value, the fluctuation pattern selection value is compared with the next set fluctuation pattern lower limit value, and the fluctuation pattern lower limit value is changed until it is determined that the fluctuation pattern selection value is larger. It is executed repeatedly while. Before executing the variation type determination process, the variation information source address table is set in advance as an input parameter, and the variation type is set based on the variation type determination data table set in this variation information source address table. It is judged.

Next, the main control program searches the variation type selection data (address) corresponding to the variation type selection data selection value acquired by the variation information number search process in step S404 from the variation type determination data address table (step S406). ).

Subsequently, the main control program sets a random number for the variation type as a comparison value (step S408), and executes the variation information number search process (step S410). At this time, the variation type selection data acquired in the process of step S406 is set as the search data, and the variation type setting value is acquired by the variation information number search process.

The variation type selection data is composed of one or a plurality of sets of data with the variation type random number lower limit value and the variation type setting value as one set of data. By executing the variation information number search process, the random number for the variation type is compared with the lower limit of the random number for the variation type set in the variation type selection data, and the random number for the variation type is larger than the lower limit of the random number for the variation type. When is determined to be large, the variation type setting value corresponding to the random number lower limit value for the variation type is selected. If the value of the random number for the variable type is smaller than the lower limit of the random number for the variable type, it is determined that the value of the random number for the variable type is larger than the lower limit of the random number for the variable type set next. It is repeatedly executed while changing the lower limit of random numbers for variable type until.

[9-12. Special symbol change waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process in the present embodiment. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state in which the change display of the special symbol is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, preparations are made to start the change display of the special symbol.

The main control program first determines whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hold identification value (value of the special symbol hold identification 1 area) corresponding to the variable display to be executed next time is not 0 from the value stored at the beginning of the special symbol hold identification area. .. When the loaded value is 0, that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is not held (the result of step S420 is "no"), the main control program does not start the variable display of the special symbol. End the process.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control program executes a process for starting the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, first, since the variation display when the game ball enters the lower start opening 2102 (special symbol 2) is executed with priority, the special symbol 2 is set in the start opening identification value (step S422). ), The special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data is set as the fluctuation setting data (step S424). In other words, the special symbol 2 variation setting data is set in the variation setting data. Further, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is acquired from the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number area (step S426).

Then, the main control program determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is not 0 (1 or more) (step S428). Special symbol 2 When the number of reserved balls is 0 (the result of step S428 is "no"), the special symbol 1 is set in the starting port identification value (step S430), and the special symbol 1 variation setting data is set as the variation setting data. Set (step S432).

The variation setting data is composed of a RAM or a data table address that is referred to for executing the variation start processing in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and the reference destination is a different value between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Can be set, and the data structure (the number of set data) is common. As a result, it is possible to execute a common fluctuation start process for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

The variation setting data of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 in the present embodiment is composed of 13 bytes, and is specifically as follows. The 1st byte is the lower byte of the operation hold ball number address, the 2nd and 3rd bytes are the hold ball number specification command creation data address, the 4th and 5th bytes are the hold storage area transfer source address at the time of transfer, and the 6th and 7th bytes are hold. Storage area transfer destination address, 8th and 9th bytes are reserved 4 Storage area transfer source address, 10th and 11th bytes are reserved 4 Storage area transfer destination address, 12th and 13th bytes are changing setting data The address.

When the variation setting data is set, the main control program stores the start port identification value in the special symbol identification flag area (step S434). Subsequently, in order to start the variation of the special symbol, the number of operation hold balls corresponding to the starting port identification value and the total number of special symbol operation hold stored in the special symbol total operation hold number area are subtracted by 1 (step S436).

Next, the main control program sets the reserved ball number designation command as command data (step S438) and sets it in the command buffer (step S440). After that, the reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process. The command creation table (FIG. 26 (A)) for creating the reserved ball number designation command is the same as that at the time of pre-reading, and the program capacity is saved by using the same table at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation. There is.

Subsequently, the main control program executes the special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for determining a jackpot acquired at the time of winning the starting opening. Details of the special symbol / flag setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

Further, the main control program executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

Next, the main control program sequentially shifts the data stored in the special symbol hold storage area (FIG. 23) (step S446). In the special symbol hold storage area, hold storage (starting memory) including various random numbers such as a random number for jackpot determination extracted by the starting winning is stored for each starting opening for each winning start. Clears the hold memory where the change starts when the change of the special symbol based on the hold memory starts, and shifts the remaining hold memory. For example, when the maximum number of holdings is 4, the holding storage stored in the special symbol holding storage 2 area is shifted to the special symbol holding storage 1 area, and similarly to the special symbol holding storage 3 area and the special symbol holding storage 4 area. The stored hold memory is shifted to the special symbol hold memory 2 area and the special symbol hold memory 3 area. After that, the special symbol hold storage 4 area is cleared (step S448). The shift processing of the special symbol hold storage area stores the value set in the transfer source address at the time of transfer of the hold storage area set in the variable setting data in the transfer destination address at the time of transfer of the hold storage area, and at the time of transfer of the hold storage area. Transfer source address and hold storage area During transfer The transfer destination address is updated to the next address, and the data stored in each hold storage area is sequentially shifted.

Next, the main control program sets the changing data setting address set in the fluctuation setting data as the setting data address, and provides the information necessary to execute the special symbol changing processing executed in the next interrupt processing. Set to a predetermined storage area (step S450).

Further, the main control program creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, first, as a command value, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set. For example, if the special symbol identification flag is special symbol 2, the upper byte of the special figure 2 variation pattern reference command is set, and if it is special symbol 1, the upper byte of the special figure 1 variation pattern reference command is set (steps S452 to 2). S456).

Further, the main control program acquires the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area as lower-level command data (step S458). Further, the variation type type value is acquired from the variation type type area (step S460), and the variation type type value is added to the command value set in the process of step S452 or step S456 to obtain the variation pattern command according to the variation type. The high-order byte of is calculated (step S462). A variation pattern command is created by the processing of steps S450 to S462, and a command storage process for storing the created command data in a predetermined area is executed (step S464).

Subsequently, the main control program sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, if the special symbol identification flag is special symbol 1, the special stop symbol 1 designation command shown in FIG. 15 is set in the command buffer, and if it is special symbol 2, the special stop symbol 2 designation command shown in FIG. 15 is set. Set (steps S466 to S472).

Next, the main control program sets a variable state specification command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command buffer (steps S474 and S476). Since each generated command is sent in the order in which it was generated (the order in which it was stored in the command buffer), the command generation order (the order in which it is stored in the command buffer) is changed when the transmission order is changed. do it. For example, when it is desired to transmit the symbol type command before the variation pattern command, the processes from step S466 to step S472 may be executed prior to the processes from step S458 to step S464.

Next, the main control program clears the special symbol hold history corresponding to the hold memory in which the variable display is executed, and shifts the special symbol hold history (step S478). In the present embodiment, an area for storing the special symbol hold history for eight pieces (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, four pieces each) is allocated, and the variable display corresponding to the first hold memory is started. Then, the special symbol hold history corresponding to the subsequent variable display is sequentially shifted. Specifically, the special symbol hold history stored in the second area (special symbol hold history identification 2 area) is moved to the beginning. Since each special symbol hold history identification area is assigned to a continuous area, the area in which seven special symbol hold history is stored may be shifted. Finally, the last area (special symbol hold history identification 8 area) of the special symbol hold history identification area is cleared (step S480), and the special symbol change waiting process is terminated.

[9-13. Special symbol / flag setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol / flag setting process (step S442) in the special symbol change waiting process will be described. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the variation display result of the special symbol is set at the start of the variation. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol / flag setting process in the present embodiment.

First, the main control program stores a random number (random number for determining a special symbol jackpot) for determining a jackpot in a special lottery in a random number buffer for determining a jackpot (random number storage area for fluctuation) (steps S500 to S506). Specifically, a special symbol that starts variable display is specified based on the special symbol identification flag, and the corresponding special symbol jackpot determination random number storage 1 area (special symbol 1 jackpot determination random number storage 1 area or special symbol 2). A special symbol big hit judgment random number stored in the big hit judgment random number storage 1 area) is set. Then, the set special symbol jackpot determination random number is stored (transferred) in the jackpot determination random number buffer (variable random number storage area).

That is, the special symbol hold storage area that is the target of the fluctuation start is specified, and the stored random number value is stored in the corresponding area of the special symbol hold storage buffer. Special symbol 1 (Special symbol 2) Random number storage for jackpot judgment In addition to the special symbol jackpot judgment random number stored in the area, special symbol 1
(Special symbol 2) Random number value stored in the reach judgment random number storage 1 area is used in the reach judgment random number buffer, and special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern random number 1 storage random number value is changed. In the pattern random number 1 buffer, the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern random number 2 storage 1 area is stored in the variation pattern random number 2 buffer, and the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation type random number. The random number value stored in the storage 1 area is stored in the variable type random number buffer, and the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) special symbol random number storage 1 area is stored in the special symbol random number buffer.

Subsequently, the main control program sets the jackpot flag area as the jackpot flag storage area (special symbol winning flag area) (step S508). Further, a special symbol jackpot determination process for determining the result of the special lottery is executed based on the jackpot flag stored in the jackpot flag area (step S510). The special symbol / flag setting process is a process executed at the start of fluctuation, and the address value of the jackpot flag area (special symbol winning flag area) is set and the special symbol jackpot determination process is executed. On the other hand, when the special symbol jackpot determination process is executed at the time of look-ahead (when it is executed in the process of step S250 of the memory look-ahead process), as described above, the jackpot flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) is used as the jackpot flag. Is set. In this way, by pre-setting the area of the RAM to be referenced / stored before executing the special symbol jackpot determination process at the time of pre-reading and the time of fluctuation, the "special symbol jackpot determination process" can be set at the time of pre-reading and at the time of fluctuation. It is possible to share it with. The procedure for the special symbol jackpot determination process is as described in FIG. 27.

Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the result (big hit) of the special lottery (step S512). The special symbol determination process is common to the process of step S252 in the memory look-ahead process, and can be shared between the look-ahead time and the variable time as in the special symbol jackpot determination process, and the processing contents will be described with reference to FIG. That's right. Then, the main control program sets the special symbol number value set in the special symbol determination process as the special symbol number setting value (step S514).

Next, the main control program searches the special stop symbol setting work area address table for the special symbol stop area (special symbol 1 stop area or special symbol 2 stop area) corresponding to the special symbol identification flag (step S516). Further, the special symbol number setting value is stored in the special symbol stop area searched by the process of step S516 (step S518).

Then, the main control program executes a special symbol conversion process for selecting a display pattern to be displayed on the special symbol display (7-segment or the like) (step S520). If the determined symbol number is set as it is as the display data of the special symbol display, the display pattern becomes constant, and there is a risk that the player can easily identify the type of hit in the manner displayed on the special symbol display. Therefore, the display pattern is acquired so as not to be a constant display pattern by calculation. It is also possible to select a display pattern from the symbol number on a dedicated table so that the display pattern is not constant, but as the number of symbol types increases, it is necessary to retain the display pattern by that amount, and the display pattern The storage capacity for storing the table will increase. Therefore, by acquiring the display pattern by calculation, it is possible to suppress the increase in the storage capacity while preventing the player from identifying the display pattern.

Finally, the main control program adds 1 to the area corresponding to the special symbol stop area searched in the process of step S516 (the address of the searched special symbol stop area) by adding the symbol information value acquired by the special symbol conversion process. It is stored in (the area corresponding to the address) (step S522), and the special symbol / flag setting process is completed.

[9-14. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process in the present embodiment.

First, the main control program stores the number of special symbol operation hold balls corresponding to the special symbol identification flag in the special symbol operation hold ball number buffer (steps S530 to S536). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol operation hold ball number area (special symbol 1 operation hold ball number area or special symbol 2 operation hold ball number area) corresponding to the special symbol that starts the variable display is set. Specify and set the value of the special symbol operation reserved ball number area (special symbol operation reserved ball number) in the stored value (steps S530 to S534). Then, the set stored value is stored in the special symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (step S536).

Subsequently, the main control program sets the jackpot flag area in the jackpot flag storage area (step S538). Further, the special symbol variation distribution information source address table 1 is set as the special symbol variation distribution information source address table that holds the information for selecting the variation pattern (step S540). After that, the variation pattern selection determination process for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S542). The variation pattern selection determination process is common to the process of step S258 in the memory look-ahead process, and can be shared between the look-ahead time and the variation time as in the special symbol jackpot determination process, which will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. That's right. When the variation pattern selection determination process is completed, the main control program sets the extracted variation pattern value in the variation pattern area (step S544).

Next, the main control program searches the special symbol fluctuation time data for data (variation time value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern value (step S546). The fluctuation time value acquired at this time becomes the reference fluctuation time value, and the reference fluctuation time value is saved.

Further, the main control program executes a variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type type value (step S548). Further, the main control program determines whether or not the variation type change flag indicating that the current variation display is the target of the special pseudo-continuous effect is set (step S565), and the variation type change flag is set. If (the result of step S565 is "YES"), it corresponds to the rest except for a part of the original variation type "pseudo-ream n (n = 2-4)" (in this example, until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time). The variable type is changed to "post-special pseudo-ream n (n = 2-4)" (step S566), the variable type change flag is reset (step S567), and the process proceeds to step S550.

On the other hand, if the variation type change flag is not set (the result of step S565 is "NO"), the variation type is "pseudo-ream 2" to "pseudo-ream 4" as the variation display corresponding to the next stored start memory. It is determined whether or not any of the above is to be executed (step S561).

"Pseudo-ream 2" is a pseudo-ream effect that temporarily stops and re-variates the decorative symbol three times, and "pseudo-ream 3" is a pseudo-ream effect that executes the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol four times. "Pseudo-ream 4" is a pseudo-ream effect that temporarily stops and re-variates the decorative symbol five times. When the main control program executes any of "pseudo-ream 2" to "pseudo-ream 4" as the variation display corresponding to the next stored start memory (result of step S561). Is "YES"), and it is determined whether or not to change the variation type based on a random number (for example, a random number for variation type) and a determination table (variation type change determination table (not shown)) (step S562).

When the variation type is changed (the result of step S562 is "YES"), the main control program sets the variation type change flag (step S563). The variable type change flag is a pseudo-ream so that when the fluctuating type is specified as a pseudo-ream effect in which the decorative symbol is re-variated three or more times, these are executed over the variable display of the special symbol a plurality of times. It is a flag indicating that a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the production is distributed to the variable display of another special symbol. In this example, a part of the pseudo-continuous effect executed during one special symbol variation display is distributed to at least one previous special symbol variation display and executed, and the remaining pseudo-continuous effect is being displayed in the original variation display. It can be executed (during the fluctuation display determined by the fluctuation pattern for executing the pseudo continuous effect). In this way, a part of the pseudo-continuous effect executed during one special symbol variation display is distributed to the previous special symbol variation display, and the remaining pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the original variation display. As a result, it is possible to shorten the fluctuation time per special symbol as compared with the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the fluctuation display of one special symbol.

Next, the main control program corresponds to a part of the variation type "pseudo-ream n (n = 2 to 4)" of the start memory stored next (until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time in this example). The variation type is changed to "pre-special pseudo-ream n (n = 2-4)" (step S564), and the process proceeds to step S550.

On the other hand, when none of the variation types "pseudo-ream 2" to "pseudo-ream 4" is executed as the variation display corresponding to the start memory stored next (the result of step S561 is "NO"), the step Proceed to S550.

By the above processing, a part of the pseudo-continuous effect that would normally be executed during one special symbol variation display is distributed to the previous (previous) special symbol variation display and executed. It is possible to execute a special pseudo-continuous effect similar to the pseudo-continuous effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol a plurality of times over the variable display of the special symbol. Not limited to the above example, if the special lottery result drawn when the game ball is accepted into the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 is not "big hit" or "small hit", after the start memory. (It may be distributed to the next (after) start memory, or it may be distributed to each of a plurality of start memories including the next (after) start memory) For the start memory based on the start prize that occurs. It may be distributed to the variable display of the special symbol executed in response. Further, a part of the pseudo-continuous effect executed during one special symbol variation display may be divided into a plurality of variation displays including the previous special symbol variation display and executed. That is, the pseudo-continuous effect executed during one variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one start prize straddles the multiple variable display of the special symbol executed in response to a plurality of start prizes. If the effect to be executed as a pseudo-continuous effect is divided into a plurality of variable displays of special symbols corresponding to each of a plurality of start memories and executed, that period (special pseudo-continuous effect). The number of times of variable display of the special symbol to be executed (number of start-up memories)) and the timing (whether to allocate to the previous start-up memory or the later start-up memory) are not limited to those described above.

Further, in the above example, when the special symbol variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the variation type of the next variation display is determined, and the special pseudo-continuous effect is executed according to the result. It is configured to perform a lottery of whether or not, but it is not limited to this, and it is a memory look-ahead process of the start winning process that is executed when the game ball is accepted by the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102. Therefore, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to execute the special pseudo-continuous production by discriminating the variation type of the variation display based on the start winning prize. That is, the lottery timing for whether or not to execute the special pseudo-continuous effect is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, and may be any time as long as it can be executed at a predetermined arbitrary timing.

The main control program sets the acquired variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S550). The variation type determination process is common to the process of step S262 in the memory look-ahead process, and can be shared between the look-ahead time and the variation time as in the special symbol jackpot determination process, as described in FIG. ..

Subsequently, the main control program searches the fluctuation time addition value data for the fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value (step S552). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time according to the number of pseudo-reams (the number of times the decorative symbol is re-variated by the pseudo-ream effect). Then, the main control program adds the addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched in the process of step S546 to acquire the final fluctuation time (step S554). Finally, the final fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process is completed. In this way, when the pseudo-continuous effect is selected as the fluctuation type, the fluctuation time is longer than that of the normal fluctuation display by adding the added value to the reference fluctuation time value. The fluctuation time of the "post-special pseudo-ream n", which is the difference obtained by excluding the effect corresponding to the "pre-special pseudo-ream n" from the "pseudo-ream n", is shorter than that of the "pseudo-ream n". That is, the fluctuation time of the "post-special pseudo-ream n" is the fluctuation time of the "pseudo-ream n" excluding the production time of the effect corresponding to the "pre-special pseudo-ream n", and is from the "pseudo-ream n" to the "rear". By changing to "special pseudo-ream n", the fluctuation time is equal to the production time (for example, 10 seconds) of the effect corresponding to "previous special pseudo-ream n" with respect to the fluctuation time of "pseudo-ream n" (for example, 40 seconds). It is designed to be shortened (for example, shortened from 40 seconds to 30 seconds).

[9-15. Ordinary design and ordinary electric accessory control processing]
Next, the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process in the present embodiment. The normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process are executed in the process of step S88 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process is started, the main control program first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate portion (normal figure gate) 2350 (step S800). When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350, the presence / absence of the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is read by the switch input process in step S74 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19, and the input information of the main control built-in RAM is stored. Input information is written to the area. The main control program refers to the written input information and determines the passage of the game ball.

When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 (the result of step S800 is “yes”), the main control program executes the gate passage processing (step S802). In the gate passage processing, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The details of the processing at the time of passing through the gate will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

The main control program is a normal symbol / normal electric accessory when the game ball has not passed through the gate portion 2350 (the result of step S800 is "no") or when the processing at the time of passing through the gate is completed. The process corresponding to the normal symbol / electric accessory operation number is searched from the operation call table (step S804), and the searched process is executed (step S810).

In step S810 processing, based on the normal symbol / electric accessory operation number, the normal symbol change waiting process (step S812), the normal symbol changing process (step S814), the normal symbol jackpot determination process (step S816), and the normal symbol loss. The stop process (step S818), the normal symbol hit stop process (step S820), the normal electric accessory open / close process (step S822), or the normal electric operation end interval process (step S824) is executed.

In the normal symbol change waiting process (step S812), a process of starting the change display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2350.

In the normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S814), a process of controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed.

In the normal symbol hit determination process (step S816), the winning determination of the normal lottery is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2350.

In the normal symbol loss stop process (step S818), when the normal lottery is not won, a process of stopping the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 and notifying the fact is performed.

In the normal symbol hit stop process (step S820), when the normal lottery is won, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped to notify the fact, or a pair of movable pieces (ordinary electric accessory). Processes such as setting the opening / closing mode of 2106 are performed.

In the normal electric accessory opening / closing process (step S822), a pair of movable pieces (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 are opened or closed so that the game ball can be accepted into the lower starting port 2102, and the lower starting is started. Performs processing related to operations such as preventing the game ball from being accepted by the mouth 2102.

In the normal electric operation end interval process (step S824), it is determined whether or not the operation of the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 is completed, and when it is completed, a process for notifying the fact is performed.

[9-16. Processing when passing through the gate]
Subsequently, the details of the gate passage processing (step S802) in the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing will be described. In the gate passage processing, a command to be transmitted when the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2350 is detected is set, random numbers for ordinary lottery are extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a look-ahead effect is executed. Perform processing to do so.

In the gate passage processing, as described above, the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2350 is detected, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and the gate of the main control built-in RAM is used as the gate information. Store in the information storage area.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. Hereinafter, the procedure of the gate passage processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 37.

When the process at the time of passing through the gate is started, the main control program first acquires the value of the normal symbol operation hold ball number area as the operation hold ball number (step S830). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls is 4 or more, which is the upper limit value (step S832). If the number of balls on hold is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of step S832 is “yes”), the process at the time of passing through the gate is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of operation-holding balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S832 is "no"), the main control program stores the number of operation-holding balls in the normal symbol operation-holding ball number buffer (step S834). Further, 1 is added to the contents of the normal symbol operation reserved ball number area, and the normal symbol operation reserved ball number is updated (step S836).

Subsequently, the main control program stores the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number in a predetermined area of the normal symbol random number storage area corresponding to the reserved number (step S838). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol random number storage area is divided into sections 0 to 3 in predetermined units, and each section is a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal symbols. Each time the gate is passed, a hit determination random number for determining the winning of the ordinary symbol and a winning symbol random number for determining the winning symbol of the ordinary symbol are stored in the normal symbol random number storage area. Since the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number are each composed of 1 byte, the predetermined unit is 2. The random numbers stored for ordinary symbols are not limited to the random numbers. For example, when a reach determination random number for ordinary symbols or a random number for fluctuation patterns is provided as in a special symbol, these are gated. It can be configured to be stored for each passage.

Finally, the main control program executes the normal symbol look-ahead process based on the reserved storage of the newly stored normal symbol (step S840). The details of the normal symbol look-ahead processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

[9-17. Normal symbol look-ahead processing]
Subsequently, the details of the normal symbol look-ahead processing (step S848) in the gate passage processing will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol look-ahead processing in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol look-ahead processing, various random numbers are acquired before starting the variable display of the normal symbol based on the newly stored normal symbol hold storage, and the normal symbol look-ahead effect is performed on the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number values. Information for determining (normal symbol type look-ahead effect command shown in FIG. 16) is generated, and processing such as sending a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the normal symbol type pre-reading command, it determines whether or not the normal symbol pre-reading effect can be executed, and performs processing according to the determination result.

When the normal symbol look-ahead process is started, the main control program temporarily sets the look-ahead determination value to prohibit look-ahead (step S850). Further, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead determination prohibition period is set when the process is executed (step S852).

Here, the period during which the look-ahead determination is prohibited will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a period during which the look-ahead determination is prohibited. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination of the normal lottery is prohibited depending on the operating (opening) state of the movable piece 2106 (normal electric accessory).

As shown in FIG. 39, the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory is determined by the gaming state and the mode of the special look-ahead effect. Further, the gaming state includes a probability state corresponding to the winning probability of the special lottery, and a time saving state corresponding to the fluctuation time in the normal lottery, the winning probability, and the operation mode of the normal electric accessory. The probability state includes a low probability state (normal state) and a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability of winning the special figure lottery is higher than that of the low probability state. Further, the time saving state includes a non-time saving state and a time saving state which is more advantageous for the player than the non-time saving state. In the time-saving state of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state, the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is high, and the operating time of the normal electric accessory (game at the lower starting port 2102) It is configured so that the time during which the ball can enter) becomes longer.

Further, in the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory of the present embodiment, in addition to the opening mode in the time saving state, a short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower starting port 2102 and a game ball that is sufficient for the lower starting port 2102. There are two types of long-open operation modes that allow the ball to enter the ball. Further, the opening modes of the short opening and the long opening may be different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. The short opening in the non-time saving state is an opening mode in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the starting port, but in the time saving state, it may be an opening mode in which the ball is easily entered into the starting port as in the long opening. Further, the long opening may be an opening mode in which the non-time saving state and the time saving state are different, and the ratio of winning a prize to the starting port is further increased in the time saving state as compared with the non-time saving state. In the case of the short opening, it is difficult for the player to aim and let the game ball enter the lower starting port 2102, so that the normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed only in the case of the long opening.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect may be executed even in the case of short opening. For example, by executing the same look-ahead effect for the long open and the short open, it becomes difficult for the player to know whether the long open or the short open, and the expectation due to the look-ahead effect can be further amplified. In addition, by making the mode of the look-ahead effect different or only partly different between the short opening and the long opening, the player can identify which opening pattern will be used, and the firing operation corresponding to the opening pattern can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Further, as for the look-ahead effect, a gaze effect may be provided regardless of whether it is long or short. Gase production is to notify the player that the pre-reading production is executed, but the production does not succeed (fails) in the end, and as a result, the normal electric accessory is not released. You may. As a result, the Gase effect is disappointing for the player, but if the Gase effect is not provided, the opening operation is always performed when the look-ahead effect is performed, so that the player's pre-reading effect is executed. The purpose is to further increase expectations. In addition, a look-ahead effect as a definite effect may be provided so that either short open or long open is always executed in the look-ahead effect. By adopting a mode different from the normal look-ahead effect for the final effect, it is possible to further increase the expectation of the player.

In addition, in the case of a short time state, the probability of winning the general drawing lottery is high, and since the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is long, the profit of notifying the long opening is scarce for the player. You may not do it.

Further, when the special figure look-ahead effect is executed, the execution of the normal figure look-ahead effect may be restricted. In the present embodiment, when the special figure look-ahead effect that changes the mode of the hold display is executed, it is permitted to execute the normal figure look-ahead effect in parallel. On the other hand, when the special figure look-ahead effect that changes the background display is executed, the execution of the normal figure look-ahead effect is permitted if the probability state is low, and the normal figure look-ahead effect is executed if the probability state is high. It regulates the execution of. This is because there is a high expectation that the special lottery will be won in the special figure look-ahead effect in the high probability state, so that the effect of the normal figure look-ahead effect may be reduced. However, by executing the normal map look-ahead effect, the player can be encouraged to continue firing the game ball without stopping the launch of the game ball while the special figure look-ahead effect is being executed. You may want to do it. Further, the execution of the normal map look-ahead effect may be restricted according to the game state. For example, in the case of the big hit game state, the execution of the normal figure look-ahead effect may be restricted.

Here, the description of the flowchart of FIG. 38 returns. When the read-ahead determination prohibition period is set (the result of step S852 is "yes"), the main control program executes the processes after step S868. On the other hand, when the read-ahead determination prohibition period has not been reached (the result of step S852 is "no"), in order to execute the look-ahead determination, the contents of the hit determination random number storage area to be read ahead are stored in the hit determination random number buffer. It is stored in (step S854). Specifically, first, the random number value stored in the ordinary symbol random number storage area in any of the compartments 0 to 3 corresponding to the number of reserved balls is stored in the ordinary symbol random number buffer. The random number buffer for ordinary symbols is configured corresponding to the random number value stored in the ordinary symbol random number storage area when passing through the gate. In the present embodiment, an area for 2 bytes of a hit determination random number and a hit symbol random number is secured, and is composed of a hit determination random number buffer and a hit symbol random number buffer. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the hit judgment random number and the hit symbol random number stored in the section 1 of the normal symbol random number storage area are used in the hit judgment random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer, respectively. It is stored. In this way, the random number value related to the lottery is stored in the random number buffer for hit judgment, and the "normal symbol hit judgment process" is executed for the random number value stored in the random number buffer for hit judgment. It is possible to perform the determination and the hit determination at the start of fluctuation by a common process.

Subsequently, the main control program sets the hit flag buffer as the hit flag storage area (step S856). By setting the address of the hit flag buffer as the reference address of the reference / setting destination and executing the "normal symbol hit judgment process", the hit result, the hit symbol, and the number of holds are the hit flag buffer and the normal symbol type area buffer, respectively. , Ordinary symbol operation reserved ball number buffer will be set / referenced. Further, the main control program executes a normal symbol hit determination process for determining the hit of the normal symbol (step S858). The details of the normal symbol hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. After that, the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer are cleared (step S860).

When the main control program clears the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer, it sets the normal symbol type look-ahead command creation data as command data (step S862), and refers to the contents of the normal symbol type look-ahead command creation data. A look-ahead command for a normal symbol (corresponding to the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command in FIG. 16) is generated and set in the command buffer (step S864). Further, the read-ahead determination value is reset to read-ahead permission (step S866).

After the processing of step S866 is completed, or in the case of the read-ahead determination prohibition period (the result of step S852 is "yes"), the main control program temporarily sets the normal symbol operation pending ball count command creation data 1 as command data. (Step S868). Further, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead determination value is read-ahead prohibition (step S870), and when the look-ahead judgment value is not read-ahead prohibition (the result of step S870 is "no"), that is, when the look-ahead judgment value is read-ahead permission. Is reset to the normal symbol operation pending ball count command creation data 2 as command data (step S872). As described above, different commands are created for the normal symbol operation reserved ball count command when the look-ahead is permitted and when the look-ahead is prohibited. For example, different modes are set depending on whether the read-ahead is permitted or prohibited. Finally, the main control program generates a normal symbol operation pending ball count command when read-ahead is permitted or read-ahead is prohibited based on the command data set in the process of step S868 or step S872, and sets it in the command buffer (step S874). ).

[9-18. Normal symbol hit judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the normal symbol hit determination process (step S858) in the normal symbol look-ahead process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol hit determination process in the present embodiment. In the ordinary symbol hit determination process, a process of determining the result of the ordinary lottery is performed.

When the normal symbol hit determination process is started, the main control program first sets the value of the hit determination random number buffer as a comparison value (step S900). Further, the lower limit of the hit value and the like are selected from the normal symbol hit determination lower limit value data table based on whether or not the game is in the time saving game state, and the normal symbol hit determination lower limit value data is set (step S902). In addition, since the normal symbol has a high probability during the time reduction and the number of hit values during the time reduction is larger than the number of hit values during the non-time reduction, the value of the lower limit etc. is smaller during the time reduction. (The total number of winning values increases). Further, the main control program temporarily sets the normal symbol winning determination value as the default value of no normal symbol winning (step S904).

Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the comparison value set in the process of step S900 is smaller than the hit determination lower limit value set in the process of step S902 (step S906). If the comparison value is smaller than the lower limit of the hit judgment (the result of step S906 is "yes"), the normal symbol lottery was not won, so the normal symbol winning judgment value temporarily set in the hit flag storage area (normal). (No symbol winning) is stored (step S922). Further, the normal symbol winning determination value is also stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S924). That is, at the time of outliers, the outliers "0" (no ordinary symbol winning) are set in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area, respectively.

On the other hand, when the comparison value is equal to or greater than the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “no”), the main control program further determines whether or not the comparison value is larger than the hit determination upper limit value (step). S908). If the comparison value is larger than the hit judgment upper limit value (the result of step S908 is "yes"), it is judged that the comparison value is out of order as in the case of not winning the general drawing lottery, and the hit flag area and the normal symbol type area Set each outlier value of "0". As in the case of the special figure, if the hit judgment random number is originally equal to or higher than the hit judgment lower limit value, it may be judged as a hit, but due to the influence of noise or the like, the upper limit value is set for the hit judgment random number. It is also compared with the upper limit value in order to deal with the malfunction that the exceeded value is set.

When the comparison value is equal to or less than the hit judgment upper limit value (the result of step S908 is "no"), the main control program determines that the normal symbol lottery has been won, and sets the normal symbol winning judgment value as the normal symbol winning ("" 1 ”) is set (step S910). Then, the normal symbol winning determination value (normal symbol winning) is stored in the hit flag storage area (step S912).

Subsequently, the main control program sets the normal symbol determination data 1 as the search data (step S914). Further, a random number for a winning symbol is set as a comparison value (step S916), and the variation information number search process is executed (step S918). The normal symbol determination data 1 is searched based on the value of the hit symbol random number buffer by the fluctuation information number search process, the hit symbol type is determined, and the determined hit symbol type is stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S920).

As described above, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the determination result is stored in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area. Then, by setting in advance different areas for the pre-reading time and the fluctuating time in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area, it is possible to share the processing between the pre-reading time and the fluctuating time. Specifically, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts, the hit flag area is set in the hit flag storage area, and the normal symbol type area is set in the normal symbol type storage area. On the other hand, at the time of pre-reading, the hit flag buffer is set in the hit flag storage area, and the normal symbol type area buffer is set in the normal symbol type storage area. With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the special lottery, it is possible to standardize the processing of the normal lottery at the time of pre-reading and at the time of the start of fluctuation.

The main processes related to the special lottery and the ordinary lottery executed on the main control board 4100 have been described above. The program for executing the game control in the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of modules. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a module configuration of the main control program according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 shows excerpts of some modules of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process.

The control program in the gaming machine of the present embodiment is divided into modules for each function. General-purpose modules are commonly used in each process. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the command buffer setting process executed when a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 includes a start port winning process of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. Not only is it used in special symbol change waiting processing, but it is also configured to be used in ordinary symbol look-ahead processing of ordinary symbols and ordinary electric accessory control processing. With this configuration, it is possible to use common modules, buffers, etc. when creating commands regardless of the type of command, and it is possible to effectively use the resources of the game machine.

Further, a process of searching data (variation information number) from a predetermined table (variation information number search process) can also be commonly used. This is realized by standardizing the structure of the table to be searched and specifying the search range and search parameters. By standardizing and configuring modules in this way, it is possible to improve program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

Further, the command buffer setting process and the variation information number search process share modules with relatively few procedures, but in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when pre-reading the process such as the jackpot determination of the special symbol ( It is common at the start winning) and at the start of fluctuation.

More specifically, as described above, the special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27), the special symbol determination process (FIG. 28), and the special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (FIG. 28) at the time of look-ahead (memory look-ahead processing) and the start of fluctuation (special symbol change waiting process) The variation pattern selection determination process (FIGS. 29 and 30) and the variation type determination process (FIG. 31) are commonly used. In these processes, it is configured to refer to the value stored in the specified address, and by specifying the reference address before executing the process, it is stored in different areas at the time of look-ahead and at the start of fluctuation. It is possible to execute the process based on the value. Moreover, not only the value but also the reference destination of the table may be specified. For example, if it is applied to a process of referencing a different table according to the game state, it can be a common process regardless of the game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol hit determination process for determining the hit of the normal lottery is standardized also in the process related to the normal symbol. In the normal symbol hit judgment process, the hit flag indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is acquired from the hit flag storage area and processed, but when it is executed from the normal symbol look-ahead judgment process, the address of the hit flag buffer is referred to. It is set as an address, but when it is normally executed from the symbol change waiting process, the address of the hit flag area is set as the reference address.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to standardize the modules having a relatively large amount of processing as described above, and improve the program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

[10. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 44 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, and here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 42. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 performs a power-on processing of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. 42. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU4150a itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU4150a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the interrupt enable is set, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, in the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by having the sound source built-in VDP4160a write, for example, "0" to the storage area of the built-in VRAM.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 has the effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cc. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), is copied back to Bank 0 (1 ms) to make a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a discrepancy), the value 0 is forcibly written to each of the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), to make a cold start.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is also compared with the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. At the same time, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 12). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 13) to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e (see FIG. 12) so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. There is.

Further, in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in this power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 when the power supply is started by the power control unit (initial contact sensitivity adjusting means). ). Specifically, first, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481 stores a contact determination threshold value as a capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state. The touch panel controller 481 sets the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a to a predetermined initial value of the contact determination threshold value (hereinafter, “initial contact”) when the power supply is started by the power supply control unit. It is updated with the "judgment threshold").

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, in a range of 100% to 70% in 5% increments. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, which is set, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness to turn on. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP4160a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU4150a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 4150caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is connected to the game board 4. A state in which the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided is created and set by the lamp data creation process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored in the start address of the transmission data storage area 4150caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca is sent byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 is created on the 4150cab by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of the 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is stored in byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. Then, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13, the rotation direction and pressing operation of the dial operation unit 401. The presence or absence of operation of the unit 405 is monitored, and whether or not the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation state of the pressing operation unit 405 are reflected in the game effect is appropriately determined.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP4160a displays the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP4160a in the display data creation process described later from the channels CH1 and 2 on the liquid crystal display on the game board side. Output to the device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal. The output to the display device 244 is canceled. As a result, delay in processing time can be prevented, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 4 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012, and The speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker shown in FIG. 2 are produced by a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 and sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to synchronization with the production by music, sound effects, etc. that match various productions from the speaker provided on the door frame 5.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP4160a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music and sound effects that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5, as well as notification sounds and notification sounds. It is played back in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, the number of screen data from the first screen data is sent to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which aspect to use.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in the time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage is started. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data is to be output. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) described later (command analysis means). ). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols (0 to 4). Normal symbol memory command for identifying, symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, every time a game ball is accepted in the grand prize opening 2103 With the large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output to, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it exists (command analysis means) and recognizes which game state it is currently in. Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door frame open command, or the door frame close. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13, and are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cc. The various commands are classified into the various commands shown in FIG. 15, which are classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and the power-on. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to the notification display shown in FIG. 16, and the door frame opening command described above. , Door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to testing, and various commands that are classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In the warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 16, various abnormalities occur. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing notification, are displayed around the peripheral control unit 4150. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c at 4150cae. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in the warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) are classified into the state display shown in FIG. For example, in the case of an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side liquid crystal display device. 1900 (directing device), upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (directing device), lamp (directing device) to visually warn the outside, or a pair of side speakers (directing device) to audibly external (Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 even though the player is in the gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 4100, which may affect the progress of the game, are suppressed.

Next, following the process of step S1024, the effect control program performs the RTC acquisition information update process (step S1025). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RTC acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1025, the effect control program performs the effect control process (step S1026). In the effect control process, the effect control program instructs the execution of the process based on the progress state of the effect being executed. For example, when the demo screen is displayed while the variable display game is not executed, or when a command for the special figure synchronization effect is received, the progress of the special figure synchronization effect is controlled. In addition, a big hit game effect or the like is executed based on the result of the variable display game. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027). In the special figure look-ahead effect control process, the effect control program sets at the start of execution of the special figure look-ahead effect. The details of the special figure look-ahead effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

Following step S1027, the effect control program performs the normal map look-ahead effect control process (step S1028). In the normal figure look-ahead effect control process, the effect control program controls the setting and progress of the normal figure look-ahead effect at the start of execution. The details of the normal figure look-ahead effect control process will be described later in FIG.

Following step S1027, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and among the light emission data arranged in the time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, the light emission indicated by the pointer. Peripheral control unit 4150 provides game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 based on the data. It is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Various controls of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150 for the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided. It is extracted from the data copy area 4150ce, created, and set in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, so that the effect control program is arranged in the peripheral control MPU4150a in chronological order as data constituting the screen generation schedule data. Of the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a extracts at least character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and sprites from the extracted at least character data. Data is created, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated on the built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

By the way, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the player's interest is hard to be exhausted by displaying an image composed of a large number of material images superimposed on the background image in each frame according to the progress of the game. Although it is required to execute display control to include a larger number of material images in each frame in order to display a wider variety of images, including a large number of material images in each frame is displayed at first glance. It seems that control is a heavy burden.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying the display control of the frame including a large number of material images and reducing the processing load, the effect control program is applied to each frame displayed based on the drawing data and to each frame. While managing the correspondence information in which the correspondence with a plurality of material images that can be represented is defined in advance, when trying to display a predetermined frame among the frames, the correspondence information is referred to and the predetermined frame is referred to. At least a predetermined material image to be included in the frame is specified, and drawing data is generated without including the above-mentioned predetermined material image in the sound source built-in VDP4160a and other material images excluding the predetermined material image. It is stored in the built-in VRAM (frame buffer), and the predetermined frame based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

First, in the present embodiment, of the large number of background image data used for displaying a large number of background images constituting each frame, at least a part of the background image data (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific background image data”) is At least a material image such as a sprite (hereinafter, also referred to as "specific sprite") on a background image based on this specific background image data is visually recognized at a position where it should be originally arranged (hereinafter, "original arrangement position"). It is managed as follows so that it is represented by a display mode that cannot be displayed (hereinafter referred to as "confidential state").

First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control ROM 4150b stores the following correspondence relation table (correspondence relation information management means), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a, and the like are associated with this correspondence relation. Browse the table. In this correspondence association table, the correspondence between each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP4160a and at least sprites that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups). Predefined correspondence relationship information is managed together with a concealment release command (concealment release command) for releasing the visual concealment state of at least the sprite. In this correspondence association table, each sprite (or each background image) can be identified by using the sprite number, and as a part of the correspondence relation information, the coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame. The value is managed.

In this correspondence association table, such correspondence information includes, for example, at least a material image such as a sprite that can be displayed in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP4160a. The correspondence with at least the concealment release command that releases the visual concealment state of the material image is defined in advance. In the following description, the at least material image is referred to as a "desired sprite".

As described above, the peripheral control MPU4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP4160a to generate drawing data from sprite data based on the scheduler data (drawing management means). When the effect control program attempts to display a predetermined frame according to the result of a predetermined effect lottery executed when the start condition is satisfied, the effect control program controls the peripheral control MPU4150a to control the correspondence relationship of the association table. With reference to the information, a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame is specified (material image specifying means).

Further, the effect control program identifies the concealment release command corresponding to the desired sprite by referring to the correspondence information in the correspondence association table when the desired sprite should be represented in a predetermined frame according to the schedule data. The specified confidentiality release command is output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a (confidentiality release instruction means). This concealment release command includes a sprite number (hereinafter referred to as "desired sprite number") capable of identifying a desired sprite whose concealment state should be released in the predetermined frame. By outputting such a concealment release command, the display status flag of the name tag information, which was initially off, is updated to on. This name tag information and its display state flag are prepared for each sprite that can be displayed in each frame, and are referred to when the sound source built-in VDP4160a executes the drawing process.

Here, the effect control program operates the sound source built-in VDP4160a (drawing control means) as follows when trying to display a predetermined frame by controlling the peripheral control MPU4150a. That is, when the sound source built-in VDP4160a does not receive the concealment release command, the display mode keeps the desired sprites that can be included in the predetermined frame in the concealed state based on the correspondence information in the correspondence association table. Generate drawing data in the frame buffer. Thereby, the effect control program can display the frame in the mode in which the desired sprite cannot be visually recognized on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

On the other hand, when the VDP4160a with built-in sound source receives the above-mentioned secret release command, the display status flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included in the secret release command is updated to ON. As an opportunity, the desired sprite corresponding to the concealment release command is specified by referring to the correspondence information in the correspondence association table. Further, the sound source built-in VDP4160a generates drawing data in the frame buffer for releasing the concealment state of the specified desired sprite and setting the display mode so that the desired sprite can be visually recognized. Thereby, the effect control program can display the frame of the display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

In this way, the effect control program does not have to finely manage which sprite group can be displayed in each frame when displaying the frame group of a certain scene due to the existence of the correspondence association table. On the other hand, it is desirable to have the sound source built-in VDP4160a draw a frame representing each desired sprite by controlling whether or not the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a concealment release command, which is much simpler than the conventional display control. You can draw a frame that does not represent the sprite of. As a result, it is possible to simplify the display control of the frame including a large number of sprites and reduce the processing load.

Moreover, since the above-mentioned correspondence relationship association table is used to link the sprite group including the desired sprite and the effect control program (the concealment release command group issued by) to manage the correspondence relationship. , The sprite data creation work and the production control program design work can be completely separated from each other, and the design work related to display control can be simplified.

By the way, as described above, many detection devices that can be mounted on pachinko gaming machines generally have their sensitivity adjusted as an initial process when the power is turned on, and then operate at that sensitivity. Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial process in this way, it is possible that the sensitivity will gradually become unsuitable at first glance depending on the subsequent gaming environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in this display data creation process, the effect control program further controls the peripheral control MPU4150a to connect the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) to the touch panel 246 (contact type input means). A function that causes the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 while outputting the above-mentioned effect command (effect execution command) that executes a display operation in a mode that encourages contact with the operation surface. Outputs a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) that enables (contact sensitivity adjustment means) and (command output means). That is, the effect control program is a screen (to the operation surface of the contact type input means) in which the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is urged to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 as an effect command (effect execution command). A command for executing the display operation of (a mode for prompting contact) is written in the transmission information storage area, and then output to the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting command means). Next, when the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 receives the command, the effect control program (display control program by control) touches the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) with a finger based on the command. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 displays a screen in which the user is urged to touch.

Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel processing, the effect control program mainly detects the contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on the contact detection signal as the detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU4150a. (Contact state detection means). That is, this effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detecting means) for detecting a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. This effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by this coordinate value as a detection point (detection point acquisition means), and then The operation information including this initial position is acquired. It should be noted that this effect control program may not only acquire such coordinate values but also acquire the range of the operation surface (hereinafter referred to as the contact range).

In this touch panel processing, in order to deal with the above-mentioned concerns, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU4150a, separately from the above-mentioned effect command (effect execution command), and then to the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored contact determination threshold value is written in the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) (sensitivity adjustment). Command means).

Specifically, the effect control program executes the special figure 1 synchronized effect end command (see FIG. 15) when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) elapses from the main control MPU 4100a at the predetermined timing described above. ) Has passed since the last time (for example, 1 minute) has passed, or when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has elapsed, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command (figure). When a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the last reception (see 15), the above-mentioned threshold setting command is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a.

The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and when the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold value setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU4150a as an example outside the touch panel module 246a, the touch panel 246 is contacted. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. That is, this effect control program receives a threshold value setting command from the peripheral control MPU4150a to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a, and based on this threshold value setting command, the contact determination stored in the control register 481a. The contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the threshold value. Specifically, the touch panel controller 481 acquires a capacitance based on a detection signal output by the touch panel sensor 482 when receiving this threshold value setting command, and uses this capacitance as the contact surface of the touch panel 246. Is considered to be a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

Then, after that, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new contact determination threshold value updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired each time the contact state is detected as described above. If it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, it is determined that the contact surface is in a non-contact state, while if it is determined that this detected capacitance is greater than or equal to the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

Similarly to the above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs the contact detection information including the detection coordinate values on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the contact detection information, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detection coordinate values included in the received contact detection information.

As described above, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is increased at a desired timing when the touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold value setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the threshold value for contact determination to be determined is updated, if the output timing of the threshold value setting command by the peripheral control MPU4150a is appropriately controlled, the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing. Becomes (calibration). Therefore, the effect control program removes the output timing that may affect the game by the player and causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold value setting command, so that the touch panel 246 is always used without affecting the game. The detection of the contact state can be set as an appropriate operation mode.

As described above, the timing at which the effect control program should output the threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU4150a is, for example, the special figure 1 synchronized effect end command output when the variation display of the special symbol ends. Alternatively, it is unlikely that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has passed since receiving the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the player has stopped the game, so that the touch panel 246 is in contact with the operation surface. The timing can be exemplified. That is, such adjustment of the contact sensitivity should be performed as much as possible during the variable display of the special symbol that may execute the effect using the touch panel 246, and should be performed when the variable display is completed. There is.

In addition, as the timing at which the threshold value setting command should be output, the effect control program sends a command at the end of the normal symbol synchronization effect (see FIG. 15) transmitted from the main control MPU4100a when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. It may be the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the receipt.

On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is a capacitance type and is provided on the upper plate 301 which can store a large number of game balls and easily generates static electricity, but it is necessary even after the power is turned on. Since the sensitivity is adjusted at a predetermined timing accordingly, it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such a change in the surrounding environment and is not operated by the player. It becomes difficult to do.

Following step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data, the sound indicated by the pointer. The command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 13 is activated to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volumes 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set so as to increase toward the volume 6. The LCD and the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source of the sound control unit 4160 are controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is serialized in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects can be played from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, and the sound source of the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 is programmed to set the volume from mute to the maximum volume. The built-in VDP4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 can be used. Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from the provided speakers are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko game machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating (maximum in this embodiment). The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 into the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, which are included in the target Bank0 (1fr), And the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150 kb, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) in the first area 4150 kb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank0 (1fr). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150 kb up to the contents stored in the terminal address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ) From the content stored in the start address to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 4150cc is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from, and peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is a requirement factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac Bank0
The contents stored in (1fr) are backed up in Bank 4 of the second area 4150 cc.
A copy to (1fr) is specified, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously displayed by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). All copies are made in order from the start address of Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc.

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d becomes a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is set in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db as the production backup information (SRAM) by using the effect information (SRAM) stored in the Bank0 (SRAM). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150 dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the first area 4150db, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM), Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) up to the contents stored in the terminal address of the backup first area 4150db in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM).

Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc, and specifies Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously backed up from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 4150dc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

The peripheral control unit steady-state processing starts from the effect control program first setting a value 1 in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1009, and interrupts 1 ms in step S1010. The timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. Once set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 can be accepted was input from the liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 18 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 42 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 42. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 42 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 42. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether it is completed or not. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 42. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing failure this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 42 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, in the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12, the effect control program controls the peripheral control MPU4150a, and as shown in FIG. 42, the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN. Is less than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program directly performs this routine. To finish. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. When the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, they are arranged in a time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program sets the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c is input. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series, the drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 12 is based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is created, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The frame is set in the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the motor on the board side of the decorative drive amplifier. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 4150 caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 buffer is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O ports for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c. Of the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, drive to motors and solenoids to move various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a signal is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripherals shown in FIG. The control RAM 4150c is set in the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, dial operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Set to 4150 kai. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation presence / absence of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired.

Following step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110), subsequently performs a backup process (step S1112), and ends this routine. In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c, every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13, that is, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is performed. Each time it is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms). The effect information (1 ms) stored in the 4150 cah and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cc. The control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cc, and Bank0 (1ms) from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ), The contents stored in the terminal address of) are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150 kb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc, and specifies Bank0 (1ms). ) From the content stored in the start address to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1ms), the start address of Bank3 (1ms) in the second area 4150cc is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from, and peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is a requirement factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac Bank0
The contents stored in (1 ms) are backed up in Bank 4 of the second area 4150 cc.
A copy to (1 ms) is specified, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously divided by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 ms). All copies are made in order from the start address of Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 4150 cc.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 42, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, the progress state of the production can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Even in the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 4100 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte and the total. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received, the periphery The 1-byte information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU4150a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main frequency serial data, the mode is still the second byte of the main frequency serial data, and the third byte of the main frequency serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are supplied from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 4150 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main peripheral serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the above and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 13, and the reception command storage area 4150cc of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and the routine ends. This reception command storage area 4150cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU4150a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216 and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the specified mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received has been exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[10-5. Fluctuation pattern]
Subsequently, the production in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table in the present embodiment. The variation pattern table is a table that manages the pattern (variation pattern) of the special symbol synchronization effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the variation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100. The control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) and the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) are stored in each. The special figure synchronization effect includes an effect such that the peripheral control board 4140 causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side to display a decorative pattern in a variable manner or a character is displayed in accordance with the variable display game. Further, it may include an effect such as operating a movable accessory during the variable display of the decorative pattern, causing a light emitter such as a lamp to emit light, or outputting sound from a speaker. The effects corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of the present embodiment include story reach, pseudo-ream effects (pseudo-ream), and the like. In addition, a fluctuation pattern that spans a plurality of fluctuation display games may be defined.

The story reach is an effect in which the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, and a specific effect is executed one or more times according to the expectation level (possibility of becoming a big hit) of the variable display game being executed. In the present embodiment, the higher the number of times the specific effect is executed, the higher the expectation of the big hit. The specific effect may be executed before the reach occurs, or may be executed only after the reach occurs. In addition, the production mode of the specific production includes, for example, screen display (cut-in) such as the appearance of a character, dialogue (screen display, voice output), operation of a movable accessory, and type of production such as light emission of a lamp. .. In addition, a plurality of different production modes may be defined according to the degree of expectation for the same type of production.

In the pseudo-continuous production, the variable display of the decorative symbol (identification symbol) is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the one-time variable display of the special symbol, and then the decorative symbol is re-variated, so that the special symbol is actually displayed. It is an effect that makes it look as if the variable display was performed multiple times even though the variable display was performed only once. The change and stop of the symbol in the present embodiment usually stops in the order of left, right, and middle after the change of the three decorative symbols of left, middle, and right is started. The production of the pseudo-continuous production (hereinafter, this production may be referred to as "pseudo-continuous production") is "the change of the three decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right starts → stops in the order of left and right in a non-reach manner. A series of effects derived in the order of "the last stopped middle symbol stops at a special symbol" is displayed during one variable display of the special symbol (until the result of one special lottery is derived). It is a production to be performed. In the present embodiment, the series of effects related to the pseudo-ream effect is performed using the time added to the fluctuation time, and the number of times the series of effects related to the pseudo-ream is performed (one variation display of the special symbol). The more the number of times the three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped), the higher the expectation of a big hit. Further, the pseudo-continuous production in which the series of productions related to the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous production is repeated four times is a jackpot confirmed production. Further, when executing the pseudo continuous effect, the effect may be executed such that a character appears when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, or the effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, when reach occurs in the final variation of the pseudo-continuous production, the type of reach in the final variation may be defined together.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned special symbol may be a symbol that exists in the middle symbol from the normal time, or may be a symbol that does not normally exist in the middle symbol but appears when a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Good.

As described above, in this example, the same effect as the pseudo-continuous effect (special pseudo-continuous effect) is executed over the variable display of the special symbol a plurality of times. Specifically, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative design are M.
(In this example, M = 3 to 5) Of the pseudo-ream effects ("pseudo-ream 2 to pseudo-ream 4") executed times, the same as the effect until the decorative symbol is first temporarily stopped (until the first temporary stop). Is executed during the variation display of the special symbol executed in response to one start prize, and then the variation display of the special symbol executed in response to the one start prize generated after this start prize. Same as the effect from the first re-variation to the final stop (from the first re-variation to the final stop) of the pseudo-continuous production that temporarily stops and re-variates the decorative symbol M times. The production of is executed.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 47, in the variation pattern table of this example, a special effect (pattern 12 in this example) similar to that of "pseudo-ream 2" is executed over the variation display of the special symbol twice. The variation pattern of the "previous special pseudo-ream 2", which is a pseudo-ream effect and the effect until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time, and the "pseudo-ream 2" over the variation display of the two special symbols. A variation pattern of "post-special pseudo-ream 2", which is a special pseudo-ream effect that executes the same effect (pattern 12 in this example), and an effect from the first re-variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop is executed. And, it is a special pseudo-ream effect that executes the same effect as "pseudo-ream 3" (pattern 13 in this example) over the two variable displays of the special symbol, and is an effect until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time. The special pseudo-ream effect that executes the same effect as "pseudo-ream 3" (pattern 13 in this example) over the variation pattern of the "previous special pseudo-ream 3" in which is executed and the variation display of the special symbol twice. However, the variation pattern of the "post-special pseudo-ren 3" in which the effect from the first re-variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop is executed, and the "pseudo-ren 4" over the variation display of the two special symbols. This is a special pseudo-ream effect that executes the same effect (pattern 13 in this example), and the variation pattern of "pre-special pseudo-ream 4" that executes the effect until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time. It is a special pseudo-ream effect that executes the same effect as "pseudo-ream 4" (pattern 13 in this example) over the variable display of the special symbol of the times, from the first re-variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop. The variation pattern of the "post-special pseudo-ream 4" in which the effect of is executed is prepared, and the number of times the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variation display of the decorative symbol executed over the two variation displays of the special symbol is It is set so that the higher the number, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo-ren 2 (pre-special pseudo-ren 2 and rear special pseudo-ren 2)", the winning information is "missing" and the re-lottery is "missing" as in the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ren 2". The fluctuation pattern of "No" and the fluctuation pattern of "Big hit" with winning information of "4 rounds or 16 rounds" and "Yes" for re-lottery are included, and "Special pseudo-ren 3 (previous special pseudo-ren 3)" And later special pseudo-ren 3) ”variation pattern is the same as the fluctuation pattern of“ pseudo-ren 3 ”, the winning information is“ big hit ”of“ 4 rounds or 16 rounds ”and the re-lottery is“ yes ”. In addition, the fluctuation pattern in which the winning information is "missing" and the re-lottery is "none" is also included, and the fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo-ren 4 (pre-special pseudo-ren 4 and rear special pseudo-ren 4)" is " Similar to the fluctuation pattern of "Pseudo-ren 4", the winning information is "Big hit" of "16 rounds" and the re-lottery is "Yes". In addition, the winning information is "Big hit" of "4 rounds". A fluctuation pattern in which the re-lottery is "Yes" is also included.

As described above, in the special pseudo-ream effect of this example, the number of times that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed during the second variable display of the special symbol is "special pseudo-ream 4 (previous special pseudo-ream 4). And the rear special pseudo-ream 4) ", followed by" special pseudo-ream 3 (pre-special pseudo-ream 3 and rear special pseudo-ream 3) "and" special pseudo-ream 2 (pre-special pseudo-ream 2 and rear special pseudo-ream 3) ". 2) ”is the least. In addition, in proportion to the number of times the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in response to the second variable display of the special symbol, the expectation of the jackpot is also "Special pseudo-ren 4 (previous special pseudo-ren 4). 4 and rear special pseudo-ream 4) ">" special pseudo-ream 3 (pre-special pseudo-ream 3 and rear special pseudo-ream 3) ">" special pseudo-ream 2 (pre-special pseudo-ream 2 and rear special pseudo-ream 2) " It is in order.

In addition, the special pseudo-continuous effect that is executed over the variable display of the special symbol multiple times is the pseudo-continuous effect that is normally executed during the variable display of one special symbol, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed multiple times. Since each of them is distributed and executed, the special pseudo-continuous production and the pseudo-continuous production are related to the degree of expectation of a big hit. Specifically, the special pseudo-ream effect and the pseudo-ream effect are equivalent when the number of times the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is the same (they may be exactly the same, or they may not be exactly the same, but they may be substantially the same. ) Is the expected degree of jackpot. In this way, in this example, by executing the special pseudo-continuous effect over a plurality of times of the variable display of the special symbol, the expectation of the jackpot equivalent to that of the pseudo-continuous effect is notified, and the special symbol is displayed once. The fluctuation time of hit can be shortened.

In this example, as a special pseudo-continuous effect, the same effect as the pseudo-continuous effect is executed across (over) two variable displays of the special symbol, but it straddles the multiple variable displays of the special symbol. The number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed is not limited to two as long as the same effect as the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In other words, it is a pseudo-continuous effect that temporarily stops and re-variates the decorative symbol M (in this example, M = 3 to 5) times over the variation display of the special symbol P times (P> 1). Anything that performs the same effect will do.

In this case, if the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are executed M (M = 3 to 5 in this example) during the P-time variation display of the special symbol, it is synchronized with the variation display of the special symbol (for example, special). Even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing when the symbol is fixedly stopped, or the decorative symbol is re-variated at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started), the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped and re-variated. Alternatively, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped only once in each of the P-time variable display of the special symbol (the number of variable displays of the special symbol and the number of variable displays of the decorative symbol are matched (decorative symbol). The number of variable displays of the special symbol = the number of variable displays of the special symbol) (the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped only once in all of the multiple variable displays of the special symbol), and the number of variable displays of the special symbol The number of variable display of the decorative symbol is different (the number of variable display of the decorative symbol ≠ the number of variable display of the special symbol), and the decorative symbol is displayed only once in some of the multiple variable displays of the special symbol. It may be temporarily stopped) or may be temporarily stopped multiple times (the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped multiple times in a part or all of the multiple variable displays of the special symbol).

Further, in this example, as a special pseudo-continuous effect, the same effect as the pseudo-continuous effect (the same effect pattern) is performed, but the effect is not limited to the same, and the player can perform the pseudo-continuous effect. As long as it is executed over multiple times of variable display of special symbols in a manner that can be recognized as being or is similar to the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous effect and part or all of the pseudo-continuous effect are You may try to perform different effects. For example, as a special pseudo-ream effect, during the first variation display of a special symbol, a pseudo-ream effect (“pseudo-ream 2-”) in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variated M (M = 3 to 5 in this example) times. Of the "pseudo-ream 4"), the movable body (movable accessory) is operated (pseudo-ream effect is executed) instead of the same effect as the effect until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time (until the first temporary stop). Of the pseudo-ream effects in which the display indicating that the symbol is displayed (for example, "pseudo-ream twice") is performed, and the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variated M times during the second variation display of the special symbol. The same effect as the effect from the first re-variation to the final stop (from the first re-variation to the final stop) may be executed, or the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side may be used. While the display content of the effect to be executed is different from that of the pseudo-continuous effect, the operation mode of the movable body (movable accessory) and the output mode of the effect sound output from the speaker 130 are the same as those of the pseudo-continuous effect. By doing so, the player may be made to recognize that the production is similar to the pseudo continuous production. As a result, for example, the special pseudo-continuous effect is executed by shortening the fluctuation time, etc., and the same effect as the pseudo-continuous effect is executed within the variation time of any of the variation display of a plurality of special symbols. Even if it cannot be done, it can be recognized as a pseudo continuous effect by the effect executed within the shortened fluctuation time. That is, it is possible to reliably execute the special pseudo-continuous production without being affected by the length of the fluctuation time.

The fluctuation pattern is a combination of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The value (effect pattern) set in the mode (referred to as "special figure fluctuation pattern command") and the special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 2 symbol type command (hereinafter, special figure 1 symbol type command and special figure 2 symbol). It is selected based on the value (result of the variable display game) set in the mode (referred to as the "special symbol type command" together with the type command). Further, one variation pattern may correspond to the combination of the special figure 1 (2) variation pattern command and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, or a plurality of variation patterns may correspond to each other. When a plurality of fluctuation patterns correspond to each other, a random number value may be acquired and selected by lottery, or may be selected based on a predetermined condition such as a gaming state.

The variation pattern table includes items such as variation pattern name, winning information, variation time, number of effect insertions (number of scenarios), effect selection pattern, and re-lottery. The "variation pattern name" is a name that identifies the variation pattern. The "winning information" is the result of the variable display game to be executed, and corresponds to the value set in the mode of the special figure 1 symbol type command or the special figure 2 symbol type command. In addition, instead of the "winning information", a gaming state (for example, a "normal state", a "probability change state", and a "time saving state") may be used.

The "variable time" corresponds to the variable time (execution time of the variable display game) in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed. Further, the fluctuation time may be changed according to the number of start-up memories. For example, when the number of start memories is large (for example, the number of start memories is 3 or more), the fluctuation time may be shortened. It is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol (identification symbol) in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180. The same applies even when the fluctuation time is shortened.

The "number of inserted effects" is the number of times a specific effect is executed during variable display in story reach, or the number of times a special symbol is temporarily stopped (regardless of whether or not the effect is executed at the time of temporary stop) in a pseudo-continuous effect. Is. The “effect selection pattern” is definition information for selecting a specific effect candidate to be executed in story reach, or selecting an effect to be executed at the time of temporary stop in a pseudo continuous effect. In the present embodiment, the effect selection pattern is set so that the higher the reliability variation pattern is selected, the easier it is to select the highly reliable specific effect. A specific example of the “effect selection pattern” will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

The "re-lottery" is information that defines whether or not to execute the process of re-lottering the stopped special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is completed. In the present embodiment, the "re-lottery" is executed when the result of the variable display game is a special result (for example, a big hit).

[10-6. Received command analysis process]
Subsequently, the received command analysis process (process of step S1022 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the received command analysis process of the present embodiment.

In the reception command analysis process, when the effect control program is executed on the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU4150a), first, whether or not the command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. (Step S1401).

When the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment receives a command from the main control board 4100, it generates a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (FIG. 45), and in this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, the main control board 4100 Various commands from are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided on the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control unit reception ring buffer is provided with a plurality of areas, and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are stored in the order in which they are received.

When the command is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (the result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the effect control program receives the command from the main control board 4100 in the earliest reception order in the peripheral control unit reception ring. Read from the buffer (step S1402).

Next, the effect control program determines whether or not the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (special figure 1 variation pattern command or special figure 2 variation pattern command, FIG. 15) (step S1403). ). When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation pattern command is used (the result of step S1403 is "Yes"), the special figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the movement is changed. The pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis process ends.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the read command is not the special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is "No"), the read command is the special symbol symbol type command (special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 1). FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the symbol type command is a winning information command indicating “missing”, “specific jackpot”, and “non-specific jackpot” (FIG. 15) (step S1405). When it is determined that the command is a special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is "Yes"), the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1406), and the receiving command is received. End the analysis process.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the read effect command is not a special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is "No"), the read command is a command for instructing the special symbol look-ahead effect (special symbol 1 hold). It is determined whether or not the command is a number designation command or a special symbol 2 hold number designation command (with look-ahead), FIG. 16) (step S1407). The special symbol look-ahead effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of special symbol 1 operation hold balls (the number of special symbol 2 operation hold balls) increases. As will be described later, when the read effect command is a command for instructing the special figure look-ahead effect, the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag indicating the execution of the special figure look-ahead effect is set. Therefore, the determination of "Yes" in the process of step S1407 described above is limited to the case where the read effect command is the special symbol 1 (2) hold number designation command of "pre-reading". If the command is a special symbol 1 (2) hold number specification command of "no look-ahead", the judgment is "No". As a special figure look-ahead effect command to be determined in the process of step S1407, a command for instructing a special figure look-ahead effect other than the special symbol 1 (2) hold number designation command (symbol type look-ahead, variable pattern look-ahead, variable type look-ahead). If all of these commands for instructing the special figure look-ahead effect are received, the determination of "Yes" may be performed.

Further, when the read effect command is a special figure look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1407 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU4150a sets the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag (step S1408), and receives command analysis processing. To finish. When the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set, whether or not to execute the special figure look-ahead effect is determined in the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the special figure look-ahead effect is executed. Make the necessary settings to execute the production. It should be noted that the main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the special figure look-ahead effect.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the read effect command is not the special figure look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1408 is "No"), the read command is the normal figure look-ahead effect command (normal symbol type look-ahead command, FIG. 16). ) (Step S1409). The normal symbol look-ahead effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of normally symbol operation holding balls increases. In addition, the Fuzu pre-reading effect command includes information corresponding to the result of the Fuzu lottery. When the normal figure look-ahead effect command is received, the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag that instructs the start of the normal symbol type look-ahead effect (normal figure look-ahead effect) is set. When the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set, whether or not the normal figure look-ahead effect can be executed is determined in the normal figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1028 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the normal figure look-ahead effect is executed. Make the necessary settings to execute the production. It should be noted that the main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the normal drawing look-ahead effect. In addition, in the case of a model that does not execute the normal map look-ahead effect, the received command is discarded.

On the other hand, when the read effect command is not a normal map look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1409 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU4150a executes processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received command (step). S1411), the received command analysis process is terminated.

As described in FIGS. 15 and 16, the command received from the main control board 4100 includes, for example, a special figure synchronization effect end command (special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or a special figure 1 synchronization effect end command) for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production end command) or when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the variable time state specification command that specifies the game state (probability change state, time saving state, normal game state) after the big hit game ends included. When the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, the synchronization effect end flag is set. Further, depending on the result of the variable display game, a jackpot opening command for instructing the execution of the effect at the start of the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command for instructing the execution of the effect at the end of the jackpot game, and the like are included.

Further, when a game ball wins in the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102, a start port winning command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to notify the start port that the game ball has won a prize. The start of (for example, audio output) is instructed. In addition, when the number of balls on hold for special symbol 1 operation changes due to the winning of a game ball to the upper start port 2101 or the start of the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185, the special symbol 1 storage command is mainly controlled. Received from board 4100. Similarly, when the number of balls on hold for special symbol 2 operation changes due to the winning of a game ball to the lower start port 2102 or the start of the variable display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186, the special symbol 2 storage command is mainly used. Received from the control board 4100.

Further, the special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol 2 storage command) includes the number of special symbol 1 operation hold balls (the number of special symbol 2 operation hold balls), and is displayed on the liquid crystal display on the game board side based on the process of step S1107. The display corresponding to the number of balls on hold for special symbol 1 operation (number of balls on hold for operation of special symbol 2) in the device 1900 is set to be updated.

Further, when a notification command for notifying the occurrence of an error other than the production-related command is received, a flag or the like is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1407), and a warning process or the like (step S1024 in FIG. 42) is performed. Execute the process.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned command, when the power supply to the main control board 4100 is cut off, a power cut command is transmitted. The main control board 4100 is supplied with power for a predetermined time from the capacitor (backup power supply) provided on the power supply board 851 even when the power supply from the outside such as the pachinko island facility is stopped. The information stored in the RAM of the control board 4100 can be held, and a command such as a power failure command can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 or the like. Further, when the power supply from the outside is restarted, a power-on command is transmitted. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the power-off command or the power-on command, the peripheral control board 4140 executes a process according to the state. Details of these processes will be described later.

[10-7. Production control processing]
Subsequently, the effect control process (process of step S1026 of FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process of the present embodiment.

The effect control process is one of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500), the decorative symbol variation process (step S1600), and the jackpot display process (step S1700) based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game. Process is selectively performed.

In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is "0", when the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) of the receive command analysis process. In addition, processing is performed to start a special figure synchronization effect including a variable display of a decorative pattern. For example, based on the fluctuation pattern and the winning information of the fluctuation display game, the effect content (stop symbol of decorative symbol, type of reach effect, determination of feasibility of execution of advance notice effect, advance notice effect mode, presence / absence of extension effect, etc.) is determined. Make settings according to the determined production content. In addition, control is performed so that the demo effect is executed when the special figure synchronization effect is not executed. Details of the decorative pattern variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

Further, in the decorative symbol variation processing (step S16000) executed when the processing selection flag is "1", the variation display game is performed on the condition that the special symbol synchronization effect (variation display of the decorative symbol) is started. Controls the special figure synchronization effect that is executed in synchronization. Further, when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, the process for ending the special figure synchronization effect and stopping the confirmation is executed. That is, in the decorative symbol variation processing, the effect control is performed from the start to the end of the special symbol synchronization effect. The details of the decorative pattern variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Further, when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, the effect control program determines and stops the decorative symbol based on the result of the variation display game in order to end the special figure synchronization effect accompanied by the variation display of the decorative symbol. Finally, the effect control program sets the process selection flag based on the result of the variable display game. Specifically, when the result of the variable display game is "big hit", the process selection flag is set to [2], and when the result of the variable display game is "missing", the process selection flag is set to [0]. Set.

In order to continue the special figure synchronization effect until the special figure synchronization effect end condition is satisfied, the effect control program can, for example, switch the scene (image) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side or change the character. Perform productions such as making them appear. Further, the effect that does not depend on the fluctuation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the variation display game to be executed from the next time onward is executed.

Further, in the jackpot display process (step S1700) executed when the process selection flag is "2", the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the jackpot set in the process of step S1407 (see FIG. 48) and the jackpot On the condition that the flag corresponding to the start command is set, the display indicating that the big winning opening 2003 will be opened on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the display during the big hit game state (for example, round display, etc.) ) Is performed respectively. Further, at the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

[10-8. Decorative pattern change start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control program first determines whether or not the variation pattern reception flag set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) is set (step). S1501). That is, in the process of step S1501, the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 49) waits until the variation pattern reception flag is set based on the fact that the predetermined start condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied on the main control board 4100 side. .. Then, until the variation pattern reception flag is set (that is, until the variation display game is started), the control related to the demo effect is executed by the processing from step S1511 to step S1513.

Specifically, if the variation pattern reception flag is not set (the result of step S1501 is "No"), is the effect control program executing the demo effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side? It is determined whether or not (step S1511). Then, when it is determined that the demo effect is not being executed (the result of step S1511 is "No"), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the display effect such as the previous symbol change was completed (). Step S1512). When the predetermined time has elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “Yes”), the demo effect display flag for starting the demo effect is set in the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side (step S1513).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (the result of step S1512 is "No"), the effect control program temporarily ends the decorative symbol variation start process, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. It waits until either the condition (the result of step S1501 is "Yes") or the predetermined time elapses (the result of step S1512 is "Yes") is satisfied.

Further, when it is determined that the effect control program is executing the demo effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side (the result of step S1511 is "Yes"), the effect control program continues the execution of the demo effect as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern reception flag is set (the result of step S1501 is "Yes"), the effect control program clears the variation pattern reception flag (step S1502). Then, based on the received special symbol variation pattern command and special symbol symbol type command, the effect setting process for setting the content of the effect to be executed is executed (step S1503). The details of the effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Finally, the effect control program updates the process selection flag to [1] (step S1504). By controlling in this way, the decorative symbol variation start processing is executed only once at the start of execution of the special symbol synchronization effect.

[10-9. Production setting process]
Subsequently, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is a process for setting the effect content at the start of the special figure synchronization effect. Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the corresponding flag is set and the parameter is set. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process in the present embodiment.

The effect control program first identifies a variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 (step S1520). At this time, the variation is based on the current gaming state (for example, a production mode related only to the production mode such as a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probability variation time reduction state, a normal game state, etc.). You may choose a pattern. Specifically, the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 47 may be provided with an item of the gaming state, and variation patterns having different production modes may be defined for each gaming state.

Then, the effect control program sets the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the specified fluctuation pattern is story reach (step S1521). In the case of story reach (the result of step S1521 is “Yes”), the story reach setting process for setting the data necessary for executing the story reach is executed (step S1530). The details of the story reach setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

On the other hand, when the specified fluctuation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1521 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether or not the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous effect (step S1522). In the case of the pseudo continuous effect (the result of step S1522 is “Yes”), the pseudo continuous effect setting process for setting the data necessary for executing the pseudo continuous effect is executed (step S1550).

On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not a pseudo continuous effect (the result of step S1522 is "No"), the effect control program sets information necessary for executing the effect based on the variation pattern (the result is "No"). Step S1523).

When the setting of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is completed, the continuous look-ahead effect setting process for executing the continuous look-ahead effect in which the effect content can be set independently of the variation pattern is executed (step S1524). In the continuous look-ahead effect setting process, when it is determined in the special figure look-ahead effect control process of step S1027 of FIG. 42 that the continuous look-ahead effect is executed, the progress of the continuous look-ahead effect is controlled based on the determined effect content. To do. The details of the continuous look-ahead effect setting process will be described later.

Finally, the effect control program sets the effect pattern and the stop symbol according to the game state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the music and the sound output from the speaker, and the like are set according to the game state. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is confirmed and displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special symbol synchronization effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

Finally, the effect control program sets the effect pattern and the stop symbol according to the game state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the music and the sound output from the speaker, and the like are set according to the game state. In addition, the effect pattern also includes a notice mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. For example, in order to suggest the result of variable display, a specific character may appear or the background color may be set to a different color than usual. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is confirmed and displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special symbol synchronization effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

When the effect setting process is completed, the information necessary for executing the special figure synchronization effect is set. Then, the lamp data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), the sound data output process (step S1018), the lamp data creation process (step S1028), and the display data of the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). By executing the creation process (step S1030), the sound data creation process (step S1032), and the like, special figure synchronization effects such as variable display of decorative symbols are started.

[10-10. Decorative pattern fluctuation processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1600) executed when the processing selection flag is “1” will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation processing in the present embodiment.

The decorative symbol variation process is executed when the decorative symbol variation start process is executed and the process selection flag is "1". Then, in the decorative symbol variation processing, the special symbol synchronization effect executed in synchronization with the variation display game is controlled on condition that the special symbol synchronization effect (variation display of the decorative symbol) is started.

When the decorative symbol variation processing is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the condition for ending the variation display of the decorative symbol, that is, the end condition of the special symbol synchronization effect is satisfied (step S1601). As the end condition of the special figure synchronization effect, for example, the special figure synchronization effect may be ended when the special figure synchronization effect end command (design confirmation command) is received from the main control board 4100, or the special figure synchronization effect may be ended. The special figure synchronization effect may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. Further, both the reception of the special figure synchronization effect end command and the elapsed time from the start of the special figure synchronization effect may be set as the end condition of the special figure synchronization effect. For example, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure synchronization effect. Even if it is not, when the special symbol synchronization effect end command is received, the variable display may be forcibly terminated and the display screen may be switched so as to confirm and stop the decorative symbol.

When the end condition of the special symbol synchronization effect is satisfied (the result of step S1601 is "Yes"), the effect control program stops (fixed stop) the variable display with the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol symbol type command (fixed stop). Step S1602). Then, the process selection flag is set based on the result of the variable display game (step S1602). Specifically, when the result of the variable display game is "missing", the processing selection flag is set to "0", and when the result is "big hit", the processing selection flag is set to "2". If there is a "small hit", another process selection flag (for example, "3") is set.

On the other hand, in the effect control program, when the end condition of the special figure synchronization effect is not satisfied (the result of step S1601 is "Yes"), that is, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued, first, the variation pattern It is determined whether or not the type is story reach (step S1604). When the type of the variation pattern is story reach (the result of step S1604 is “Y”), the story reach control process for controlling the progress of story reach is executed (step S1610). In the present embodiment, all the scenario effects executed in the story reach are selected at the start of the variable display (story reach setting process), but when each scenario is selected immediately before the scenario effect is executed, the story reach control process is performed. Is selected with. Further, when the progress of the scenario effect is controlled based on the operation of the operation unit 400, the operation status of the operation unit 400 is detected in the story reach control process, and the control according to the operation status is executed. Just do it.

When the type of the variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1604 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether or not the type of the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous effect (step S1605). When the type of the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous effect (the result of step S1604 is "Yes"), a pseudo-continuous effect control process for controlling the progress of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (step S1630). The details of the pseudo continuous effect control process will be described later.

Further, when the type of the variation pattern is not the pseudo-continuous effect (the result of step S1605 is “No”), the effect control program executes the control process of the special figure tuning effect corresponding to the variation pattern such as special reach (the result of step S1605 is “No”). Step S1660). For example, an effect such as switching a scene (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side or making a character appear is executed. Further, the effect that does not depend on the fluctuation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the variation display game to be executed from the next time onward may be executed. When the control of the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is completed, this process ends.

[10-11. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing to be executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the power failure warning signal interrupt process of the peripheral control unit.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300), and then starts a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal). ) Is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and when the power failure warning signal has not been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while the power failure warning is terminated. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU4150a can operate even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. ..

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU4150a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 4150cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 is started. The received command is stored in).

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in the Bank 0 (1fr) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13 are stored in the Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc. And the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is peripheral. As a requirement factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc. Then, a predetermined byte (for example,) from the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr). , 1 byte) in succession Copy everything in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first area 4150 kb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150 kb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in the Bank 0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents are copied continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the second area 4150 cc, and the peripheral control CPU core The contents stored in the receive command storage area 4150 cc included in Bank 0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 a are transferred to the receive command storage area included in Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc. Specify a copy and specify the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All the bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second area 4150 cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af shown in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control external WDT4150e shown in FIG. 12 so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e. Is not output and the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 and the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 42 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU4150a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[11. Story Reach]
Next, a case where story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described. In the game machine of the present embodiment, the special symbol synchronization effect is executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the variation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100. When story reach is selected as the variation pattern, the effect (specific effect) that suggests the degree of expectation of the variation display game being executed at a predetermined timing is executed once or multiple times (insertion) in the special figure synchronization effect. Will be done.

Further, in the effect related to the story reach, the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, but the execution timing of the specific effect may be before the reach effect or after the reach effect. In this embodiment, the specific effect in the story reach is executed after the reach occurs. Hereinafter, the production when story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described.

[11-1. Story reach setting process]
First, the production control in story reach will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the story reach setting process in the present embodiment. The story reach setting process is executed in the process of step S1530 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the story reach setting process shown in FIG. 53, the process related to the setting of the specific effect executed at a predetermined timing is described, and other variation patterns are selected for the setting of the special figure synchronization effect such as the other reach effect. Since it is processed in the same manner as in the case of the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the story reach setting process is executed, the effect control program first acquires the number of effect inserts and the effect selection pattern from the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1531). At this time, the number of effect insertions and the effect selection pattern may be changed according to the game state such as the probability state (probability change state, normal state) of the variable display game and the operating state (time saving state) of the normal electric accessory. Further, the initial value (“0”) is set to the number of selected effects indicating the number of specific effects (counters) set in this process (step S1532). Subsequently, the scenario of the specific effect is selected by the number of inserted effects (steps S1533 to S1539). In the present embodiment, the specific effect to be executed last is sequentially selected, and the specific effect to be executed first is selected last.

The effect control program determines whether or not the number of selected effects is equal to or greater than the number of inserted effects, that is, whether or not scenarios have been selected for all specific effects (step S1533). When the number of selected effects is less than the number of inserted effects (the result of step S1533 is "No"), the specific effect for which the scenario has not been selected remains, so the process for selecting the scenario (steps S1534 to S1538). To execute.

The effect control program acquires a random number value (effect selection information) for selecting a specific effect (step S1534). Then, a specific effect is selected from the effect selection pattern table (FIG. 54) based on the effect selection pattern acquired in the process of step S1531 and the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 (step S1535).

Here, the procedure for selecting a specific effect will be described in more detail. In the effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment, an effect selection pattern is set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 47). FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an effect selection pattern in the story reach of the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when story reach is executed, any specific effect of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is executed, and the expectation that the result of the variable display game is a big hit in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 ( (Possibility) is set to be high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, it is easy to select a scenario having a high degree of expectation in the order of pattern 1 to pattern 3. Specifically, in pattern 1, scenario 5 and scenario 6 having relatively high expectations are set not to be selected, and in pattern 3, scenario 1 and scenario 2 having relatively low expectations are selected. It is set not to be done.

Further, a range of random numbers is set for each scenario, and each scenario is selected based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 of FIG. 53. In addition, instead of setting so that a specific scenario is not selected, all scenarios may be selectable, and the selection rate of each scenario may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random numbers.

Further, the effect selection pattern may be held for each game state. For example, in a high-probability state in which the variable display of the special symbol has a high probability of being won, a scenario with a high degree of expectation may be easily selected to further increase the player's expectation. Further, a plurality of effect selection patterns (lottery tables) may be selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This predetermined condition may be, for example, the above-mentioned gaming state, the number of executions of the variation display based on the predetermined variation pattern (for example, the number of executions of SP reach), or a big prize in the jackpot game. It may be the number of winning game balls in the mouth, or it may be a combination of these.

Random numbers for selecting a specific effect are extracted from a predetermined range (range from "0" to "1000" in this embodiment). Therefore, after the scenario with high expectation is selected, the scenario with low expectation is selected (falling down), which may make it difficult for the player to grasp the reliability of the story reach itself. For example, when "Story Reach 2" is selected as the variation pattern, pattern 1 is selected as the effect selection pattern, and the number of inserted effects is 3. At this time, it is assumed that "scenario 2" is selected as the scenario corresponding to the specific effect to be executed first, "scenario 3" is selected as the scenario to be executed next, and "scenario 1" is selected as the scenario to be executed last. In this case, the specific effect executed after the second specific effect (“scenario 3”) becomes “scenario 1” with a relatively low expectation. For this reason, the player cannot determine whether the expected degree of the variable display game being executed corresponds to "Scenario 1" or "Scenario 3", and the reliability of the story reach as a preview effect is impaired. There is a risk that it will end up.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by adjusting the extraction range of the random number value acquired in the process of step S1613, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned downfall from occurring. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing changes in the random number extraction range in this embodiment in chronological order.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific effect to be executed last is sequentially selected. When "Story Reach 2" is selected as the variation pattern (number of inserted effects 3), first, the last (third) specific effect is executed. At this time, in the process of step S1534, a random number value is extracted in a range (specified range) from 0 to 1000 (FIG. 55 (A)). Assuming that the random number value extracted at this time is "550", "Scenario 3" is selected by referring to the effect selection pattern selection table of FIG. 54. Then, the effect control program stores the identification information of the selected scenario in the predetermined storage area assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1536). Information such as image data and audio data of the selected scenario is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the like. Then, 1 is added to the number of selected effects (step S1537).

Subsequently, the effect control program sets a range (upper limit value) of random numbers to be extracted in order to select the specific effect to be executed second (step S1538). As described above, since "scenario 3" is selected in the last specific effect to be executed, if "scenario 4" is selected in the second specific effect to be executed, a downfall will occur. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the random value generation range is selected so that only "scenario 1" to "scenario 3" are selected instead of the specified range of 0 to 1000. Is set in the range from 0 to 600. The reset upper limit value "600" is an upper limit value for which "scenario 3" is selected, and by setting the upper limit value to "600", "scenario 4" is not selected. In FIG. 55 (B), the range of the solid line (“0” to “600”) is the range in which random numbers can be extracted, and the range of the broken line (range from “600” to “1000”) is the range in which random numbers cannot be extracted. It is within the possible range.

Here, when "150" is extracted as a random number value for selecting the second specific effect to be executed, "scenario 2" is selected as the scenario of the specific effect. Therefore, the effect control program sets the upper limit of the range of the extracted random values to "200" so that "scenario 1" or "scenario 2" that does not cause a fall in the specific effect to be executed first is selected. Set. After that, for example, when "85" is extracted as a random number value, "scenario 1" is set (FIG. 55 (C)).

Then, in the process of step S1538, the value of the number of selected effects is 3, and the value of the number of selected effects and the value of the number of inserted effects match. Therefore, the result of the process of step S1533 is "Yes", and the effect control program is specified. Finish the selection of the production. Finally, the range (upper limit value) of the changed random numbers is set to the specified value (0 to 1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process is completed.

In the procedure in the story reach setting process of FIG. 53, the range of random numbers was set at the start of fluctuation (effect control process → decorative symbol fluctuation start process → effect setting process → story reach setting process), but at other timings. A range of random numbers may be set.

For example, all the scenarios of the specific effect may be selected at the timing when the specific effect is first executed (at the start of execution of the specific effect). In this case, in the story reach control process (step S1610) of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52), the story reach setting process described above may be executed at the timing of executing the first specific effect.

At this time, the selection pattern may be reset based on the start winning command or the look-ahead effect-related command transmitted from the main control board 4100 from the start of the fluctuation to the execution of the specific effect. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be executed later, and it is possible to diversify the variation of the effect. If the execution (insertion) of the specific effect is after the reach occurs, the specific effect may be selected at the start of the reach effect.

Further, at the timing of selecting the specific effect, the random values of the number corresponding to the number of inserted effects may be extracted and sorted in ascending order to determine the execution order of the specific effect. For example, when the random value is extracted three times and "550", "85", and "150" are extracted, "85" (scenario 1), "150" (scenario 2), and "550" (scenario). The specific effect may be executed in the order of 3).

Further, a lottery of random values may be performed each time a specific effect is executed. For example, the execution timing of the specific effect is defined in the schedule data, and a random value for selecting a scenario at the execution timing of the specific effect is extracted. In this case, after selecting the scenario of the specific effect, the lower limit of the random number is set. In the effect selection pattern table shown in FIG. 54, the larger the random number value is, the higher the expectation is set to be executed. Therefore, when the specific effect to be executed is selected in the execution order, the upper limit is set. No, reset the lower limit. Specifically, when scenario 2 is selected first, the lower limit value is set to "100" so that a fall does not occur when the next specific effect is selected, and a random number value is set in the range of "100" to "1000". To generate. By controlling in this way, it is possible to execute the story reach as in the case of selecting a specific effect at the start of fluctuation or the like. When the selection of the specific effect is completed, the lower limit value set in the peripheral control RAM 4150c is held and used when executing the next specific effect. Further, the lower limit value may be cleared (set to 0) at the timing when the last specific effect is selected or at the timing when the variable display game (special figure synchronization effect) ends. A more specific procedure will be described in Control in Pseudo-Continuous Production, which will be described later.

Further, both the lower limit value and the upper limit value may be set when the specific effect is selected. By doing so, it is possible to control the scenarios so that they are easily executed in a specific order. For example, after scenario 1 is selected, by setting the lower limit value to "0" and the upper limit value to "200", it is possible to select only "scenario 1" or "scenario 2". Further, by setting the lower limit value to "101" and the upper limit value to "200", it is possible to ensure that "scenario 2" is always selected. It should be noted that the same processing can be performed when all specific effects are selected at the start of fluctuation or the like. Further, the effect selection pattern table may be provided with items such as setting only the upper limit value (or the lower limit value) or setting the upper limit value and the lower limit value so that the effect can be set for each effect selection pattern.

If the lower limit value is not "0", a random number value from "0" to "lower limit value-upper limit value" may be generated, and the lower limit value may be added to the extracted random number value. For example, when the lower limit value is "101" and the upper limit value is "200", a random number from "0" to "99 (= lower limit value-upper limit value)" is generated and the lower limit value "101" is added. The result may be an extracted random number.

[11-2. Production example]
By the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect to be executed in the story reach so that the downfall does not occur. Next, a specific example of the production when story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment. In the story reach of the present embodiment, after the reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing. When the specific effect is executed, the decorative symbol 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right portion, and the region 1912 is formed above the start memory display unit 1911. In the area 1912, the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect to be executed is displayed.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario (line) of a specific effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment. (A) is scenario 1, (B) is scenario 2, (C) is scenario 3, (D) is scenario 4, (E) is scenario 5, and (F) is scenario 6. As described above, it is shown that the expectation of the variable display game being executed in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is high. Specifically, in scenario 1, a line indicating that the degree of expectation is low (“No good !!”) is displayed, and the line is set so that the feeling of expectation increases in sequence. In scenario 5, a line suggesting a big hit (“Is it a big hit?”) Is set, and in scenario 6, a line suggesting that the big hit is confirmed (“It's a big hit!”) Is set. Note that scenario 6 may be selected only when the jackpot is confirmed.

Next, the screen transition of story reach will be described. 58 and 59 are diagrams showing an example of the screen transition of the story reach of the present embodiment. First, when the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the special figure synchronization effect accompanied by the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, since story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern, reach occurs at a predetermined timing as shown on the screen (B).

After that, when it is time to execute the first specific effect, the specific effect in which the dialogue (scenario 2) is displayed in the area 1912 is executed (screen (C)). After that, when it is time to execute the second specific effect, as shown on the screen (D), the scenario 3 with a higher degree of expectation is selected, and the specific effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode.

Here, when the random number generation range is not adjusted, in the last specific effect executed, as shown on the screen (E-1), a specific effect having a lower expectation than the previously executed specific effect is performed. It may be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the control is performed so as to prevent the falling, the specific effect having the same or higher expectation as the previously executed specific effect is always executed (screen (E-2)). In the procedure of the present embodiment, the scenarios are selected in order from the last specific effect to be executed. Therefore, when the scenario 1 is selected last, the scenario 1 is selected in all the specific effects. In such a case, since the same specific effect is continuously executed, a plurality of scenarios corresponding to the same expectation may be prepared so that the same specific effect is not continuously executed.

[12. Pseudo continuous production]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous effect is selected as the variation pattern, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are executed once or more in the special symbol synchronization effect, and the pattern is selected by lottery at a predetermined timing. The production based on the created scenario is executed. As for the effect based on the scenario, as in the story mode described above, an effect (specific effect) that suggests the degree of expectation of the variable display game being executed is executed.

The temporary stop of the decorative symbol is a state in which the player recognizes that the change of the decorative symbol has stopped, but the change is actually continued. For example, when the decorative symbol is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the middle symbol that is stopped last is in a state of being slightly moved up and down, and re-variation is started from this state.

Regarding the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are temporarily stopped. In this case as well, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be continued, and then the temporarily stopped symbols (left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) may be re-variable. In this case, the result mode of the variable display may be shown including the stop mode of the fourth symbol in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At this time, even when the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped at the same decorative symbol, different result modes may be obtained if the fourth symbol is different. By configuring in this way, a part of the result mode of the big hit and the result mode of the small hit are similar (the combination of the decorative symbol at the time of stopping the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol is a part of the big hit result embodiment. By executing the hit game with the same as the small hit result mode), it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the game state (such as the winning probability of the variable display game) after the hit game is completed. , The variation of the production can be increased.

In the story reach in the present embodiment, all the scenarios to be executed at the start of the fluctuation are determined, but in the pseudo-continuous production in the present embodiment, the scenarios are selected by lottery at the timing when the specific production (scenario production) is executed. .. Further, in the pseudo-continuous effect, when reach occurs in the final re-variation, a normal reach effect (for example, SP reach) that can be executed even if the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur may be executed. It may be a reach effect that is executed only in the case of a pseudo continuous effect. Further, in the pseudo continuous production, it is not necessary to generate reach at the final fluctuation. Hereinafter, the effect when the pseudo continuous effect is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

[12-1. Pseudo continuous production setting processing]
First, the production control in the pseudo continuous production will be described. In the pseudo-continuous production, as described above, the production content is drawn by lottery immediately before the specific production (scenario production) is executed. Therefore, at the start of fluctuation, the initial settings necessary for executing the pseudo-continuous production are performed. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo continuous effect setting process in the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous effect setting process is executed in the process of step S1550 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the pseudo-continuous effect setting process shown in FIG. 60, the process related to the setting of the specific effect executed at a predetermined timing is described, and other fluctuation patterns are used for the setting of the special figure synchronization effect such as the reach effect. Since it is processed in the same manner as when it is selected, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the pseudo continuous effect setting process is executed, the effect control program first acquires the effect insertion number (temporary stop number) and the effect selection pattern from the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1551), and the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Store in a predetermined area.

Further, the effect control program sets the number of effect insertions as an initial value in the number of remaining effects, which is the number of remaining executions of the specific effect executed in the pseudo continuous effect (step S1552). Finally, a predetermined value is set in order to initialize the range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting the scenario of the specific effect (step S1553). In the present embodiment, the effect content is drawn by lottery when the scenario effect is executed, and the scenario effect is sequentially selected from the first scenario effect to be executed. Therefore, the lower limit value is initialized as the range of random numbers for the scenario selection lottery. At this time, in order to limit the selected scenario, an upper limit value may also be set.

As in the case of the story mode, all the scenarios may be drawn by the pseudo continuous effect setting process so that all the scenario effects are selected at the start of the fluctuation. The procedure for drawing a scenario effect is the same as in the story mode.

[12-2. Pseudo continuous production control processing]
Subsequently, the pseudo continuous effect control process executed in the decorative symbol variation process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo continuous effect control process in the present embodiment. The pseudo-continuous effect control process is executed from the start to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and controls the execution of the temporary stop and the execution of the scenario effect in the pseudo-continuous effect. The pseudo continuous effect control process is executed in the process of step S1630 of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52).

In the pseudo continuous effect effect of the present embodiment, the operation input acceptance period of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is set according to the timing of the temporary stop, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the operation input acceptance period, Scenario production is executed. In the procedure shown in FIG. 61, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the normal effect is continued without executing the scenario effect.

The effect control program first determines whether or not the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set (step S1631). The pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set when the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted in order to execute the scenario effect. That is, if the pressing operation unit 405 is operated while the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set, the process for executing the scenario effect is executed.

If the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is not set (the result of step S1631 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether or not it is the timing when the operation acceptable of the pressing operation unit 405 is possible. (Step S1646). If it is not the timing at which the operation reception of the pressing operation unit 405 becomes possible (the result of step S1646 is "No"), the pseudo continuous effect control process is terminated.

When it is time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (the result of step S1646 is "Yes"), it is suggested that the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (pressing operation). Settings for executing the effect (which requires the operation of unit 405) are made (step S1647). Further, the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set (step S1648), and the pseudo-continuous effect control process is terminated. The timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted is set according to the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. For example, it is set before a predetermined time when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set (the result of step S1631 is "Yes"), the effect control program determines whether or not the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (step). S1632). The pressing operation unit operation flag is set when the pressing operation unit 405 is actually operated. Specifically, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is acquired by the operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108) of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, and the pressing operation unit operation flag is the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 42). ) Is set in the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014) included in the peripheral control unit steady process.

When the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (the result of step S1632 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires random values in the set upper limit value and lower limit value range (step S1633). Further, based on the acquired random number value, a scenario to be executed as a specific effect is acquired from the effect pattern table (step S1634). The format of the production pattern table is the same as in the case of story reach. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern table for selecting a scenario in the case of pseudo continuous effect in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, the range of random numbers is set so that a scenario with low expectation can be easily selected.

When a scenario is selected, the effect control program executes a scenario execution setting process that sets effect information related to image data, sound data, etc. required to execute an effect (specific effect) based on the selected scenario. (Step S1635). The effect information set in the scenario execution setting process is the lamp after executing the lamp data creation process (step S1028), the display data creation process (step S1030), and the sound data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit steady processing. The effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

After that, the effect control program sets the lower limit of the range of random values for selecting the scenario to be executed next, based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1633, so that the effect content does not fall. Set (step S1636). Specifically, the lower limit of the random number is set so that a scenario having a lower expectation than the scenario selected in the process of step S1634 is not selected, that is, a scenario having at least the same degree is selected. For example, a case where the effect pattern 12 is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 62. If the acquired random number value is "450", scenario 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit value to "301", a scenario with an expectation degree equal to or higher than that of scenario 2 is always selected in the next lottery. Further, by setting the lower limit value to "501" instead of "301", it can be set so that it always rises.

On the other hand, in the effect control program, when the pressing operation unit operation flag is not set (the result of step S1632 is "No"), in the effect control program, the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer times out. Whether or not it is determined (step S1638). If the time is not up (the result of step S1638 is "No"), the pseudo-continuous effect control process is terminated, and the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is continuously accepted. On the other hand, when the time is up for the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer (the result of step S1638 is "Yes"), the processes after step S1640 are executed.

If the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is accepted during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, or if the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is not accepted during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period and the time is up, The effect control program ends the pressing operation unit operation suggestion effect (step S1640). Further, the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is cleared (step S1641), and the remaining number of effects is subtracted by 1 (step S1642).

Finally, the effect control program determines whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0 (step S1643). When the number of remaining effects becomes 0 (the result of step S1643 is "Yes"), the last specific effect is executed, so the upper limit of the random number is set to the specified value (step S1645), and the pseudo-continuous effect control is performed. End the process.

On the other hand, when the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S1643 is "No"), the effect control program measures the operation acceptable time of the pressing operation unit in order to set the operation input timing for the next pressing operation unit. The timer is set (step S1644).

From the above, when the pressing operation unit is operated while the pressing operation unit operation acceptable time measurement timer is not timed up and the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set, a specific effect is produced. Controlled to be executed. The execution timing of the effect (specific effect) based on the scenario may be after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or immediately after the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. For example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the control is changed so that the scenario execution setting process is executed after the press operation unit operation acceptable time measurement timer has timed up, and the press operation is performed after the scenario execution setting process. The part operation flag may be cleared.

[12-3. Pseudo-continuous production example]
Next, an example of the pseudo-continuous production will be described. In the pseudo continuous effect of the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed at the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol before the reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is started from a predetermined time before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (the operation can be accepted for the pressing operation unit 405), and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is performed at the timing of the temporary stop. It ends (the operation reception for the pressing operation unit 405 becomes impossible). When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in a state where the operation can be accepted for the pressing operation unit 405 (the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period), after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, until the re-variation of the identification symbol is started. During that time, a specific effect is executed.

The specific effect is the same as the story reach, and when the specific effect is executed, the decorative symbol 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right portion, and the area 1912 is formed above the start memory display unit 1911. In the area 1912, the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect to be executed is displayed.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the pseudo-continuous production of the present embodiment. First, when the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, the special symbol synchronization effect accompanied by the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the left symbol and the right symbol are in this order. The decorative pattern stops. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period is reached, and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect for prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is started. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the continuous symbol indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed stops as the middle symbol, and then the figure As shown in 63 (D), the specific effect is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started, and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is started as in FIG. 63 (B) (FIG. 63 (F)). At this time, if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 63 (G)), the re-variation is started without executing the specific effect (FIG. 63 (H)). After that, when the final decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 63 (I)), the reach effect is executed (FIG. 63 (J)). In the example shown in FIG. 63 (J), the SP reach 3 that can be executed is executed even when the pseudo continuous effect is not executed, but the reach executed at this time may be an effect specialized for the pseudo continuous effect. Good. Further, the pressing operation unit suggestion effect may be executed before the final temporary stop, and the reach effect may be executed after the specific effect is executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 63, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, the re-variation is started without executing the specific effect, but the specific effect is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. You may want to do it.

[12-4-1. Pseudo-continuous production timing chart]
Further, the execution timing of the effect in the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. 64 and 65 are diagrams for explaining the timing of control of the pseudo-continuous effect in the present embodiment.

FIG. 64 is a timing chart corresponding to the effect example shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 64A shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

First, at time t10, a game ball wins a prize at the starting ports 2101, 1022, and the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 (the special symbol (identification symbol) on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186). Variable display, variable display game) is started. At this time, the special symbol variation pattern command, the special symbol symbol type command, and the like are transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives a command and selects a variation pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect.

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (start of the special symbol synchronization effect), the operation input acceptance period of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 (pressing operation unit operation reception) is performed at the timing before the decorative symbol temporarily stops. The possible period) is started, and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is started (time t11). The period during which the operation of the pressing operation unit can be accepted continues until the time t13 when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is completed. At this time, the scenario effect to be executed is drawn by lottery (step S1634 in FIG. 61).

Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period (time t12), the lottery is performed at the timing when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol ends (the timing when the re-variation of the decorative symbol starts, time t14). Perform a specific effect based on the scenario.

Similarly, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, and the specific effect of scenario 4 is executed at time t16. After that, when the final temporary stop is completed, the reach effect is started (time t17). Then, after the end of the reach effect, the variation of the decorative symbol ends in synchronization with the end of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100, and the finalized symbol is displayed (time t18).

Subsequently, a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period will be described. FIG. 64B shows a case where the execution of the corresponding specific effect is skipped without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the first pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

In the example shown in FIG. 64 (B), since the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated at the timing of time t12, the specific effect based on the scenario 1 is not executed. Since the lower limit of the random number is not reset for the specific effect executed at the timing of time t15, all candidate scenarios can be selected.

Next, a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a timing chart of a modified example of the pseudo-continuous production in the present embodiment. FIG. 65C shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

In the example shown in FIG. 65 (C), even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect is executed at the start of the re-variation of the decorative symbol. Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the specific effect is executed before the start of the maximum fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a specific effect at the timing operated by the player, and it is possible to execute an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort.

In the example shown in FIG. 65 (D), when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, it is skipped without executing the specific effect, and the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the subsequent pressing operation unit operation acceptable period. To execute a specific effect for the skipped amount.

With reference to FIG. 65 (D), a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the third pressing operation unit operation acceptable period without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the second pressing operation unit operation acceptable period Shown. In this case, the specific effect executed at the time of the second temporary stop is skipped, but the skipped specific effect is also executed at the time of the third temporary stop.

In the example shown in FIG. 65 (D), the specific effect based on the scenario 1 is executed at the first temporary stop, and the specific effect executed at the second temporary stop is skipped. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the third pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, a specific effect is selected including the skipped portion. After the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the selected specific effects (scenario 3 and scenario 4) are sequentially executed.

As described above, in the pseudo-continuous production in the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in advance by setting a range (lower limit value) of random numbers for drawing the subsequent specific effect based on the random number drawn for the preceding specific effect. It is possible to prevent a random number in which an effect having an expectation level lower than the expected degree of the specific effect to be performed is executed.

Further, since the player can select whether or not to execute the specific effect by operating the pressing operation unit 405, the effect can be executed according to the player's intention.

[12-4-2. Timing chart of special pseudo-continuous production]
Next, the execution timing of the effect in the special pseudo-continuous effect will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating the timing of control of the special pseudo-continuous effect in the present embodiment.

The timing chart of FIG. 66 corresponds to the production example shown in FIG. 63. Further, FIG. 66 shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period as in FIG. 64 (A). Although the timing charts of the special pseudo-continuous effects corresponding to FIGS. 64 (B) to 65 (D) are not shown, the same processing as these may be executed in the special pseudo-continuous effects.

First, at time t10, when the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 (variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186, the variation display game) is started. , When the variation type is changed by executing the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) (the result of step S562 is "YES"), the special symbol variation pattern command and the special symbol symbol type command according to the changed variation type, etc. Is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives a command and selects a variation pattern (pre-special pseudo-ream n (n = 2-4)) for executing the pseudo-ream effect.

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (start of the special symbol synchronization effect), the operation input acceptance period of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 (pressing operation unit operation reception) is performed at the timing before the decorative symbol temporarily stops. The possible period) is started, and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is started (time t11). The period during which the operation of the pressing operation unit can be accepted continues until the time t13 when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is completed. At this time, the scenario effect to be executed is drawn by lottery (step S1634 in FIG. 61).

Then, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in synchronization with the timing at which the first variation display of the special symbol is finished out of the variation display of the two special symbols for which the special pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Further, when starting the second variation display of the special symbol out of the two variation displays of the special symbol for executing the special pseudo-continuous effect, the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) is executed to change the variation type. The main control board is changed from the pseudo-ream n (n = 2-4) to the rear special pseudo-ream n (n = 2-4), and the special symbol variation pattern command and the special symbol symbol type command according to the changed variation type are used. It is transmitted from the 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period set during the first variation display of the special symbol (time t12), the special drawing is transferred from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. Timing to start the second variation display of the special symbol after receiving the variation pattern command and special symbol type command, in other words, the timing to end the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (do not confirm the stop) and start the re-variation. At (time t14), a specific effect based on the lottery scenario is executed.

Similarly, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, and the specific effect of scenario 4 is executed at time t16. After that, when the final temporary stop is completed, the reach effect is started (time t17). Then, after the end of the reach effect, the variation of the decorative symbol ends in synchronization with the end of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100, and the finalized symbol is displayed (time t18).

In this way, even in the special pseudo-continuous effect executed over the two special symbol fluctuation displays, the same effect as the pseudo-continuous effect executed during one special symbol change is executed, and it looks like. It is difficult to determine whether the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed or the special pseudo-continuous effect is being executed. It should be noted that the hold display is changed when the first special symbol variation display is stopped and the second special symbol variation display is started when the special pseudo-continuous effect is executed (in the example of FIG. 66, the number of start memories). The number of start memories is subtracted by 1 from the hold display indicating "1" to change to the hold display indicating "0"), or the hold display is not changed during the special pseudo-continuous production. , The hold display may be changed when the special pseudo-continuous effect is finished (in this example, when the second special symbol variation display is finished) (in the example of FIG. 66, the second special symbol variation display is completed). When the display is started, the hold display indicating the start memory number "1" is maintained in the state showing "1" without updating to the hold display indicating "0", and the second special symbol variation display. Change to the hold display indicating "0" when the is finished).

[12-5. Deformation example of pseudo-continuous production]
[12-5-1. Example of transformation of scenario selection timing]
In the example of the pseudo continuous effect described above, the operation period of the pressing operation unit is set according to the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and the scenario for executing the specific effect at the timing when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated is selected. Was. On the other hand, a case where all the scenarios for executing the specific effect are selected at the start of the fluctuation as in the story reach described above will be described.

When all the scenarios are selected at the start of the fluctuation, in the pseudo continuous effect setting process (step S1550, FIG. 60) executed in the effect setting process (FIG. 49), steps from step S1533 in the story reach setting process (FIG. 53). The same process as in S1538 is executed. With this configuration, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started with all the scenarios corresponding to the specific effects set.

As described above, when all scenarios are determined at the start of fluctuation and the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operable period, the execution of the specific effect that was not executed is regulated (skip). You may. In this case, if the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the later pressing operation unit operable period, the re-lottery may be executed and the scenario may be selected again. In addition, you may skip the regulated specific effect without executing the re-lottery and execute the preset specific effect, or you may release the restriction and specify based on the skipped scenario. You may perform the production.

In addition, when the final specific effect is executed, even if the specific effect that should be executed in the middle is regulated, in order to notify the player of the final expectation, at the start of the fluctuation. A specific effect based on the determined scenario may be executed.

Further, even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect may be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period.

[12-5-2. Modification example of specific production execution conditions]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effect is executed at the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol by operating the pressing operation unit 405, but the specific effect may be executed based on other conditions. Good.

The other conditions are, for example, a combination of symbols that are fixedly stopped and do not appear at the time of loss, that is, when the symbol is stopped at the so-called chance, a specific effect is executed without operating the pressing operation unit 405. (At this time, it is not necessary to request the operation of the pressing operation unit 405). Further, the specific effect may be executed when the decorative symbol is stopped by a combination including the pseudo-ream exclusive symbol that appears only at the time of temporary stop of the pseudo-ream instead of the chance eye. In this case, the final stop symbol does not have to be the pseudo-ream-dedicated symbol, but any of the displayed symbol strings may stop at the pseudo-ream-dedicated symbol. In addition, a specific effect may be executed when the game is stopped at a normal lost pattern (so-called lost eye).

Further, the timing of executing the specific effect is when a predetermined movable body (movable accessory) operates, a predetermined light emitting body (lamp, LED, etc.) emits light, or a predetermined sound is output. May be good.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the game machine of the present embodiment is provided with a dial operation unit 401 in addition to the pressing operation unit 405. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is configured to be rotatable left and right, and for example, a specific effect may be executed when the dial is rotated at a predetermined timing. Further, the mode of the effect may be changed according to the rotation direction of the dial.

As another operating means, for example, a lever-type operating unit such as a control stick may be arranged in front of the upper plate 301, and a specific effect may be executed by operating the lever at a predetermined timing.

Further, even if a touch panel is mounted on the surface of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the player can input operations from the touch panel, and the specific effect is executed by operating the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Good. Further, in order to enable various inputs on the touch panel, not only the selection of the specific effect but also the effect mode of the specific effect may be changed depending on the operation content.

In addition to the contact-type operating means as described above, a non-contact-type operating means such as a non-contact sensor may be used. For example, a non-contact sensor may be arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the player may perform an action such as holding a hand in front of the game board to execute a specific effect.

[12-6. Second variant of pseudo-continuous production]
A second modification of the pseudo-continuous production will be described below. This second modification is the control in the normal gaming state, and is performed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the upper starting port 2101. However, the pseudo-continuous effect according to this second modification does not exclude execution based on the entry of the game ball into the lower starting port 2102.

As described above, when the game ball is accepted into the upper starting port 2101, the start of the variable display (that is, the starting information such as a random number) is held up to a predetermined number (up to 4 in this example). In the second modification, the effect setting process and the pseudo-continuous effect lottery, which will be described later, are performed when the game ball is received at the upper start opening 2101, and the hold of the start of the variation display is released for the decorative symbol variation process. It is performed when (that is, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). However, the timing at which the effect setting process and the pseudo-continuous effect lottery are performed is not necessarily limited to the time when the game ball is accepted by the upper start opening 2101, and the variable display is displayed after the game ball is accepted by the upper start port 2101. It may be until the start suspension is released.

As described above, the pseudo-continuous effect is a one-time variable display of a special symbol performed based on the release of the hold for the target start information (starting information for which it is decided to perform the pseudo-continuous effect). The variation display of the decorative symbol (identification symbol) was temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the middle (hereinafter referred to as "during the effect of variation of the symbol performed based on the establishment of the variation condition for the start information"). After that, by re-variating the decorative symbol, it is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of the special symbol was actually performed a plurality of times even though the variable display of the special symbol was performed only once. The change and stop of the symbols in the present embodiment are usually performed by stopping in the order of left, right, and middle after the change of the three decorative symbols of left, middle, and right is started. The pseudo-continuous effect is derived in the order of "the fluctuation of the three decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right starts → stops in the order of left and right in a non-reach manner → the middle symbol that stops last stops at a special symbol". This is an effect of repeating a series of effects N times during one special lottery (more specifically, within the time of the added value determined by the variation type determination process described later). After that, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern setting process performed using FIG. 67, which will be described later, and the result of the special lottery is displayed. In the present embodiment, the number of pseudo-reams performed using the time added to the fluctuation time (the number of times a series of effects related to the pseudo-ream effect is performed (three decorative symbols are provisionally displayed during one variation display of the special symbol). The higher the number of times to stop)), the higher the expectation of the jackpot. The pseudo-continuous production in which the series of productions related to the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous production is repeated four times is the jackpot confirmation production. Further, when executing the pseudo continuous effect, the effect may be executed such that a character appears when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, or the effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, "stopping the symbol" means stopping in a mode in which the result of the special lottery is confirmed and displayed, and "temporary stop of the symbol" means that the result of the special lottery is not yet confirmed and displayed, but in appearance Means a mode that appears to be stationary.

Further, in the second modification of the pseudo continuous effect, the variation pattern table of FIG. 47, the effect setting process of FIG. 51, the decorative symbol variation process of FIG. 52, the story reach setting process of FIG. 53, the effect selection pattern table of FIG. 54, Pseudo-continuous effect setting process of FIG. 60, pseudo-continuous effect control process of FIG. 61, effect pattern table of FIG. 62, diagram showing an effect example of pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 63, timing chart of FIG. 64, pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 65. The diagram for explaining the control timing of the above and the diagram for explaining the control timing of the special pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 66 are not used, but other processes are common to the above-described processes.

As the process peculiar to the second modification of the pseudo continuous effect, FIGS. 67 to 71 will be described. FIG. 67 is an example of a lottery table used for the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) and the variation type determination process performed on the main control MPU4100a side. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of a pseudo-continuous production lottery. FIG. 70 is a table used for the pseudo-continuous production lottery, in which (a) a table for variable type 10H, (b) a table for variable type 11H, (c) a table for variable type 12H, and (d). It is a table for fluctuation correspondence 13H. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of decorative symbol variation processing. FIG. 72 is a time chart for explaining the step-up effect, wherein (a) a time chart for explaining the degree of expectation for the step-up effect, (b) a pseudo-continuous effect, a fake pseudo-continuous effect, and a pseudo-ream effect. It is a time chart for explaining the relationship between each variation of the fake pseudo-continuous production and the step-up production. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a pseudo / fake pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

In this example, as an example of the fluctuation pattern, 12 patterns of PT1 to PT12 are prepared as can be grasped from FIG. 67. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the result of the special lottery. For details, if the result of the special lottery determined using the jackpot judgment random number extracted at the start winning is lost, the number of holds at the start winning and the result of the reach judgment performed using the reach judgment random number Is determined to be one of PT1 to PT4, PT6, PT8 and PT10. If the result of the special lottery is a loss, for example, when the number of holds at the start winning is 0 or 1, and it is determined that the reach is not performed, it is determined to be PT3 (loss fluctuation), and the number of holds at the start winning is decided. Is 2 and PT2 (loss fluctuation) is determined when it is determined that the reach is not performed, and PT1 (loss fluctuation) is determined when the number of holdings at the start winning is 3 and it is determined that the reach is not performed. Will be decided. In addition, when the result of the special lottery is lost but it is determined to reach (that is, when it is lost reach), there is a 50/100 chance of PT4 (normal reach) regardless of the number of holdings at the start winning. PT6 (SP reach 1 loss) with a probability of 25/100, PT8 (SP reach 2 loss) with a probability of 20/100, and PT10 with a probability of 5/100. (SP reach 3 loss) is decided. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a win, PT5 (per normal reach) is determined with a probability of 1/100, and PT7 (SP reach 1) with a probability of 18/100, regardless of the number of reservations at the start winning. It is decided to be PT9 (per SP reach 2) with a probability of 30/100, PT11 (per SP reach 3) with a probability of 50/100, and PT12 with a probability of 1/100. Will be decided.

The height of the expectation that the result of the special lottery is a hit (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "expectation") is normal reach <SP reach 1 <SP reach 2 <SP reach 3. The normal reach, SP reach 1, SP reach 2 and SP reach 3 can be determined in either the case where the result of the special lottery is a hit or the case where the result is a loss, whereas the pseudo-ream 4 times per full rotation. The fluctuation pattern of is a fluctuation pattern that can be assigned only when the result of the special lottery is a win.

Next, when the variation pattern is determined, the variation type determination process using the variation type random number is performed based on the determined variation pattern, and the status value (10H to 13H) is determined. This variation type determination process is a process performed on the main control MPU4100a side, and is performed with reference to FIG. 67. Then, based on the result of this variation type determination process, the addition value to be added to the variation time value of the special symbol and the pseudo-ream number N are determined. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is determined based on the determined fluctuation pattern, as referred to in FIG. 67. Then, based on the result of the variation type determination process, the addition value to be added to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern and the pseudo-ream number N are determined.

The addition value corresponds to the number of pseudo-reams N, and the number of pseudo-reams is added for 12 s each time. Therefore, the added value is 24 s when the number of pseudo-reams is 2, and 36 s when the number of pseudo-reams is 3. By setting the number of pseudo runs to 12 s each time, the time will be the same as the fluctuation time when the result of the special lottery when the number of reservations is 0 or 1 is lost (the fluctuation time when PT3), and multiple times. It is possible to make it look as if a special lottery was held.

As described above, since the pseudo-ream effect over the determined pseudo-ream number N is performed by using the added value, the larger the pseudo-ream number N, the larger the added value. For example, if the status value determined by the variation type determination process is 10H, the addition value is 0s and the pseudo-ream number N is also 0 (N = 0). If the determined status value is 11H, the addition value is 12s and the pseudo-ream number N is 1 (N = 1). If the determined status value is 12H, the addition value is 24s and the pseudo-ream number N is 2 times. (N = 2) If the determined status value is 13H, the addition value is 36s and the pseudo-ream number N is 3 times (N = 3). However, when the determined variation pattern is PT12, the pseudo-ream number N is determined to be 4 times (N = 4), and the variation type determination process is not performed (no additional value). Therefore, the pseudo-continuous production in which the pseudo-ream number N is 4 times (N = 4) is performed within the fluctuation time without the addition value. When the pseudo-continuous production is continued four times, the result of the special lottery is still confirmed and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the special symbol display (upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186). It is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a win even though there is no such thing, and the production with a pseudo-ream number N of 4 times (N = 4) is positioned as a premium production. In addition, as the number of pseudo-reams N increases, the result of the special lottery can be expected, and the number of pseudo-reams N is twice (N = 2) rather than once (N = 1). The expectation that the result is a hit is high, and the expectation that the result of the special lottery is a hit is higher when the pseudo-ream number N is 3 times (N = 3) than when it is 2 times (N = 2).

As can be seen from FIG. 67, the status value is determined to be 10H with a probability of 100% if the determined fluctuation pattern is PT1 to PT3. If the determined fluctuation pattern is PT4, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 90/100, and is determined to be 11H with a probability of 10 of 100. If the determined fluctuation pattern is PT5, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 90/100, determined to 11H with a probability of 5 of 100, determined to 12H with a probability of 3/100, and determined to be 2/100. It is determined to be 13H with a probability of. If the determined variation pattern is PT6, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 10/100, to 11H with a probability of 40 of 100, and to 12H with a probability of 50/100. If the determined fluctuation pattern is PT7, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 5/100, determined to 11H with a probability of 25 of 100, and determined to 12H with a probability of 70/100. If the determined fluctuation pattern is PT8, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 10/100, determined to 11H with a probability of 20 of 100, determined to 12H with a probability of 60/100, and determined to be 10/100. It is determined to be 13H with a probability of. If the determined fluctuation pattern is PT9, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 5/100, determined to 11H with a probability of 15/100, determined to 12H with a probability of 55/100, and 25/100. It is determined to be 13H with a probability of. If the determined fluctuation pattern is PT10, it is determined to be 11H with a probability of 5 of 100, to 12H with a probability of 20/100, and to 13H with a probability of 75/100. If the determined fluctuation pattern is PT11, it is determined to be 11H with a probability of 5/100, determined to 12H with a probability of 10/100, and determined to 13H with a probability of 85/100.

As can be seen from FIG. 68, the effect setting process, which is the process on the peripheral control board 4140 side, first identifies the variation pattern from the special figure variation pattern command (step S2500). Next, the status value is specified from the variation type command (step S2550). Then, the fake pseudo-continuous production lottery is performed using the fluctuation pattern specified in step S2500 and the status value specified in step S2550 (step S2600).

The pseudo-ream effect lottery in step S2600 is similar in appearance to the pseudo-ream effect with respect to the pseudo-ream number N determined based on the result of the variation type determination process performed on the main control board 4100 side. It is a lottery related to the addition of production. The production of the fake pseudo-ream effect (hereinafter, this effect is sometimes referred to as the "fake pseudo-ream effect") is "the change of the three decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right starts → the state where the variation display of the left and right symbols is maintained. A series of productions related to the pseudo-ream effect, which is derived in the order of "Stop at the" XTREME "design as a special symbol only in the middle symbol", is performed G times during one special lottery (G is the number of pseudo-reams). ), Then, "The fluctuation of the middle symbol starts again → Stops at the same symbol in the order of left and right → Reach production → The middle symbol stops and the result of the special lottery is displayed" once for the special symbol This is an effect performed during the variable display of (until the result of one special lottery is derived). In other words, unlike the pseudo-ream effect, the fake pseudo-ream effect allows the special symbol to be temporarily stopped only for the middle symbol without stopping the left and right symbols, so that the pseudo-ream effect can be achieved in a shorter time than the pseudo-ream effect. It is a production that can be made to look as if it was done.

As described above, the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol may be a symbol that exists in the middle symbol from the normal time, or a pseudo-continuous production or a fake pseudo that does not exist in the middle symbol in the normal time. It may be a symbol that appears when a continuous production is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the series of effects related to the pseudo-continuous effect is performed using the addition time determined based on the result of the variation type determination process, whereas the series of effects related to the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. It is performed within the fluctuation time determined by the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process. That is, in this example, the pseudo-ream effect and the pseudo-ream effect are combined by adding the fake pseudo-ream number G performed within the fluctuation time to the pseudo-ream number N performed using the addition time. It will be performed N + G) times. Moreover, as will be described in detail later, as long as the fluctuation pattern is the same, the number of times the special lottery result is won is determined more than when the result of the special lottery is lost. Since it is performed in, the result of the special lottery is more likely to be a hit than the N times pseudo-continuous production (N + G) times (pseudo-continuous production + fake pseudo) without lengthening the fluctuation time of the special symbol. (Continuous production) will be performed.

In addition, if the number of executions of the pseudo-ream effect, the fake pseudo-ream effect and (pseudo-ream effect + fake pseudo-ream effect) is the same, the expectation of winning the special lottery will be the same. It is preferable to set it. However, although the idea is different, the pseudo-ream production has an advantage over the fake pseudo-ream production, for example, the expectation is higher for the pseudo-ream production 3 times than for the fake pseudo-ream production 3 times. , (Pseudo-continuous production + Fake pseudo-continuous production) The expectation may be higher for the pseudo-continuous production 3 times than for 3 times. Furthermore, the fake pseudo-ream effect is given an advantage over the pseudo-ream effect, for example, the expectation is higher for the fake pseudo-ream effect 3 times than for the pseudo-repeated effect 3 times. Expectations may be higher for 3 times (pseudo-continuous production + fake pseudo-continuous production) than for 3 times.

Here, the pseudo-continuous production lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. As described above, the fake pseudo-ream effect lottery is a lottery performed on the peripheral control board 4140 side, and the pseudo-ream number N and the fake are based on the fluctuation pattern specified in step S2500 and the status value specified in step S2550. This is a lottery for determining the number of pseudo-series G in the range where the sum with the number of pseudo-series G does not exceed 4 (the number of times the result of the special lottery is determined to be a hit).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, first, the status value specified in step S2550 is determined. When it is determined that the status value is 10H (YES in step S2610), a counterfeit pseudo-continuous production lottery is performed using the table for 10H in FIG. 70 (a) (step S2620). If it is determined in step S2610 that the status value is not 10H (NO in step S2610), it is determined whether or not the status value is 11H (step S2630). When it is determined that the status value is 11H (YES in step S2630), a counterfeit pseudo-continuous production lottery is performed using the table for 11H in FIG. 70 (b) (step S2640). If it is determined in step S2630 that the status value is not 11H (NO in step S2630), it is determined whether or not the status value is 12H (step S2650). When it is determined that the status value is 12H (YES in step S2650), a counterfeit pseudo-continuous production lottery is performed using the table for 12H in FIG. 70 (c) (step S2660). If it is determined in step S2650 that the status value is not 12H (NO in step S2650), a counterfeit pseudo-continuous production lottery is performed using the table for 13H in FIG. 70 (d) (step S2670).

When the fake pseudo-continuous production lottery is performed in step S2620, step S2640, step S2660 and step S2670, the process proceeds to step S2680 and the fake pseudo-continuous production timing lottery is performed. In the pseudo-continuous production timing lottery in step S2680, from the start of the fluctuation of all the symbols on the left, middle and right based on the establishment of the fluctuation condition for the start information, to the stop of the fluctuation of all the symbols. At what timing (until the result of the special lottery is displayed), the pseudo-continuous production is determined. In addition, when the reach effect is performed, the fake pseudo-continuous effect may be executed after the reach effect is started.

Hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous production lottery in step S2620, step S2640, step S2660 and step S2670 will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

In the fake pseudo-ream effect lottery (step S2620) when the status value is 10H (no pseudo-ream), as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the fluctuation pattern determined on the main control board 4100 side is PT1 to. If it is PT3, the number of false pseudo-reams G is always determined to be 0. In the case of PT4, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 90/100, and is determined to be 1 with a probability of 10 of 100. In the case of PT5, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 90/100, 1 time with a probability of 7 of 100, and 2 times with a probability of 3/100. .. In the case of PT6, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 10/100, determined once with a probability of 40 of 100, and determined twice with a probability of 50/100. .. In the case of PT7, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 5/100, 1 time with a probability of 25 of 100, and 2 times with a probability of 70/100. .. In the case of PT8, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 10/100, determined once with a probability of 30 of 100, and determined twice with a probability of 60/100. .. In the case of PT9, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 5/100, 1 time with a probability of 30 of 100, and 2 times with a probability of 65/100. .. In the case of PT10, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined once with a probability of 25/100, and is determined twice with a probability of 75/100. In the case of PT11, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined once with a probability of 5/100, and is determined twice with a probability of 95/100. In the case of PT12, since it is determined on the main control board 4100 side that the pseudo-ream number N is 4 times (the number of times that the result of the special lottery is confirmed to be a hit), the fake pseudo-ream number G is It is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 100/100. However, in the case of PT12, since it is not necessary to add the fake pseudo-ream number G to the pseudo-ream number N, the fake pseudo-ream production lottery may not be performed in the first place.

As described above, when the status value is 10H (no pseudo-ream), the pseudo-ream effect is not performed, but the fake pseudo-ream effect lottery is performed so that the fake pseudo-ream number G can be performed. As a result, even if the pseudo-continuous production is not performed, the chance of losing the sense of expectation due to the pseudo-continuous production can be reduced.

In the fake pseudo-ream effect lottery (step S2640) when the status value is 11H (pseudo-ream once), as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the fluctuation pattern determined on the main control board 4100 side is PT1. If ~ PT3, the number of false pseudo-reams G is always determined to be 0. In the case of PT4, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 90/100, and is determined to be 1 with a probability of 10 of 100. In the case of PT5, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 90/100, 1 time with a probability of 7 of 100, and 2 times with a probability of 3/100. .. In the case of PT6, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 10/100, determined once with a probability of 40 of 100, and determined twice with a probability of 50/100. .. In the case of PT7, the fake pseudo-ream count G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 5/100, 1 time with a probability of 25 of 100, and 2 times with a probability of 69/100. It is decided 3 times with a probability of 1/100. In the case of PT8, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 10/100, determined once with a probability of 30 of 100, and determined twice with a probability of 60/100. .. In the case of PT9, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 5/100, 1 time with a probability of 30 of 100, and 2 times with a probability of 62/100. It is decided 3 times with a probability of 3/100. In the case of PT10, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined once with a probability of 25/100, and is determined twice with a probability of 75/100. In the case of PT11, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined once with a probability of 5/100, determined twice with a probability of 90/100, and determined 3 times with a probability of 5/100. To. In the case of PT12, since it is determined on the main control board 4100 side that the pseudo-ream number N is 4 times (the number of times that the result of the special lottery is confirmed to be a hit), the fake pseudo-ream number G is It is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 100/100. However, in the case of PT12, since it is not necessary to add the fake pseudo-ream number G to the pseudo-ream number N, the fake pseudo-ream production lottery may not be performed in the first place.

In this way, when the status value is 11H (pseudo-ream 1 time), the fake pseudo-ream production lottery is performed so that the sum of the pseudo-ream count and the fake pseudo-ream count can be 1, 2, 3, or 4 times. Will be done. As a result, in addition to the pseudo-continuous effect of the number of times determined on the main control board 4100 side, the pseudo-continuous effect can be performed, and it is possible to give the player a higher expectation. In particular, the sum of the number of pseudo-reams and the number of fake pseudo-reams is 4 times only when the result of the special lottery is a hit, so the number of pseudo-reams determined on the main control board 4100 side is 4 times. Even if this is not the case, it is possible to perform an effect in which it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a win when the result of the special lottery is not yet confirmed and displayed.

In the fake pseudo-ream effect lottery (step S2660) when the status value is 12H (pseudo-ream twice), as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the fluctuation pattern determined on the main control board 4100 side is PT1. If it is ~ PT3, the number of false pseudo-reams G is always determined to be 0. In the case of PT4, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 90/100, and is determined to be 1 with a probability of 10 of 100. In the case of PT5, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 50/100, and is determined to be 1 with a probability of 50 of 100. In the case of PT6, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 60/100, and is determined to be 1 with a probability of 40 of 100. In the case of PT7, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 40/100, determined to be 1 time with a probability of 59 of 100, and determined to be 2 times with a probability of 1 of 100. In the case of PT8, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 70/100, and is determined to be 1 with a probability of 30 of 100. In the case of PT9, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 30/100, 1 time with a probability of 67 of 100, and 2 times with a probability of 3 of 100. In the case of PT10, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 90/100 and to 1 with a probability of 10/100. In the case of PT11, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 10/100, determined once with a probability of 85/100, and determined twice with a probability of 5 of 100. .. In the case of PT12, since it is determined on the main control board 4100 side that the pseudo-ream number N is 4 times (the number of times that the result of the special lottery is confirmed to be a hit), the fake pseudo-ream number G is It is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 100/100. However, in the case of PT12, since it is not necessary to add the fake pseudo-ream number G to the pseudo-ream number N, the fake pseudo-ream production lottery may not be performed in the first place.

In this way, when the status value is 12H (pseudo-ream 2 times), the fake pseudo-ream production lottery is performed so that the sum of the pseudo-ream number and the fake pseudo-ream number can be 2, 3, or 4 times. As a result, in addition to the pseudo-continuous effect of the number of times determined on the main control board 4100 side, the pseudo-continuous effect can be performed, and it is possible to give the player a higher expectation. In particular, the sum of the number of pseudo-reams and the number of fake pseudo-reams is 4 times only when the result of the special lottery is a hit, so the number of pseudo-reams determined on the main control board 4100 side is 4 times. Even if this is not the case, it is possible to perform an effect in which it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a win when the result of the special lottery is not yet confirmed and displayed.

Further, as can be seen from FIG. 67, the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach 3 is more likely to be selected when the result of the special lottery is a hit than when it is a loss. That is, when the fluctuation pattern of SP reach 3 is displayed, the player is given a great sense of expectation. However, even if the fluctuation pattern of SP reach 3 is determined, it may be determined once or twice in the pseudo-ream. In this case, although it is originally a lottery result that can perform a relatively high-expected production, a relatively low production will be executed, which may reduce the interest. In this regard, as can be seen from FIG. 70, even if the pseudo-ream production lottery is determined to be once or twice, in the case of the SP reach 3 variation pattern, a special symbol is used in the pseudo-ream production lottery. It is easier to determine that will stop compared to other fluctuation patterns. That is, it can be said that the fake pseudo-continuous production lottery has a function of supplementing the shortage in the result of the pseudo-continuous production lottery.

In the fake pseudo-ream effect lottery (step S2670) when the status value is 13H (pseudo-ream 3 times), as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the fluctuation pattern determined on the main control board 4100 side is PT1. If any of ~ PT4, PT6, PT8 and PT10 (that is, if the result of the special lottery is lost), the number of false pseudo-reams G is always determined to be 0. In the case of PT5, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 99/100 and once with a probability of 1 of 100. In the case of PT7, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 97/100 and to 1 with a probability of 3 of 100. In the case of PT9, the number of false pseudo-reams G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 95/100 and once with a probability of 5 of 100. In the case of PT11, the pseudo-continuous number G is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 90/100, and is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 10 of 100. In the case of PT12, since it is determined on the main control board 4100 side that the pseudo-ream number N is 4 times (the number of times that the result of the special lottery is confirmed to be a hit), the fake pseudo-ream number G is It is determined to be 0 times with a probability of 100/100. However, in the case of PT12, since it is not necessary to add the fake pseudo-ream number G to the pseudo-ream number N, the fake pseudo-ream production lottery may not be performed in the first place.

In this way, when the status value is 13H (pseudo-ream 3 times), the fake pseudo-ream production lottery is performed so that the sum of the pseudo-ream number and the fake pseudo-ream number can be 3 or 4 times. As a result, in addition to the pseudo-continuous effect of the number of times determined on the main control board 4100 side, the pseudo-continuous effect can be performed, and it is possible to give the player a higher expectation. In particular, the sum of the number of pseudo-reams and the number of fake pseudo-reams is 4 times only when the result of the special lottery is a hit, so the number of pseudo-reams determined on the main control board 4100 side is 4 times. Even if this is not the case, it is possible to perform an effect in which it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a win when the result of the special lottery is not yet confirmed and displayed.

By the way, in this example, as described above, when the pseudo-ream production of 4 times of pseudo-ream is performed, the result of the special lottery is a hit at this point (when the result of the special lottery is not yet confirmed and displayed). It is configured so that the fact is confirmed (the result of the special lottery is the minimum condition for determining the number of pseudo-reams to be four). Furthermore, even if the number of pseudo-reams determined on the main control board 4100 side is less than 4, the number of pseudo-reams and the pseudo-ream as a result of the pseudo-ream effect lottery performed on the peripheral control board 4140 side. If the sum of the number of times is four times, three pseudo-ream effects and one fake pseudo-ream effect are performed during one variation display of the special symbol, and the effect related to such fluctuations is performed. At that point (when the result of the special lottery has not been confirmed yet), it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a win. In this example, even if the variation pattern of the variation number PT12 (the number of pseudo-reams is 4) is not determined as a result of the special symbol variation pattern setting process performed on the main control board 4100 side in this way, the peripheral control is performed. Depending on the result of the pseudo-continuous production lottery performed on the board 4140 side, it is possible to execute a variable production in which it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a hit when the result of the special lottery is not yet confirmed and displayed. There is.

In this example, it is not the case that the pseudo-ream effect of 4 pseudo-reams is performed, but also the case where the sum of the pseudo-reams and the pseudo-reams is 4 times variable. It is configured so that the result of the special lottery is confirmed when the result of the lottery is not yet confirmed, but instead, the sum of the number of pseudo-reams and the number of pseudo-reams is 4 A fake pseudo-ream production lottery may be performed in a form that cannot be repeated, and a further premier feeling may be given to the pseudo-ream production with four pseudo-reams.

Further, in this example, the number of pseudo-reams is not determined to be 4 in the pseudo-ream effect lottery performed on the peripheral control board 4140 side. That is, even if the number of pseudo-reams determined on the main control board 4100 side is 0 (the result of the variation type determination process is 10H), the pseudo-reams are performed in the false ream effect lottery performed on the peripheral control board 4140 side. The number of times is not determined to be four. This is because the reach effect is started after a short time such as 12 s has elapsed since the fluctuation of all the symbols on the left, middle, and right is started. That is, in the case of performing the pseudo-continuous production, in order to make it appear as if a special lottery was performed multiple times, the timing of temporarily stopping the middle symbol in the pseudo-continuous production is set to PT1 (4s) or PT2, which is a loss variation. It is preferable to correspond to the fluctuation time of (8s). When the number of pseudo-reams is 4, if the timing at which the middle symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-ream effect is made to completely correspond to the fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation, the reach effect starts after the fluctuation of all the symbols is started. It takes at least 16s of time before it is done. Therefore, when the number of counterfeit pseudo-reams is 4, there is a discrepancy between the timing at which the middle symbol is temporarily stopped in the counterfeit pseudo-ream effect and the fluctuation time of PT1 or PT2. It becomes difficult to make it look as if multiple special lottery was held.

In this example, the pseudo-continuous production is not performed four times (the number of times that the result of the special lottery is determined to be a win), but for example, the first PT (3s) and the first. Prepare 4 patterns of loss fluctuations with different fluctuation times, such as 2PT (6s), 3rd PT (9s), and 4th PT (12s) (the same number of patterns as the number of times it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a win). Then, it is possible to perform a pseudo-continuous production four times.

Next, the decorative pattern variation processing, which is the processing on the peripheral control board 4140 side, will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 71. First, it is determined whether or not it is a pseudo continuous production (step S2700). Here, if it is determined that the effect is a pseudo-continuous effect (YES in step S2700), it is determined whether or not the effect is a pseudo-continuous effect (step S2710). When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect is fake (YES in step S2710), the pseudo-pseudo-continuous effect control process in which both the pseudo-continuous effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are performed is executed (step S2720). If it is determined in step S2710 that it is not a pseudo-continuous effect (NO in step S2710), the pseudo-continuous effect control process is executed (step S2730). If it is determined in step S2700 that it is not pseudo-continuous (NO in step S2700), it is determined whether or not it is a false continuous effect (step S2740). Here, if it is determined that the fake pseudo-continuous effect is performed (YES in step S2740), the fake pseudo-continuous effect control process is executed (step S2750). If it is determined in step S2740 that it is not a pseudo-continuous effect (NO in step S2740), the normal fluctuation control process is executed (step S2760). As described above, the pseudo-continuous effect control process is a process of performing the pseudo-continuous effect using the addition time determined based on the result of the variation type determination process, whereas the pseudo-continuous effect is a series of effects related to the fake pseudo-continuous effect. Is a process of performing a pseudo-continuous effect within the fluctuation time determined by the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process. The pseudo / pseudo-continuous effect control process is a process of performing a pseudo-continuous effect using the addition time and performing a pseudo-continuous effect within a fluctuating time. The normal fluctuation control process is a process of performing fluctuations in a fluctuation pattern determined by a special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process without performing a pseudo-continuous effect.

Here, about the degree of expectation when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol (that is, when any of pseudo-ream effect, fake pseudo-ream effect, and pseudo-fake pseudo-ream effect is performed). explain.

The ST1 effect, ST2 effect, ST3 effect, ST4 effect, and ST5 effect shown in FIG. 72 are all effects that express the degree of expectation, and the high degree of expectation is ST1 effect <ST2 effect <ST3 effect <ST4 effect < It is ST5 production. In FIG. 72, the ST1 effect, the ST2 effect, the ST3 effect, the ST4 effect, and the ST5 effect are simply shown as ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4, and ST5 by omitting the effects. Further, the left symbol stops 10 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, and the right symbol stops 11 seconds later. Then, after 12 seconds, if the reach effect is not performed, the middle symbol is stopped and the result of the special lottery is displayed, and if the reach effect is performed, the reach effect is started and the decorative symbol changes thereafter. continue. However, although not shown in FIG. 72, in the case of variable PT1, the last stopped middle symbol stops after 4 seconds, and in the case of variable PT2, the last stopped middle symbol stops after 8 seconds.

First, the degree of expectation for the step-up effect will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (a). In the ST1 effect, the ST1 effect is performed after the symbol variation is started, and then the ST1 final effect is displayed, and it is confirmed that the process does not proceed after ST2. In this case, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation corresponding to ST1. In the ST2 effect, the ST1 effect is performed after the symbol variation is started, then the step up to ST2, the ST2 final effect is displayed, and it is confirmed that the process does not proceed after ST3. In this case, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation corresponding to ST2. In the ST3 effect, after the symbol variation is started, the step up is ST1 → ST2 → ST3, and then the ST3 final effect is displayed, and it is confirmed that the process does not proceed after ST4. In this case, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation corresponding to ST3. In the ST4 effect, after the symbol variation is started, the step up is ST1 → ST2 → ST3 → ST4, and then the ST4 final effect is displayed, and it is confirmed that the process does not proceed after ST4. In this case, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation corresponding to ST4. In the ST5 effect, after the symbol variation is started, the step-up is performed in the order of ST1 → ST2 → ST3 → ST4 → ST5, and then the ST5 final effect with the highest expectation is displayed in this example. When the ST1 final effect or the ST2 final effect is displayed, for example, the loss fluctuation of PT3 is often performed. When the ST3 finalized effect is displayed, it is confirmed that the reach effect is performed in this example, so that at least the normal reach variation is performed. When the ST4 final effect is displayed, there is a high expectation that the SP reach effect will be performed. When the ST5 final effect is displayed, the SP reach effect is confirmed. In particular, when SP reach 3 is displayed, as can be seen from FIG. 67, the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a hit is extremely high. In this way, if the ST effect is stepped up after the change of the decorative pattern is started, the degree of expectation will increase accordingly.

Next, the relationship between each variation of the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the pseudo-pseudo-continuous effect and the step-up effect will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). The effect of (a) is a diagram showing that although the ST2 confirmed effect has already been displayed, the ST3 confirmed effect is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the "XTREAM" symbol as a special symbol. .. That is, even if the confirmed step effect is STM (M is an integer), the ST (M + 1) confirmed effect one step higher can be displayed with the temporary stop of the special symbol as a trigger. .. The effect of (b) is a diagram showing that although the ST2 final effect has already been displayed, the ST5 final effect is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the "XTREAM" symbol as a special symbol. .. That is, even if the confirmed step effect is STM (M is an integer), the ST (M + 3) confirmed effect three steps higher can be displayed (steps can be skipped) triggered by a temporary stop with a special symbol. )It is shown that. Here, the example is described in which the final effect of 3 steps higher is displayed, but it goes without saying that the ST (M + 2) final effect of 2 steps higher may be displayed, for example. As for the production of (c), although the final production with relatively high expectations such as the ST4 final production has already been displayed, the expectation level is further increased when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped with the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol. It is a figure which shows that the ST5 final effect with a high value is displayed. The effect of (d) is a diagram showing a case where the middle symbol is a special symbol "XTREME" and there are two chances of temporary stop. In this case, although the ST2 finalized effect has already been displayed, the ST3 finalized effect is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol. After that, the middle symbol temporarily stops at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol, and the ST5 confirmation effect is displayed.

In this way, when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol, a step effect with a higher expectation than the already displayed ST final effect is displayed. That is, each time the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol, the expectation for the special lottery increases. As described above, the opportunity for the middle symbol to temporarily stop at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol is up to four times, and when the middle symbol temporarily stops at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol four times, At this point, the jackpot is confirmed. The middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol because there are pseudo-ream effect, fake pseudo-ream effect, and pseudo-fake pseudo-ream effect in which both pseudo-ream effect and fake pseudo-ream effect are performed. However, in any case, when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol, a step effect with a higher degree of expectation than the already displayed ST final effect is displayed.

In addition, in the gaming machine including this example, in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed a plurality of times in one special lottery symbol change, the ST1 effect is executed each time the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in one special lottery symbol change. In addition to being executed step by step from, the ST finalized effect with a higher degree of expectation than the ST finalized effect executed in the previous pseudo-continuous production is always displayed. On the other hand, in the pseudo-continuous production, the expectation is higher than the ST final production before the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the special symbol without starting from the ST1 production after the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the special symbol. The ST confirmation effect is always displayed. That is, when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the special symbol, in this example, the ST final effect with a higher expectation is always achieved.

Next, a pseudo-continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, and a pseudo / pseudo-continuous effect will be described when the pseudo / pseudo-continuous effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side.

First, a series of productions in the pseudo-continuous production will be described. The pseudo-continuous production proceeds in the order shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (i), for example. FIG. 73 shows a case where two pseudo-continuous effects are performed.

As described above, the pseudo-continuous production is performed using the added time. (A) is a diagram showing that all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped. When the change of the decorative symbol is started, all the symbols are changing as shown in (b). After that, it stops in the order of left symbol → right symbol. (C) is a diagram showing that the left symbol has stopped. Here, the figure in which the right symbol is stopped is omitted. In this example, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped in this order, but the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped almost at the same time. After the left and right symbols are stopped, as shown in (d), the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol. At this time, the mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped is not displayed. In addition, although the illustration is omitted, the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol that temporarily stops at the middle symbol is displayed from the upper center of the screen as in the scroll display while the normal symbol fluctuation is performed by the vertical scroll display. It is displayed as a movement toward the stop position in the center of. In this way, it is possible to give the impression that the XTREME symbol suddenly appears by making the special symbol that is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol appear to resemble a normal symbol variation in the pseudo-continuous production. Then, as shown in (e), an effect image indicating that the first pseudo continuous effect is started is displayed. After that, after displaying the effect image in which all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily stopped as shown in (f), all the symbols are changing as shown in (g). After that, although the illustration is omitted, the operation is stopped in the order of the left symbol → the right symbol. After the left and right symbols are stopped, as shown in (h), the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol. Then, as shown in (i), an effect image indicating that the second pseudo continuous effect is started is displayed. After that, after displaying the effect image in which all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily stopped as shown in (j), all the symbols are changing as shown in (k). After the two pseudo-continuous effects are performed in this way, the left and right symbols stop as shown in (l), and when the reach effect is performed, the middle symbol continues to fluctuate to reach. The effect image is displayed, and if the reach effect is not performed, the middle symbol is stopped and the result of the special lottery is displayed.

Next, a series of productions in the pseudo-continuous production will be described. For example, the pseudo-continuous production proceeds in the order shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (k). FIG. 74 shows a case where two pseudo-continuous productions are performed.

As described above, the pseudo-continuous production is performed within the variable time. (A) is a diagram showing that all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped. When the change of the decorative symbol is started, all the symbols are changing as shown in (b), (c) and (d). Note that (b) is a diagram showing an ST1 effect, (c) is a diagram showing an ST2 effect, and (d) is an ST2 final effect. In this example, after the ST2 finalization effect is displayed, the middle symbol is provisionally a "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol, as shown in (e), with the fluctuations of the left symbol and the right symbol maintained. Stop. At this time, the mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are changed is not displayed. Therefore, in terms of appearance, it is difficult to distinguish the middle symbol from the case where the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the special symbol (see FIG. 73 (d)) in the pseudo-continuous production. In addition, although the illustration is omitted, the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol that temporarily stops at the middle symbol is displayed from the upper center of the screen as in the scroll display while the normal symbol fluctuation is performed by the vertical scroll display. It is displayed as a movement toward the stop position in the center of. In this way, as in the case of the pseudo-continuous production, the impression that the XTREME symbol suddenly appeared by making the special symbol that temporarily stops at the middle symbol in the pseudo-continuous production look like a normal symbol variation. Can be given. Then, as shown in (f), an effect image indicating that the first fake pseudo-continuous effect is started is displayed. Also at this time, it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance when the effect image indicating that the first pseudo continuous effect is started is displayed (see FIG. 73 (e)). Then, although the ST2 finalized effect has already been displayed, the ST3 finalized effect of (g) is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the special symbol. In this ST3 final production, all the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the pseudo-continuous production, the middle symbol temporarily stops at the special symbol while the fluctuations of the left and right symbols are maintained, so all of the left, middle, and right symbols are as in the pseudo-continuous production. The effect image (see FIG. 73 (f)) in which is temporarily stopped is not displayed. After that, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol, as shown in (h), while the fluctuations of the left symbol and the right symbol are maintained. Also at this time, since the mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are changed is not displayed, it should be distinguished from the appearance when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the special symbol in the pseudo-continuous production (see FIG. 73 (h)). Is difficult. Then, as shown in (i), an effect image indicating that the second pseudo-continuous effect is started is displayed. Also at this time, it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance when the effect image indicating that the second pseudo continuous effect is started is displayed (see FIG. 73 (i)). Then, although the ST3 finalized effect has already been displayed, the ST5 finalized effect of (j) is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the special symbol (ST4 skipped). In this ST5 final production, all the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Even after the effect image indicating that the second pseudo-continuous effect is started is displayed, the effect image in which all the symbols are temporarily stopped is displayed because the fluctuations of the left symbol and the right symbol are maintained. Not done. Then, after the two pseudo-continuous effects are performed, the left and right symbols are stopped as shown in (k), and when the reach effect is performed, the reach effect is performed with the middle symbol continuing to fluctuate. If the image is displayed and the reach effect is not performed, the middle symbol is stopped and the result of the special lottery is displayed. In FIG. 74, since the ST5 final effect is displayed, the reach effect is performed.

As described above, in the pseudo-ream effect, unlike the pseudo-ream effect, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the special symbol while the fluctuations of the left symbol and the right symbol are maintained. Therefore, while shortening the fluctuation time, the player is given a high expectation by efficiently displaying the definite effect for the step with higher expectation when the middle symbol temporarily stops at the special symbol. It becomes possible. Moreover, a special symbol (both "XTREME" symbols) that is common to both the pseudo-continuous production and the fake pseudo-continuous production is used, and further, the display mode when the middle symbol is stopped at the special symbol is displayed. Since it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between the pseudo-continuous production and the fake pseudo-continuous production, the player can expect the same degree of expectation as when the pseudo-continuous production is performed without performing the pseudo-continuous production. Can be given to. Needless to say, the symbol displayed as the special symbol does not necessarily have to be the medium symbol.

Finally, a series of productions in the pseudo / fake pseudo-continuous production in which both the pseudo-continuous production and the fake pseudo-continuous production are performed will be described. The pseudo / counterfeit pseudo-continuous production proceeds in the order shown in FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (u), for example. FIG. 75 shows a case where the middle symbol is temporarily stopped three times with the “XTREME” symbol as a special symbol in the order of fake pseudo-ream effect (first time) → pseudo-ream effect → fake pseudo-ream effect (second time). ing.

As described above, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed using the added time, and the fake pseudo-continuous effect is performed within the variable time. (F) is an effect image showing that the first pseudo-continuous effect is started, (j) is an effect image showing that the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and (s) is the second effect image. It is an effect image which shows that a pseudo continuous effect is started.

(A) is a diagram showing that all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped. When the change of the decorative symbol is started, all the symbols are changing as shown in (b), (c) and (d). (B) is a diagram showing an ST1 effect, (c) is a diagram showing an ST2 effect, and (d) is an ST2 final effect. In this example, after the ST2 finalization effect is displayed, the middle symbol is provisionally a "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol, as shown in (e), with the fluctuations of the left symbol and the right symbol maintained. Stop. At this time, the mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are changed is not displayed. Then, as shown in (f), an effect image indicating that the first fake pseudo-continuous effect is started is displayed. Then, although the ST2 finalized effect has already been displayed, the ST3 finalized effect of (g) is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the special symbol. In this ST3 final production, all the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the pseudo-continuous production, the middle symbol temporarily stops at the special symbol while the fluctuations of the left and right symbols are maintained, so all of the left, middle, and right symbols are as in the pseudo-continuous production. The effect image (see FIG. 73 (f)) in which is temporarily stopped is not displayed. After that, it stops in the order of left symbol → right symbol. (H) is a diagram showing that the left symbol has stopped. Here, the figure in which the right symbol is stopped is omitted. In this example, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped in this order, but the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped almost at the same time. After the left and right symbols are stopped, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol, as shown in (i). At this time, the mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped is not displayed. Then, as shown in (j), an effect image indicating that the pseudo continuous effect is started is displayed. However, here, it is not distinguished whether the pseudo-continuous production is started or the fake pseudo-continuous production is started, and it is shown that it is the second time together with the fake pseudo-continuous production. After that, after displaying the effect image in which all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily stopped as shown in (k), all the symbols are changing as shown in (l). Then, when the pseudo-continuous production is started, unlike when the pseudo-continuous production is started, although it is started from the ST1 production as shown in (m), the confirmed production already displayed (here, ST3). It is assured that it will progress to a higher level than the final production). In addition, (n) is ST2 production, (o) is ST3 production, (p) is ST4 production, and (q) is ST4 final production. After that, as shown in (r), the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol while the fluctuations of the left symbol and the right symbol are maintained. Then, as shown in (s), an effect image indicating that the (second) pseudo-continuous effect is started is displayed. However, here, it is not distinguished whether the pseudo-ream effect is started or the fake pseudo-ream effect is started, and it is shown that it is the third time together with the first fake pseudo-ream effect and the pseudo-ream effect. .. Then, although the ST4 finalized effect has already been displayed, the ST5 finalized effect of (t) is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the special symbol. In this ST5 final production, all the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. It should be noted that even after the effect image indicating that the third time is started is displayed together with the first fake pseudo-ream effect and the pseudo-ream effect, all the symbols are displayed because the fluctuations of the left symbol and the right symbol are maintained. The effect image that is temporarily stopped is not displayed. After that, as shown in (u), when the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and the reach effect is performed, the reach effect image is displayed with the middle symbol continuing to fluctuate, and the reach effect is not performed. The middle symbol is stopped and the result of the special lottery is displayed. In FIG. 75, since the ST5 final effect is displayed, the reach effect is performed.

In this way, in a series of productions in the pseudo-fake pseudo-continuous production, when the middle symbol temporarily stops at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol while the fluctuations of the left symbol and the right symbol are maintained (FIG. 75 (Fig. 75). (e) and FIG. 75 (r)) and when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the “XTREME” symbol as a special symbol while the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (FIG. 75 (i)), the appearance is The display mode is indistinguishable or difficult. Further, an effect image (FIGS. 75 (g) and 75 (s)) indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and an effect image (FIG. 75 (j)) indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is started. Can distinguish how many times the fake pseudo-ream effect and the pseudo-ream effect are combined, but it is impossible or difficult to distinguish whether the fake pseudo-repeated effect is started or the pseudo-ream effect is started. The display mode is as follows. As a result, the effect that combines the pseudo interlocking variation and the fake pseudo-ream effect can be performed more times than the pseudo-ream number N determined on the main control board 4100 side without lengthening the fluctuation time unnecessarily. As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute the production with an expectation degree higher than the expectation degree corresponding to the pseudo-ream number N determined on the main control board 4100 side.

Further, until now, it has been the mainstream that the pseudo-continuous production is started when the last stopped symbol is stopped at a special symbol, but in the present embodiment, the fluctuations of the left symbol and the right symbol are maintained. In this state, only the middle symbol stops at the special symbol, and the pseudo-ream effect is started. As a result, the medium symbol, which is originally a symbol that is not stopped first, suddenly stops at a special symbol, and the pseudo-continuous production is started, giving the player the impression that the expectation level has been stepped up. You can also do it.

Further, in the conventional pseudo-ream effect, each time the number of pseudo-reams increases, the step-up effect is executed from the first stage ST1 effect in each pseudo-ream effect, so that the expectation is given by the increase in the number of pseudo-reams. There was a gap between the timing when the step-up effect was reached and the timing when the expectation level was given when the step-up effect reached the final stage (that is, there was time for the pseudo-continuous effect). In this respect, in the pseudo-ream effect of this example, the number of times the special symbol is displayed (the number of pseudo-reams + the number of pseudo-reams) has increased because the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the XTREME symbol as a special symbol. Since it is displayed that the step-up effect stage has been completed after the expectation degree giving timing by, the expectation degree giving timing and the step-up effect stage have been completed due to the increase in the number of times the special symbol is displayed. The time between the timing of giving the expectation level by the display indicating the fact is shorter than before (almost the same timing), and it is possible to give a unified degree of expectation to the player, and it is understood that the degree of expectation has increased. It will be easier to do.

In this example, the fluctuation pattern and the number of pseudo-reams are determined by different lottery, and the added value is added to the fluctuation time according to the number of pseudo-reams, and the added addition time is used for the pseudo-ream. Although the production is performed, not limited to this, even if the number of pseudo-reams is incorporated into the fluctuation pattern and the number of pseudo-reams is determined at the same time, the peripheral control board 4140 side is used for the pseudo-ream. A production lottery may be performed, and a pseudo-continuous production may be performed using the variable time.

[12-6. Third variant of pseudo-continuous production]
The third modification of the pseudo-continuous production will be described below. This third modification is also a control in the normal gaming state, and is performed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the upper starting port 2101. Further, as in the second modification, the pseudo-continuous effect according to the third modification does not exclude execution based on the entry of the game ball into the lower start opening 2102.

Also in the third modification, the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect described in the second modification are performed. In the second modification, the effect performed over (N + G) times in which the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect are combined (hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect are collectively referred to as "repeated effect"). , Is executed in the symbol variation effect performed based on the establishment of the variation condition for the start information. More specifically, in the second modification, for the pseudo-ream number N determined based on the result of the variation type determination process performed on the main control board 4100 side, the counterfeit pseudo performed on the peripheral control board 4140 side. When the fake pseudo-ream number G is added as a result of the continuous production lottery, the repetitive effect that combines the pseudo-ream effect and the fake pseudo-ream effect is repeated (N + G) times, and the variable condition for the start information is changed. It is performed in the variation production of the design that is performed based on the establishment. On the other hand, in the third modification, for the pseudo-ream number N determined based on the result of the variation type determination process performed on the main control board 4100 side, the counterfeit pseudo performed on the peripheral control board 4140 side. When the number of counterfeit pseudo-reams G is added as a result of the continuous production lottery, the repeated production of (N + G) times is performed based on the establishment of the fluctuation condition for the start information. Not only in the effect (hereinafter referred to as "variation effect of the symbol for the start information"), but also for the symbol performed based on the establishment of the variation condition for the start information held before the start information. It is also possible to perform a variation effect (hereinafter referred to as "a variation effect of a symbol for prior start information"). The symbol variation effect for the future start information is not only the symbol variation effect for the start information held one before the start information, but also the start information reserved two times before the start information. It also includes a variation effect of the design of. However, it is also possible to include a variation effect of the symbol for the start information held three or more before the start information.

However, in this example, the pseudo-ream effect of a part of the pseudo-ream number N is not performed in the variation effect of the symbol for the first start information, and the pseudo-ream number of fake is performed as the processing on the peripheral control board 4140 side. A part of G is configured so that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the variation effect of the symbol for the first start information. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous effect of the pseudo-continuous number N is performed between the start of the variation of all the symbols and the start of the normal reach effect.

Further, when the repeated effect of (N + G) times is performed by the variation effect of the symbol for the start information and the variation effect of the symbol for the first start information, it is necessary to have an apparent continuity. Even if the information is based on the entry of the game ball into the lower start port 2102, the repeat effect is performed in the pattern variation effect for the future start information.

In the third modification, the variation pattern table of FIG. 47 used as the process on the main control board 4100 side and the process on the peripheral control board 4140 side, the effect setting process of FIG. 51, the decorative pattern variation process of FIG. 52, and FIG. 53. A diagram showing a story reach setting process, an effect selection pattern table of FIG. 54, a pseudo-continuous effect setting process of FIG. 60, a pseudo-continuous effect control process of FIG. 61, an effect pattern table of FIG. 62, and an effect example of the pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 63. , The timing chart of FIG. 64, the figure explaining the control timing of the pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 65, the figure explaining the control timing of the special pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 66, and the time chart of FIG. 72 are not used, but other The processing of is common to the above-mentioned processing.

The third modification of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and 76 to 82. 69 to 71 are as described above. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a pseudo-continuous production timing lottery. FIG. 77 is an example of a timing lottery table used for the fake pseudo-ream effect timing lottery when the number of special symbol stop times (fake pseudo-ream effect number G) is 1, and (a) a table for variable type 10H. These are (b) a table for variable type 11H, (c) a table for variable type 12H, and (d) a table for variable type 13H. FIG. 78 is an example of a timing lottery table used for the fake pseudo-continuous production timing lottery when the number of special symbol stop times (fake pseudo-continuous production number G) is 2, and (a) a table for variable type 10H. (B) A table for variable type 11H, and (c) a table for variable type 12H. FIG. 79 is an example of a timing lottery table used for the fake pseudo-ream effect timing lottery when the number of special symbol stop times (fake pseudo-ream effect number G) is 3, and is a table for variable type 11H.

Also in the third modification, steps S261 to S2670 of the pseudo-continuous production lottery shown in FIG. 69 are performed in the same manner as in the second modification. However, in this third modification, a unique process is performed in the pseudo-continuous production timing lottery in step S2680. A pseudo-continuous production timing lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 76.

In the fake pseudo-ream effect timing lottery, first, in step S26802, it is determined whether or not the fake pseudo-ream effect has been won for the start information, that is, whether or not the number of special symbol stops is one or more. When it is determined that the start information has been won in the pseudo-continuous production (YES in step S26802), the start information is held before the start information and the change is not started yet and the state is put on hold. It is determined whether or not there is the start information of the false target flag-on (F = 1) in the certain start information (step S26804). The fake pseudo-target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the start information (starting information determined to perform the pseudo-ream effect) is the target of the fake pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the "starting information held before the starting information" includes not only the starting information held based on the winning of the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 but also the game ball to the lower starting port 2102. It also includes start-up information that is reserved based on the winning. This is because, as described above, when the repeated effect of (N + G) times is performed by the variation effect of the symbol for the start information and the variation effect of the symbol for the first start information, it is necessary to have an apparent continuity. is there.

It is determined that there is no start information of the false target flag-on (F = 1) in the start information that is held before the start information and is in the hold state without starting the fluctuation. (YES in step S26804), the false target flag is turned on for the start information (step S26806). Then, the process proceeds to step S26808, and the counterfeit pseudo-continuous production timing lottery is performed using the timing lottery table according to the number of counterfeit pseudo-continuous productions and the status value. The details of this pseudo-continuous production timing lottery will be described later.

Then, the process proceeds to step S26810 to set the pre-variable counter-counter BK (step S26810) and set the variable counter-counter K (step S26812).

It should be noted that when it is determined that the lottery for the pseudo-continuous production has not been won (NO in step S26802), and the start information is held before the start information and the change is not started yet. When it is determined that the start information in the state includes the start information of the fake pseudo target flag-on (F = 1) (NO in step S step S26804), the fake pseudo is used in the effect of changing the symbol for the start information. Since the continuous production is not performed, the processing of the pseudo-continuous production timing lottery is completed.

The pre-variable counter-counter BK is set when it is determined to perform the pseudo-continuous effect in the variation effect of the symbol for the first start information, and is held two times before the start information. When the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in both the variation effect of the symbol for the start information and the variation effect of the symbol for the start information held one before the start information, the pre-variation pseudo counter BK 2 is set to. In addition, in the variation effect of the symbol for the start information held two times before the start information, the counter-counter-counter effect is not performed, and the symbol for the start information reserved one before the start information is not performed. When the fake pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the fluctuating effect, 1 is set in the pre-variable fake pseudo counter BK. Further, the variable fake counter K is set when it is determined that the fake pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed in the variable effect of the symbol for the dynamic information.

Next, the pseudo-continuous production timing lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. In addition, "pre-variation" shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 means a variation effect of a symbol for the start information held one before the start information, and "pre-previous variation" means the start information. It means a variation effect of the symbol about the start information held two times before. In addition, "fluctuation" and "initial fluctuation" are the period from the start of the fluctuation of all the symbols on the left, middle, and right to the execution of the first pseudo-continuous production (that is, the non-execution period of the pseudo-continuous production). "2nd variation" means the period during the 1st pseudo-continuous production, "3rd variation" means the period during the 2nd pseudo-continuous production, and "4th variation" means the period during the 2nd pseudo-continuous production. It means the period during the third pseudo-continuous production. Furthermore, the "first fluctuation (4th second of fluctuation)" means the 4th second after the fluctuation of all the left, middle, and right symbols is started, and the "first fluctuation (8th second of fluctuation)" is the left. It means the 8th second after the fluctuation of all the symbols on the middle and right starts. "2nd fluctuation (4th second of fluctuation)" means 4 seconds after the start of the 1st pseudo-continuous production, and "2nd fluctuation (8th second of fluctuation)" means the 1st pseudo-continuous production. Means the 8th second since the start of. Similarly, the "third fluctuation (fourth second of fluctuation)" means the fourth second after the start of the second pseudo-continuous production, and the "third fluctuation (8th second of fluctuation)" is the second. It means the 8th second from the start of the pseudo-continuous production, and "4th variation (4th second of fluctuation)" means the 4th second after the start of the 3rd pseudo-continuous production, and "4th variation". (Fluctuation 8th second) ”means the 8th second after the start of the third pseudo-continuous production. It should be noted that the reason why the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous production is set to "4th second" or "8th second" is to correspond to PT1 or PT2 (see FIG. 70) which is a loss fluctuation.

It should be noted that when the pseudo-continuous effect timing is determined to be "pre-variation", when the variation effect of the symbol for the start information held one before the start information is completed (all symbols are fixed and stopped). In the substantially central part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side (a place that is easily visible to the player), the stop display is displayed in the same manner as when the pseudo-continuous production image is performed (in this example). , The middle symbol is stopped and displayed with the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol). Similarly, when the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effect timing is determined to be "pre-variation", as described above, when the symbol variation effect for the start information held two times before the start information ends ( When all the symbols are fixed and stopped) and when the variation effect of the symbols for the start information held one before the start information is finished (when all the symbols are fixed and stopped), the game board At the substantially central part of the screen of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 (a place easily visible to the player), the stop display is displayed in the same manner as when the pseudo-continuous production image is performed (in this example, "XTREME" as a special symbol is displayed. "The middle symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol). As a result, even when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed over the variation effect of the symbols for a plurality of start information, it is possible to perform an effect that is more comfortable than before. However, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed across a variable effect of the symbol for a plurality of start information, the pseudo-continuous effect image is performed in the substantially central part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. Although the stop is displayed in the same mode, it is difficult for the player to notice (for example, it is small in the upper right corner of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side (a place that is difficult for the player to see)), and the true stop mode (special). It is preferable to display a symbol stop mode) indicating that the result of the lottery is a loss.

First, when the number of counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects G is 1, the timing at which the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

When the result (status value) of the variation type determination process is 10H (when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is 0), as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the timing at which the false continuous effects are executed is the timing. It is determined to be one of patterns 1 to 4 (hereinafter, "timing pattern" is referred to as "TP". The same applies to FIGS. 77 to 79). The probability of being determined by any of TP1 to TP4 is 1/4, which is the same probability. However, TP4 is determined only when it develops into SP reach (only when the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 70 is PT6 to PT11), and when it does not develop into SP reach (the fluctuation pattern is PT4 or PT5). In the case), the timing pattern is determined after TP4 is excluded. Further, TP1 is determined only when the start information held one before the start information is still in the hold state, and the start information held one before the start information is determined. If it is not in the hold state, the timing pattern is determined after TP1 is excluded. If there is an excluded TP, the probability of being determined by any of the remaining TPs not excluded is not shown, but all have the same probability.

When the result (status value) of the variation type determination process is 11H (when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is one), as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the timing at which the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects are executed is TP1. It is determined to be one of ~ TP6. The probability of being determined as one of TP1 to TP6 is 1/6, which is the same probability. However, TP6 is determined only when it develops into SP reach (only when the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 70 is PT6 to PT11), and when it does not develop into SP reach (the fluctuation pattern is PT4 or PT5). In the case), the timing pattern is determined after TP6 is excluded. Further, TP1 is determined only when the start information held one before the start information is still in the hold state, and the start information held one before the start information is determined. If it is not in the hold state, the timing pattern is determined after TP1 is excluded. If there is an excluded TP, the probability of being determined by any of the remaining TPs not excluded is not shown, but all have the same probability.

When the result (status value) of the variation type determination process is 12H (when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is 2), as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the timing at which the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects are executed is TP1. ~ TP8 is determined. The probability of being determined as one of TP1 to TP8 is 1/8, which is the same probability. However, TP8 is determined only when it develops into SP reach (only when the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 70 is PT6 to PT11), and when it does not develop into SP reach (the fluctuation pattern is PT4 or PT5). In the case), the timing pattern is determined after TP8 is excluded. Further, TP1 is determined only when the start information held one before the start information is still in the hold state, and the start information held one before the start information is determined. If it is not in the hold state, the timing pattern is determined after TP1 is excluded. If there is an excluded TP, the probability of being determined by any of the remaining TPs not excluded is not shown, but all have the same probability.

When the result (status value) of the variation type determination process is 13H (when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is 3), as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the timing at which the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects are executed is TP1. It is determined to be one of ~ TP10. In this case, since the sum of the number of pseudo-continuous productions N and the number of pseudo-continuous productions G is 4, it is a definite production that the result of the special lottery is a win. Here, the probability of being determined by any of TP1 to TP10 is 1/10, which is the same probability. However, TP10 is determined only when it develops into SP reach (only when the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 70 is PT7, 9, 11) and does not develop into SP reach (the fluctuation pattern is PT5). In the case), the timing pattern is determined after TP10 is excluded. Further, TP1 is determined only when the start information held one before the start information is still in the hold state, and the start information held one before the start information is determined. If it is not in the hold state, the timing pattern is determined after TP1 is excluded. If there is an excluded TP, the probability of being determined by any of the remaining TPs not excluded is not shown, but all have the same probability.

Next, when the number of counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects G (the number of times of special symbol stop) is 2, the timing at which the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 78.

When the result (status value) of the variation type determination process is 10H (when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is 0), as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the timing at which the pseudo-continuous effects are executed is TP1. It is determined to be one of ~ TP6. The probability of being determined as one of TP1 to TP6 is 1/6, which is the same probability. However, regarding TP3, TP5, and TP6, they are determined only when they develop into SP reach (only when the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 70 are PT6 to PT11), and when they do not develop into SP reach ( When the fluctuation pattern is PT5), the timing pattern is determined after excluding TP3, TP5, and TP6. Further, TP1, TP2, or TP3 is determined only when the start information held one before the start information is still in the hold state, and is held one before the start information. If the start information is not in the hold state, the timing pattern is determined after excluding TP1, TP2, and TP3. If there is an excluded TP, the probability of being determined by any of the remaining TPs not excluded is not shown, but all have the same probability.

When the result (status value) of the variation type determination process is 11H (when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is one), as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the timing at which the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects are executed is TP1. It is determined to be one of ~ TP16. The probability of being determined by any of TP1 to TP16 is 1/16, which is the same probability. However, for TP6, TP10, TP13, TP15 and TP16, these are determined only when the SP reach develops (only when the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 70 is PT6 to PT11), and the SP reach is determined. If it does not develop (when the fluctuation pattern is PT5), the timing pattern is determined after excluding TP6, TP10, TP13, TP15 and TP16. Further, TP1 is determined only when the start information held two times before the start information is still in the hold state, and the start information held two times before the start information is determined. If it is not in the hold state, the timing pattern is determined after TP1 is excluded. Further, one of TP1 to TP6 is determined only when the start information held one before the start information is still in the hold state, and is held one before the start information. If the start information is not in the hold state, the timing pattern is determined after excluding TP1 to TP6. If there is an excluded TP, the probability of being determined by any of the remaining TPs not excluded is not shown, but all have the same probability.

When the result (status value) of the variation type determination process is 12H (when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is 2), as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the timing at which the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects are executed is TP1. It is determined to be one of ~ TP29. In this case, since the sum of the number of pseudo-continuous productions N and the number of pseudo-continuous productions G is 4, it is a definite production that the result of the special lottery is a win. The probability of being determined by any of TP1 to TP29 is 1/29, which is the same probability. As can be seen from FIG. 70 (c), in this case, since only the fluctuation patterns of PT7, PT9 and PT11 are applicable, SP reach always develops. It should be noted that TP1 is determined only when the start information held two times before the start information is still in the hold state, and the start information held two times before the start information is determined. If it is not in the hold state, the timing pattern is determined after TP1 is excluded. Further, it is determined as one of TP1 to TP8 only when the start information held one before the start information is still in the hold state (however, in order to be determined as TP1). , The start information held two times before the start information must still be in the hold state), and if the start information held one before the start information is not in the hold state, TP1 ~ The timing pattern is determined after TP8 is excluded. If there is an excluded TP, the probability of being determined by any of the remaining TPs not excluded is not shown, but all have the same probability.

Next, when the number of counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects G (the number of times the special symbol is stopped) is 3, the timing at which the pseudo-continuous effects are executed will be described with reference to FIG.

As can be seen from FIG. 70, the number of counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects G is 3 only when the result (status value) of the variation type determination process is 11H, and as shown in FIG. 79, the counterfeit pseudo-continuous production is performed. The timing at which the continuous effect is executed is determined to be one of TP1 to TP25. In this case, since the sum of the number of pseudo-continuous productions N and the number of pseudo-continuous productions G is 4, it is a definite production that the result of the special lottery is a win. The probability of being determined as one of TP1 to TP25 is 1/25, which is the same probability. As can be seen from FIG. 70 (b), in this case, since only the fluctuation patterns of PT7, PT9 and PT11 are applicable, SP reach always develops. It should be noted that one of TP1 to TP5 is determined only when the start information held two times before the start information is still in the hold state, and is held two times before the start information. If the start information is not in the hold state, the timing pattern is determined after excluding TP1 to TP5. Further, it is determined to be one of TP1 to TP15 only when the start information held one before the start information is still in the hold state (however, it is determined to be one of TP1 to TP5). The start information held two times before the start information must also be in the hold state), and the start information held one before the start information is put in the hold state. If not, the timing pattern is determined after excluding TP1 to TP15. If there is an excluded TP, the probability of being determined by any of the remaining TPs not excluded is not shown, but all have the same probability.

In this way, the counterfeit pseudo-ream effect lottery performed on the peripheral control board 4140 side is performed for the pseudo-ream number N determined based on the result of the variation type determination process performed on the main control board 4100 side. As a result, when the fake pseudo-ream number G is added, the execution timing of the fake pseudo-ream effect includes not only the variation effect of the symbol for the start information but also the variation effect of the symbol for the first start information. It is determined.

In this example, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79, the execution timing lottery for the pseudo-continuous production is determined with the same probability for any of the plurality of timing patterns. Will be done. However, instead of this, the timing pattern to be determined may be biased so that when a specific timing pattern is determined, the expectation for the result of the special lottery is high. For example, when the timing pattern is determined to execute the pseudo-continuous effect during SP reach, or when it is determined to be "previous variation" and "previous variation" (two and one before the start information). The expectation for the special lottery is higher than when it is decided to perform the pseudo-continuous production in the pattern variation production for each start information held before) compared to the case where the other timing patterns are determined. It is more preferable to make it. In particular, in this example, the SP has a higher expectation for the result of the special lottery than the normal reach after passing through the normal reach where the expectation for the result of the special lottery (the expectation that the result of the special lottery is a hit) is the predetermined expectation. Since it develops into reach, even if the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol develops into SP reach with a small number of temporary stops before the start of normal reach, expectations for the result of the special lottery are greatly increased. Therefore, when the timing pattern is determined to execute the pseudo-continuous production during SP reach, the expectation for the special lottery is higher than when it is determined to be another timing pattern. , It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation until the lottery result is displayed, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Here, another example of the pseudo-continuous production timing lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In this alternative example, the execution timing lottery of the pseudo-continuous production is performed with a bias for each of a plurality of timing patterns. FIG. 80 is another example of the timing lottery table used for the fake pseudo-continuous production timing lottery when the number of special symbol stops is 2 and the variable type 11H. (A) The case where the result of the special lottery is a win. Table, (b) A table when the result of the special lottery is lost. However, in FIG. 80, the table is for the case where the number of special symbol stops is 2 and the variation type 11H is used. However, this is explained as an example, regardless of the number of special symbol stops and the variation type. Needless to say, the execution timing lottery for the pseudo-continuous production may be performed with a bias for each of a plurality of timing patterns.

In this alternative example, when the result of the special lottery is a win, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the timing at which the pseudo-continuous production is executed is determined by one of TP1 to TP6, but the counterfeit The execution timing of the pseudo-continuous production is biased so that the probability of being determined by TP6, TP10, TP13, TP15, and TP16 including the SP reach is relatively high. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is lost, as shown in FIG. The TP13, TP15, and TP16 are biased so that the probability of being determined is relatively low. As a result, it is possible to give a high expectation to the player when the pseudo-continuous production is executed during the SP reach.

In addition, when the result of the special lottery is a hit, if you look closely at FIG. 80 (a), the two pseudo-continuous productions are "pre-variation" (about the start information held one before the start information). The TP6 executed during the SP reach is the most biased. The relationship between the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous production and the degree of expectation for the result of the special lottery is SP reach> "previous fluctuation, pre-previous fluctuation"> the fluctuation (first fluctuation, second fluctuation). In addition, among the fluctuations, the result of the special lottery is that the fake pseudo-ream effect is executed during the second pseudo-ream effect than the case where the fake pseudo-ream effect is executed during the first pseudo-ream effect. Expectations are high. Furthermore, "previous fluctuation" (a change effect of the symbol for the start information held two times before the start information) and "pre-change" (start information held one before the start information) Expectations for the result of the special lottery when the fake pseudo-ream effect is executed with (the fluctuation effect of the symbol) than when the fake pseudo-ream effect is executed with the "pre-variation" and "the fluctuation". The degree is high.

However, in FIG. 80, TP6, TP10, TP13, TP15 and TP16 are determined only when the SP reach is developed (only when the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 70 is PT6 to PT11), and the SP reach is determined. If it does not develop (when the fluctuation pattern is PT5), it is determined to be one of TP1 to TP5, TP7 to TP9, TP11, TP12 and TP14. In this case, the probability of being determined by any of TP1 to TP5, TP7 to TP9, TP11, TP12, and TP14 is not shown, but a) the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous production and the degree of expectation for the result of the special lottery. The relationship is "previous fluctuation, pre-previous fluctuation"> the fluctuation (first fluctuation, second fluctuation), b) In the fluctuation, the fake pseudo-ream effect is executed during the second pseudo-ream effect. The expectation for the result of the special lottery is higher than when the fake pseudo-ream effect is executed during the first pseudo-ream production. C) The fake pseudo-ream with "pre-previous fluctuation" and "previous fluctuation". The requirement that the expectation for the result of the special lottery is higher when the production is executed than when the pseudo-continuous production is executed with the "pre-variation" and the "corresponding fluctuation". It is preferably set to meet.

Next, a pseudo-continuous effect setting process performed as a process on the peripheral control board 4140 side at the start of fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect setting process performed as a process on the peripheral control board 4140 side at the start of fluctuation.

First, it is determined whether or not the fake pseudo-target flag is off (F = 0) (step S3000). That is, it is determined whether or not the starting information from which the variation effect of the symbol is about to be started is not the starting information (starting information determined to perform the pseudo-continuous effect) that is the target of the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, if it is determined that the start information is not the target of the pseudo-continuous effect, the process proceeds to YES, and if it is determined that the start information is the target of the pseudo-continuous effect, the process proceeds to NO.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the prevariation pseudo-counter BK is greater than 0. Here, if it is determined that the prevariation pseudo-counter BK is larger than 0 (YES in step S3002), the process proceeds to step S3004. The reason why the pre-variation pseudo-counter BK is determined to be larger than 0 is that the start information held after the start information in which the symbol variation effect is about to be started is the start that is the target of the counter-variation effect. If it is information. Therefore, when the pre-variation pseudo-counter BK is 0, the start information held after the start information in which the symbol variation effect is about to be started is not the start information that is the target of the pseudo-continuous effect. This means that the result is determined to be NO in step S3002.

In step S3004, it is determined whether or not the front-end pseudo-counter BK is 1, and if it is determined that the front-end pseudo-counter BK is 1, the process proceeds to step S3006, and the front-end pseudo-counter BK is not 1 (that is, the front). If it is determined that the counterfeit counter BK is 2), the process proceeds to step S3008.

In step S3006, the start information from which the symbol variation effect is about to be started is the start information immediately before the start information (starting information determined to perform the pseudo-continuous effect) that is the target of the pseudo-continuous effect. Whether it is information or not is judged. Here, if it is determined that the start information is the previous one (YES in step S3006), the process proceeds to step S3010. As described above, when the fake pseudo-ream effect is performed in the symbol variation effect for the start information held one before the start information that is the target of the fake pseudo-ream effect, the pre-variable fake counter BK Is set to 1. Here, even though it is determined in step S3004 that the front-end pseudo-counter BK is 1, the start information for which the symbol variation effect is about to be started is the start information for which the front-end pseudo-continuous effect is the target. It is determined that the start information is not the previous start information (NO in step S3006), assuming that the maximum number of start information in the pending state is 3 when the symbol variation effect is about to be started, and the counterfeit pseudo-ream This is the case where the start information to be directed is the second or third start information on hold. For example, when the start information of the second hold is the start information targeted for the pseudo-continuous effect and the front counter pseudo counter BK is 1, the symbol variation of the start information of the first hold is changed. Since the counterfeit pseudo-ream effect is performed in the production (it may be performed by the symbol variation effect regarding the target start information), the start information for which the symbol variation effect is about to be started is the counterfeit pseudo-ream effect. It is not determined to be the start information immediately before the start information targeted by (NO in step S3006).

In step S3008, the start information from which the symbol variation effect is about to be started is the start information two before the start information (starting information determined to perform the pseudo-continuous effect) that is the target of the pseudo-continuous effect. Whether it is information or not is judged. Here, if it is determined that the start information is two steps before (YES in step S3008), the process proceeds to step S3010. As described above, when the fake pseudo-ream effect is performed in the symbol variation effect for the start information held two times before the start information targeted for the fake pseudo-ream effect, the pre-variable fake counter BK Is set to 2. Here, despite the fact that the front-end pseudo-counter BK is determined to be greater than 0 in step S3002 and the front-end pseudo-counter BK is not 1 (that is, the front-end pseudo-counter BK is 2) in step S3004. It is from now on that it is determined that the start information for which the variation effect of the symbol is about to be started is not the start information two before the start information targeted for the counter-counter-continuous effect (NO in step S3008). This is a case where the maximum number of start information in the hold state when the variable effect is about to be started is three, and the start information targeted for the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effect is the third start information on hold. For example, when the start information of the third hold is the start information targeted for the pseudo-continuous production and the front counter pseudo counter BK is 2, the start information of the first and second hold is about. Since the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the variation effect of the symbol (it may be performed by the variation effect of the symbol for the target start information), the start information for which the variation effect of the symbol is about to be started is It is not determined to be the start information two before the start information that is the target of the counterfeit pseudo-ream effect (NO in step S3008).

In step S3010, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the symbol variation effect for the start information for which the symbol variation effect is about to be started is a loss variation (PT1 to PT3 shown in FIG. 70). If it is determined that the variation is a loss (YES in step S3010), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the symbol variation effect for the start information from which the symbol variation effect is about to be started is not a shortened variation (YES). Step S3012). The shortened fluctuation here corresponds to PT1 whose fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. 70. Here, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the shortened fluctuation (PT1) (YES in step S3012), the counter-variation pseudo-continuous effect is set (step S3014), and the pre-variation counter-counter BK is subtracted by 1 (YES in step S3012). Step S3016).

In step S3010, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the symbol variation effect for the start information for which the symbol variation effect is about to be started is not a loss variation (NO in step S3010), the fake pseudo-continuous effect is produced. The fake pseudo-continuous effect is not executed in the symbol variation effect for the start information for which the setting process is completed and the symbol variation effect is about to be started. Further, even when it is determined in step S3012 that the fluctuation pattern is shortened fluctuation (PT1) (NO in step S3012), the fluctuation time is too short to execute the pseudo-ream effect, so that the pseudo-ream effect cannot be executed. The effect setting process is completed, and the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed in the symbol variation effect for the start information for which the symbol variation effect is about to be started.

Returning to step S3000, if it is determined that the false target flag is not off (F = 0) (NO in step S3000), the process proceeds to step S3018. In step S3000, NO is determined because the starting information from which the symbol variation effect is about to be started is the starting information (starting information determined to perform the pseudo-continuous effect) that is the target of the pseudo-continuous effect. ).

In step S3018, it is determined whether or not the prevariation pseudo-counter BK is greater than 0. Here, although it is determined in step S3000 that the counterfeit pseudo-target flag is on (NO in step S3000), it is determined that the prevariation counterfeit counter BK is greater than 0 (YES in step S3018). Is when NO is determined in step S3010 and step S3012. That is, it is determined in step S2620, step S2640, step S2660 or step S2670 that the start information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the upper start port 2101 is to be performed, and the step Even though it was decided in S2680 that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the symbol variation effect of the start information reserved before the start information, the start information reserved before the start information. When the pseudo-continuous effect cannot be executed in the variation effect of the symbol of, YES is determined in step S3018.

If YES is determined in step S3018, a re-lottery of the pseudo-continuous production is performed (step S3020). Then, in step S3022, it is determined whether or not the re-lottery of the fake pseudo-ream production has been won, and if it is determined that the re-lottery of the fake pseudo-ream production has been won (YES in step S3022), the fake pseudo-ream production timing. Is re-lottery (step S3024). Then, based on the result of this re-lottery, a pseudo-continuous production is set (step S3026). After that, in step S3028, the counterfeit pseudo-ream target flag F is turned off (F ← 0), the pre-variable counterfeit counter BK is reset (step S3030), and the counterfeit pseudo counter K is reset (step S3032).

If NO is determined in step S3018, a pseudo-continuous effect is set (step S3026). Specifically, the number of counterfeit pseudo-continuous effects G determined in step S2620, step S2640, step S2660 or step S2670, and the timing at which the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the symbol variation effect for the start information (in step S2680) The execution timing in the symbol variation effect for the determined start information) is set. If it is determined in step S3022 that the lottery has been lost (NO in step S3022), the pseudo-continuous effect is not set (step S3026 is skipped), and the process proceeds to step S3028.

It should be noted that the processes of steps S3020 to S3024 are not indispensable, and instead of these processes, it is assumed that the counter-counter continuous effect is executed in the symbol variation effect of the start information held before the start information. , Step S3026 may be performed, and the number of times the fake pseudo-ream effect is executed is determined by the pre-variable fake pseudo-counter BK and the fluctuating fake pseudo-counter K. You may re-lottery at what timing to execute the variation effect of the symbol about the information.

Here, an example of an effect mode when a pseudo-continuous effect is executed during SP reach will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a pseudo-continuous effect is executed during SP reach.

First, for example, when the left and right symbols stop at the number "7" as shown in FIG. 82 (a), the normal reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 82 (b). After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), the symbol showing the reach state in "7" moves to the upper right, and the SP reach effect is developed at the substantially center of the display area. Then, during the development of this SP reach effect, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), the symbol indicating the reach state in "7" is displayed in the upper right, and as a special symbol in the substantially center of the display area. The "XTREME" symbol appears and temporarily stops. As a result, it is possible to appeal to the player's vision that the repetitive effect has been executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (e), "3rd" indicating the number of times the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol has been stopped is displayed, and the SP reach effect is developed again. After that, when the result of the special lottery is a hit, as shown in FIG. 82 (f), as an image showing that the result of the special lottery is a win, all the identical symbols are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 82 (f), a matching symbol such as "777" is stopped as an image showing that the result of the special lottery is a hit. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is lost, as shown in FIG. 82 (g), as an image showing that the result of the special lottery is lost, the non-aligned symbols whose only the middle symbol is different from the left and right symbols are stopped. Is displayed. In FIG. 82 (g), an irregular symbol such as "767" is stopped as an image showing that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In this way, by allowing the pseudo-continuous production to be performed even during the SP reach production, even if the normal reach production develops into the SP reach production with a small number of stops of the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol, Since it is possible to raise the degree of expectation for the special lottery by performing the pseudo-continuous production in the SP reach production, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the result of the special lottery and suppress the decline in the interest.

According to the third modification of the pseudo-continuous effect described above, the number of times is larger than the number of pseudo-continuous effects N determined on the main control board 4100 side within the fluctuation time determined on the main control board 4100 side. , It becomes possible to perform a repetitive effect (corresponding to both a pseudo-continuous effect and a fake pseudo-continuous effect). In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the expectation for the result of the lottery increases as the number of times the repeated effect is executed increases, so that the expectation for the result of the special lottery is efficiently performed without prolonging the fluctuation time. It is possible to perform an effect that raises the degree.

In addition, the start information (the target of the pseudo-ream effect) is changed from the variable effect of the start information before the start information (the start information determined to perform the pseudo-repeated effect) that is the target of the pseudo-repeated effect. Not only can you perform an effect that raises expectations for the result of the special lottery for the start information), but you can also have time to change the symbol for the start information, and you can create a change of the symbol that is easy for the player to understand. It becomes possible. That is, if the symbol production (variable time) of the start information is prolonged unnecessarily, not only the game is delayed but also the consumption amount per unit time in the hall is reduced, which is preferable for both the player and the hall. On the other hand, if the time for the design production is shortened, the production itself will be difficult to understand, and the interest may be reduced. In this respect, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to perform a symbol variation effect that is easy for the player to understand without prolonging the time (fluctuation time) of the symbol variation effect. In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in which the degree of expectation for the lottery result increases as the number of times the repetitive effect is executed increases, the degree of expectation for the lottery result can be efficiently obtained without prolonging the fluctuation time. It is possible to perform a raising effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the SP reach effect is performed after the normal reach effect, and the expectation for the result of the special lottery is increased as the number of times the repeated effect is executed increases. It has become. Therefore, when the normal reach effect is performed after the repeated effect is performed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the SP reach effect may be developed. However, on the other hand, if the repeat effect is not performed, or even if the repeat effect is performed, the expectation for the result of the special lottery is low, such as once or twice. Even if it develops from normal reach production to SP reach production, we cannot expect much from the result of the special lottery. In that case, the SP reach production itself may become meaningless, even though it has developed into an SP reach production that originally has a relatively high expectation for the result of the special lottery. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to the timing pattern in which the pseudo-ream effect is performed before the normal reach effect is executed, the pseudo-ream effect is performed after the normal reach effect is developed into the SP reach effect. The timing pattern to be performed is also prepared. As a result, even if the repetitive effect is not performed, or even if the repetitive effect is performed only a small number of times and the SP reach effect is developed, the fake pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the SP reach effect. By doing so, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the result of the special lottery, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, a part of the fake pseudo-ream effect G out of the fake pseudo-ream number G is a variation effect of the symbol for the first start information acquired before the start information (starting information targeted for the fake pseudo-ream effect). In some cases, the condition for performing the pseudo-continuous effect in the variation effect of the symbol for the first start information is not satisfied even though it is decided to perform in. For example, if the condition for executing the repeat effect is not satisfied, such as when the variation time of the symbol variation effect of the advance start information is shortened and the variation is, the earlier start acquired before the start information. Even if it is decided to perform a repetitive effect in the variable effect of the symbol for information, it cannot be realized. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the condition for performing the pseudo-continuous effect is not satisfied in the variation effect of the symbol for the first start information, the repeat effect is not performed in the variation effect of the symbol for other start information. I am trying to execute it. In this way, when the condition for performing the repeat effect in the symbol variation effect for other start information is not satisfied even though the specific condition is satisfied (NO in step S3010 or step S3012). The presence / absence of execution, the number of executions, and the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous production for the start information are determined by re-lottery (steps S3020 to S3024). As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the pseudo-continuous effect in the variation effect of the symbol for the start information and the variation effect of the symbol for the first start information, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In this example, for the pseudo-ream number N determined based on the result of the variation type determination process performed on the main control board 4100 side, the fake pseudo-ream effect lottery performed on the peripheral control board 4140 side is performed. When the fake pseudo-ream number G is added as a result of the execution, as a process on the peripheral control board 4140 side, a fake pseudo-ream effect of a part of the fake pseudo-ream number G is a symbol for the first start information. It is designed to be performed in a variable production. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the processing on the main control board 4100 side, a part of the repeated effects (N + G) including the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect is the first start information. It may be performed in the variation effect of the symbol of. By performing the processing on the main control board 4100 side in this way, it is possible to execute not only the pseudo-continuous effect but also the pseudo-continuous effect in the variation effect of the symbol for the start information held before the start information. Therefore, the degree of freedom of production is increased. The main control board 4100 has already been determined when it is decided that the pseudo continuous effect is performed as a partial repetitive effect by the variable effect of the symbol for the start information held before the start information. The fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time is redetermined, and the redetermined fluctuation time information is sent as a command to the effect control means. On the other hand, when it is decided that the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effect is performed as a partial repetitive effect by the variable effect of the symbol for the start information held before the start information, the main control board 4100 The already determined fluctuation time information is sent as a command to the effect control means without resetting the fluctuation time. In this case, the main control board 4100 side determines whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect including the fluctuation time and the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and also determines whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect including the number of executions. To do. That is, the number of executions for each of the pseudo continuous effect and the pseudo continuous effect is determined on the main control board 4100 side. Further, in this case, the main control board 4100 determines the execution timing for each of the pseudo continuous effect and the false continuous effect. Here, the timing of each of the pseudo-continuous effect and the counterfeit pseudo-continuous effect is determined, including the variation effect of the symbol for the earlier start information held before the start information. Then, the fluctuation time, the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous effect, the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the information related to the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous effect are sent from the main control means to the effect control means. Will be done. The peripheral control board 4140 controls so that the pseudo-continuous effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are performed based on the information transmitted from the main control board 4100 as a command.

Further, in this example, in the pseudo-continuous production, all the symbols are temporarily stopped and the middle symbol is stopped at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol, and in the pseudo-continuous production, only the middle symbol is stopped while maintaining the fluctuation of the left and right symbols. It is stopped at the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol. Then, at the timing when the "XTREME" symbol as the special symbol is stopped and the pseudo-continuous effect or the pseudo-continuous effect is started, the number of stops of the special symbol (that is, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect or the pseudo-continuous effect) is shown. Images such as "1st" and "2nd" are displayed. As a result, it is possible to appeal to the player's vision the number of times the repetitive effect such as the pseudo-continuous effect or the fake pseudo-continuous effect is executed. However, instead of this, even though the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol is not actually temporarily stopped, "1st" or "2nd" as if the "XTREME" symbol as a special symbol was stopped. By displaying the progress effect such as "" or "3rd", it is possible to have a means for executing the effect of increasing the expectation that can increase the expectation for the result of the special lottery. In particular, in the pseudo-continuous production of the present embodiment, only the middle symbol is temporarily stopped by the special symbol while maintaining the variable state for the left and right symbols, so that "1st" and "1st" and "1st" and "" even though the special symbol is not stopped. Even if the progress effect such as "2nd" or "3rd" is displayed, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the repeated effect has been executed. As a result, even though, for example, less than N times of repeated effects are actually performed, the same progress effect as when N times of pseudo-ream is performed, or to the extent that it is visually indistinguishable from this It is possible to raise the degree of expectation for the result of the special lottery by performing the production. It should be noted that, for example, a special symbol is visually recognized while maintaining the fluctuating state of all the symbols so that the player can be given the recognition that the repeat effect has been executed even though the repeat effect has not been executed. It is more preferable to scroll the display slowly as much as possible to perform a progress effect such as "1st", "2nd", "3rd", or an effect similar thereto.

[13. Special figure look-ahead production]
Next, a look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the variable display will be described before the variable display of the special symbol is started. The look-ahead effect in the present embodiment is a normal look-ahead effect that is executed at the timing when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening, and a start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect is consumed at a predetermined timing. It is configured to be feasible with a continuous look-ahead effect that suggests the expectation of variable display based on it.

In the normal look-ahead effect, for example, the hold display of the start memory to be read ahead is displayed in a mode different from the usual mode. Further, in the continuous look-ahead effect, each time the start memory that is variablely displayed in advance is digested, the mode of the hold display of the start memory to be read ahead is changed. In addition to changing the mode of the hold display of the start memory, the specific effect in the story reach or the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed at the timing of changing the mode of the hold display.

[13-1. Special figure look-ahead effect control processing]
First, a special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027) of the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure look-ahead effect control process in the present embodiment. In the special figure look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing the normal look-ahead effect and a process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect are executed. The special figure look-ahead effect control process may be executed when a look-ahead effect command is received in the receive command analysis process.

The effect control program first determines whether or not the look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, the look-ahead effect execution flag is set in the reception command analysis process (step S1022 in FIG. 42) when the look-ahead effect command is received from the main control board 4100 (step S1408 in FIG. 48). If the look-ahead effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is "No"), the look-ahead effect is not executed, so the special figure look-ahead effect control process ends.

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is "Yes"), the effect control program usually performs the look-ahead effect based on the content of the look-ahead effect command corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead target. (Step S2002). At this time, the mode of the normal look-ahead effect may be changed only when the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead target.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of a normal look-ahead effect lottery table according to the present embodiment. In the normal look-ahead effect, when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening, the mode of the hold display is set regardless of the progress of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed, except when the number of hold start memories is 0. Change at a predetermined rate.

When the look-ahead effect is not executed, the hold display is "white", but when the look-ahead effect is normally executed, the display color of the hold display is determined according to the degree of expectation that the hold display will be a big hit from "white". It changes to "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow" with the probability of (Fig. 84). In addition, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the color of the hold display is set to change with a higher probability than in the case of a miss.

When the color of the hold display is selected, the effect control program executes a normal look-ahead effect setting process for setting to change to the selected color (step S2003). In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, a setting is made to change the display color of the hold display, and a setting is made to output a sound effect, turn on a lamp, or move an accessory at the timing of the change. After that, the look-ahead effect execution flag is cleared (step S2004). As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal look-ahead effect from being executed a plurality of times for one start memory.

In the present embodiment, the continuous look-ahead effect is executed only when the normal look-ahead effect is executed. That is, the player usually has a sense of expectation by the look-ahead effect at the timing when the game ball wins a prize at the starting opening, and when the mode of the hold display further changes as the game progresses, the player has a greater sense of expectation. The continuous look-ahead effect may be executed without executing the normal look-ahead effect. For example, when the number of reserved start memories is large, the continuous look-ahead effect is executed without executing the normal look-ahead effect. You may do so. In particular, it is effective when the upper start port and the lower start port can always win a prize, and these start ports are configured to be able to win a prize alternately and up to eight start memories can be held.

The effect control program determines whether or not the pre-reading effect is normally executed (step S2005). When the normal look-ahead effect is not executed (the result of step S2005 is "No"), that is, when the color of the hold display remains "white" and does not change, the special figure look-ahead effect is not executed and the special figure look-ahead effect is not executed. The effect control process ends.

When the normal look-ahead effect is executed (the result of step S2005 is "Yes"), the effect control program is a continuous look-ahead effect lottery table (based on various information included in the look-ahead effect command received from the main control board 4100). The corresponding information is acquired from FIG. 84) (step S2006), and whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect is drawn (step S2007). Various types of information include, for example, fluctuation patterns and winning information. In addition, the starting memory number (the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation) is included in the special symbol memory command transmitted at the same timing as the look-ahead effect command. As a result of the lottery, if the continuous look-ahead effect is not executed (the result of step S2007 is "No"), the special figure look-ahead effect control process ends.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous look-ahead effect lottery table in the present embodiment. Since the mode of the hold display changes over a plurality of fluctuations, the continuous look-ahead effect of the present embodiment is executed when the number of start storages is 3 or more. Further, when the result of the variation display based on the start memory is a big hit (or a high possibility of a big hit), the continuous look-ahead effect is easily executed, and the number of continuous look-aheads is likely to increase. ..

The lottery for whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect (step S2007) is based on the probability of executing the continuous look-ahead effect. Further, when the start memory of the look-ahead target does not reach, the continuous look-ahead effect is not executed.

When the effect control program executes the continuous look-ahead effect (the result of step S2007 is "Yes"), the effect control program sets the effect selection pattern acquired from the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table (step S2008). Further, the number of continuous look-ahead effects execution is set in the number of remaining effects (remaining number of look-aheads) (step S2009).

Further, the effect control program sets a range (upper limit value and lower limit value) of random numbers for selecting the continuous look-ahead effect to a specified value (initial value) (step S2010). Finally, the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2011), and the special figure look-ahead effect control process is terminated.

[13-2. Continuous look-ahead effect setting process]
Next, the continuous look-ahead effect setting process executed in the decorative symbol variation process will be described. The continuous look-ahead effect setting process is a process of controlling the look-ahead effect for the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, the hold display of the start memory of the look-ahead effect target is changed at the timing when the start memory in which the variable display game is executed is executed prior to the start memory of the look-ahead effect target. Execute the process.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuous look-ahead effect setting process of the present embodiment. The continuous look-ahead effect setting process is executed in the process of step S1524 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51).

The effect control program first determines whether or not the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2101). The continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set in the process of step S2011 of the special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 83) when the continuous look-ahead effect is executed. If the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2101 is "No"), the continuous look-ahead effect is not executed, so the continuous look-ahead effect process ends.

On the other hand, when the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2101 is "Yes"), the effect control program acquires a random number value for selecting the look-ahead effect (specific effect) to be executed (). Step S2102). Further, based on the acquired random number value, the mode of the specific effect is acquired from the continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table (FIG. 87) (step S2103), and the specific effect setting process is executed (step S2104). In the specific effect setting process, settings are made to execute the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect).

In the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) in the present embodiment, the shape of the hold display is changed according to the degree of expectation. Further, since the continuous look-ahead effect is normally executed while the look-ahead effect is executed, the shape is controlled to change when the color of the hold display is changed. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table for selecting a mode of hold display in the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the present embodiment, six types of specific effects are defined according to the degree of expectation, and a range of random numbers is set for each specific effect. For example, when the effect selection pattern is "Pattern 2", the specific effect 1 is when the random number value is 0 to 200, the specific effect 2 is when the random value is 201 to 400, ..., 901 to 1000. Specific effect 6 is selected.

Further, in the pattern 1, the specific effect 5 and the specific effect 6 having a high expectation are not selected, and in the pattern 1, all the specific effects can be executed, but the specific effect with a high expectation is specified. The range of random numbers is set so that the effect is difficult to select. On the other hand, in the pattern 4, the specific effect 1 having a low expectation is not selected, and the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 having a high expectation are easily selected. As shown in FIG. 85, pattern 1 is selected in a variation pattern with a low degree of expectation, while pattern 4 is selected when the result of the variation display game is a big hit.

If the same shape as the previously executed continuous look-ahead effect is selected, the game may proceed as it is assuming that the continuous look-ahead effect has not been executed, or the hold display blinks temporarily. The player may be notified that the continuous look-ahead effect has been executed.

Here, the description of the flowchart of FIG. 86 returns. When the specific effect setting process is executed, the effect control program subtracts 1 from the number of remaining effects (step S2105). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0, that is, whether or not all the continuous look-ahead effects (specific effects) have been executed (step S2106). When the number of remaining effects becomes 0 (the result of step S2106 is "Yes"), all the continuous look-ahead effects have been executed, so the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is cleared (step S2107). Finally, the lower limit of the random number is set to a specified value (for example, “0”) (step S2108), and the continuous look-ahead effect setting process is completed.

On the other hand, in the effect control program, when the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S2106 is "No"), that is, when all the continuous look-ahead effects are not executed, the random number value acquired in the process of step S2102. The lower limit of the random number is set based on (step S2109). For example, when the random number value extracted by the effect selection pattern "Pattern 3" is "350", the specific effect 3 is selected, so that the specific effect 1 or the specific effect 2 is not selected, that is, it falls. Set the lower limit value “201” when the specific effect 3 is selected as the lower limit value of the random number so that As a result, when the next continuous look-ahead effect is executed, a random number value in the range of "201" to "1000" is extracted in the process of step S2102, and the effect is higher than the effect executed in advance in the continuous look-ahead effect. It is possible to prevent an effect having a low degree of expectation from being executed.

In the continuous look-ahead effect, the random number extraction range may be adjusted so that the hold display changes stepwise. For example, when the effect selection pattern is "Pattern 3" and the number of continuous look-ahead executions is "3", the lower limit value is set to "0" and the upper limit value is set to "0" so that the first specified effect to be executed is 1 to 4. It is set to 600 ". At this time, if the specific effect to be executed first is 2, the lower limit value of the random number value for selecting the specific effect to be executed the second time is set to "201" and the upper limit value is set to "800". That is, the specific effect is set so that any one of 3 to 5 is selected. By doing so, the specific effect is executed so that the degree of expectation is always high (so that it will rise), and even if the specific effect 5 is selected, the specific effect 6 will be performed in the next (last) specific effect. Will be selected, and it will be possible to prevent the downfall and execute a specific effect so that the degree of expectation will surely increase. It should be noted that if the setting is made so as to surely rise, it is possible to greatly increase the expectation of the player, so that the control may be made so as to surely rise only in the case of a big hit.

[13-3. Production example]
By the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect in the continuous look-ahead effect so that a downfall does not occur. Subsequently, a specific example of the continuous look-ahead effect will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of the continuous look-ahead effect of the present embodiment.

FIG. 88A shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in a state in which the look-ahead effect is not executed. FIG. 88 (B) shows a state in which the normal look-ahead effect is executed as a result of the game ball winning a prize in the upper start opening 2101 in the state of FIG. 88 (A). After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), the decorative design is confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the reserved start memory is digested and the next variation display is started. At this time, the first continuous look-ahead effect is executed, and the specific effect 3 is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 88 (D) to (G), each time the reserved start memory is digested and the variable display is started, the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 are executed, and the shape of the hold display is changed. Change.

Then, when the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect is digested and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (FIG. 88 (H)), reach occurs (FIG. 88 (I)). In the example shown in FIG. 88 (J), SP reach 3 is executed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by making it possible to execute the look-ahead effect based on the progress of the game (changing the effect mode), the expectation of the player is further increased in the process of continuing the game. Is possible. In particular, for a variable display game that is executed after the look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect) is executed at the timing when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening until the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect is digested. There is a risk that the game interest will decline, but by changing the mode of the hold display each time the variable display game is executed, it is possible to continuously raise the expectations of the player, and the game enjoyment declines. Can be prevented.

[13-4. Deformation example of special figure look-ahead effect]
[13-4-1. Deformation example of special figure look-ahead effect control]
It is not necessary to distinguish between the normal look-ahead effect and the continuous look-ahead effect. In the above-described embodiment, in the first look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect), the mode (color) of the hold display changes at the timing when the game ball wins the start opening, and in the second and subsequent look-ahead effects (continuous look-ahead effect), the hold is held. The mode (shape) of the hold display changes at the time of digestion. In this case, only whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect is determined at the timing when the game ball wins the starting port, and the content of the specific effect (change in the hold display) is drawn at the time of hold digestion.

On the other hand, as in story reach, the contents (scenarios) of all specific effects may be drawn by lottery at the time of starting prize. For example, in the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42, FIG. 83), all specific effects are drawn by lottery. In the process of setting the look-ahead effect execution flag (step S1408) of the reception command analysis process (FIG. 48), the contents of all the specific effects may be drawn by lottery.

Further, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less at the time of starting winning and the variable display is being executed, the number of executions of the continuous look-ahead effect is set to 1, and when the number of reserved memories is 3 or more, the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table The mode of the continuous look-ahead effect may be selected based on FIG. 85) (the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table may cover all patterns). In this case, the color of the hold display may be changed in the first look-ahead effect (same as the normal look-ahead effect), the shape may be changed from the beginning, or both the color and the shape may be changed. ..

Further, when the number of times of the look-ahead effect is one, that is, when the mode of the hold display changes at the time of the start winning, and then the mode of the hold display does not change, the effect may be a very low expectation. That is, the higher the number of changes in the holding mode, the higher the expectation of the big hit, but in the case of only one change, the expectation may be low.

[13-4-2. Special Figure 2 Priority Digestion]
In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation display game in which the special symbol is variablely displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 when the game ball is won in the upper start opening 2101, and the game ball is won in the lower start opening 2102. In this case, the second special symbol variation display game in which the special symbol is variablely displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the lower start opening 2102, the variable display is started with priority over the case where the game ball wins the upper start port 2101. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect is executed based on the start memory in which the game ball wins in the upper start opening 2101, if the game ball wins in the lower start port 2102, the digestion of the start memory of the look-ahead effect target is delayed. Become.

In this way, when the variable display of the look-ahead target is interrupted, the specific effect executed immediately before may be continuously executed. Further, the specific effect based on the lottery scenario may be executed, and the specific effect to be executed last may be continuously executed for the interrupted amount.

In addition, the scenario may be reselected by the amount interrupted. At this time, a range of random numbers may be set corresponding to the scenario corresponding to the specific production that has already been executed, and a new scenario may be drawn so that the production content does not fall into the wrong direction, or the executed scenario is ignored. , The range of random numbers may be initialized and a new scenario may be drawn.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the lower start opening 2102, the specific effect may be executed only for the variable display corresponding to the start memory in which the upper start port 2101 wins, without executing the specific effect.

Further, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are configured to be executable at the same time, for example, a specific effect is performed according to the execution of the first special figure variation display game. Just do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display of the normal symbol is won, the start port solenoid 2105 is driven to open and close the movable piece 2106, so that the game ball can be awarded to the lower start port 2102. However, when the game ball alternately wins the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102, and the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are executed alternately, an interruption occurs. Does not occur. In this case, control may be performed in the same manner as when only the first special figure variation display game is executed, but since the variation display for up to eight times can be reserved, these variation display games are not distinguished and are long. It is possible to execute a series of specific effects over a period of time, and it is possible to execute a variety of effects.

[13-4-3. Deformation example of special figure look-ahead effect mode]
In the embodiment described above, the mode of the hold display has been changed, but the background of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side may be changed. Specifically, the background color may be simply changed, or a structure or a natural object having a special aspect may be arranged behind the decorative pattern or the character. For example, a cloud may be displayed and the color of the cloud may be changed according to the expectation of a big hit, or lightning may be generated from the cloud.

[14. Random number lottery variant]
In the production example described above, the range for generating random numbers (upper limit value, lower limit value) was changed to prevent the falling, but other methods may be used to prevent the falling. Good. The case where the pattern 1 of the effect selection pattern shown in FIG. 54 is selected will be described.

For example, the specific effect is selected by converting the extracted random number value by processing such as calculation without changing the random number generation range (that is, keeping the range from "0" to "1000"). You may. A specific example will be described below.

In the present invention, when "scenario 3" is selected as the specific effect, the specific effect executed immediately before is one of "scenario 1" to "scenario 3". Explaining such an example, in order to prevent the downfall, random numbers are set to be generated in the range of "0" to "600". Here, a random number in the range of "0" to "1000" is generated, and by multiplying by "600/1000" (rounded down to the nearest whole number), a random number in the range of "0" to "600" is generated. be able to.

Also, when generating random numbers in the range of "0" to "600", the remainder obtained by dividing the random numbers generated in the range of "0" to "1000" by "600" can be used as the random number value. Good. In this case, since the values from "0" to "400" are duplicated, the variation of the random numbers is biased. For example, when the division result is 1 or more, the difference between the random number generation range and the overlapping range. By adding (here 600-400 = 200) to the random number value (that is, changing the overlap range from "200" to "600"), it is set to increase the possibility of executing a scenario with high expectation. It may be possible to raise the expectation of the player.

As yet another example, when generating random numbers in the range of "0" to "1000", random numbers generated in the range of "0" to "100" are generated 10 times, and each generated random number is generated. May be added to generate a random number in the range of "0" to "1000". By configuring in this way, it is possible to set various random number ranges while keeping the actual random number range constant by setting and adding the number of random number generations according to the range of random numbers to be generated. it can. Further, the random numbers may be multiplied by a predetermined number instead of being generated a predetermined number of times. For example, a random number in the range of "0" to "1000" may be generated by multiplying the random number generated in the range of "0" to "100" by 10. Although fine distribution is not possible, similar results can be obtained if the random numbers are uniform random numbers. Further, the random number extraction method may be changed according to the effect selection pattern, and the accuracy of the random numbers extracted may be adjusted as necessary.

Further, after extracting the random number for selecting the specific effect to be executed first, the random number for selecting the subsequent specific effect may be added to the random number for selecting the preceding specific effect. .. At this time, the random number generation range may be adjusted so that the random number value after addition does not exceed the upper limit value, or the excess portion of the upper limit value may be truncated.

[15. Allowance of falling (breaking the law)]
[15-1. Production example]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effect to be continuously executed is configured to prevent a decline in the expectation of the effect content. However, even if the downfall does not occur, the result of the variable display does not always become a big hit. In addition, when a specific effect with high expectation is first executed, the flow of the subsequent effect is predicted by the player, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game cannot be enhanced.

Therefore, a modified example will be described in which, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the falling edge is allowed and the effect pattern that is normally executed is changed. The condition for allowing the fall may be determined according to, for example, a gaming state such as a probability state of the winning probability of the variable display or an operating state (time saving state) of the ordinary electric accessory. Specifically, the random number generation range is not adjusted when there is a high probability that the result of the variable display will be a big hit (high probability state, probability variation state), or when it is in a state advantageous to the player such as a time saving state. Random numbers may be allowed. On the contrary, in a state other than the probabilistic state or the time saving state, which is not advantageous to the player, the random number generation range may not be adjusted so that the random number may be reduced.

Further, the downfall may be allowed only when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. That is, the player can recognize that the big hit is confirmed when the effect of lowering the expectation is executed and the player is disappointed. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the production and enhance the interest of the game by increasing the degree of expectation when the production that is not executed in the normal flow is executed. In addition, it is possible to allow the downfall (with a low probability) even in the normal time while controlling the downfall so that it is difficult to occur, and increase the probability that the downfall will occur when the result of the variable display game is a big hit.

Further, it may be decided whether or not to allow the downfall according to the fluctuation pattern rather than the result of the fluctuation display game. For example, when a reach with high reliability (for example, story reach, SP reach 3 after pseudo-continuous production, etc.) occurs, it may be easier for a fall to occur than a reach with low reliability. On the other hand, when a reach with low reliability occurs, a drop may occur more easily than a reach with high reliability. In this way, instead of the result of the variable display game, the admissibility of the downfall may correspond to the production content.

In addition, the reliability of the fluctuation pattern when the result of the fluctuation display game is a big hit may allow a decline. For example, a high-reliability fluctuation pattern (reach) is set so that a downfall is more likely to occur than a low-reliability fluctuation pattern (reach) is selected. On the contrary, the low-reliability fluctuation pattern (reach) may be more likely to cause a downturn than the high-reliability fluctuation pattern (reach) is selected.

In addition, when the unclear mode that does not clearly notify whether the probability state of the variable display game is the normal state or the probability change state is executed after the jackpot game is completed, a random number is provided only when the actual probability state is the normal state. You may adjust the generation range of. In this case, if the probability state is a probabilistic state, the probability of winning the variable display game is high even if a downfall occurs, and as a result, the player is less likely to be discouraged. Because it does not, the story reach production is less likely to discourage the player. On the contrary, only in the case of the probability change state, the random number generation range may be adjusted to prevent the random number from falling. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the current probability state is the normal state (low probability) due to the occurrence of the downfall.

Further, in the obscure mode, the probability state may be explicitly notified when a downfall occurs without adjusting the random number generation range. Further, it may be possible to set two types of modes, a mode for adjusting the random number generation range and a mode for not adjusting the random number generation range. Further, the player may be able to select these modes. With such a configuration, the player can select whether to make the probability state recognizable at an early stage or to perform an effect with less disappointment.

[15-2. Control example]
Next, the control that allows the downfall will be described. In the present embodiment, the random number generation range has been adjusted in order to prevent the fall, but a specific procedure will be described.

For example, when allowing a fall, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the random number is reset to the specified value (initial value). In this case, there is a possibility that the downfall does not occur, but when the downfall is generated as a notification effect of the big hit, the range of random numbers may be set so as to always generate the downfall. Further, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the random number may be set to return to a predetermined step instead of the specified value (initial value). With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the probability of occurrence and the stage of the downfall.

Further, as described above, random numbers having a biased distribution may be generated by generating random numbers in a predetermined range in duplicate. In this case, the probability of occurrence of the fall (rise) may be adjusted by setting the overlapping range as the range in which the fall occurs, or conversely, the range in which the rise occurs. Further, the range of random numbers generated by setting the initial value, the minimum value, and the maximum value of the random number counter may be adjusted.

Further, the counter for updating the random number is added one by one at a predetermined timing (timer interrupt processing) as described above, but the numerical value to be added may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, 1 is added in the normal game state, and another random number is extracted and added in the high probability state (probability change state). By changing the method of updating the random number counter in this way, it is possible to change the frequency of occurrence of the downfall according to the game state.

[16. Processing when power is cut off]
Here, in the received command analysis process, the process when a power-on command or a power-on command is received will be described.

As described above, the power cut command is transmitted to the main control board 4100 when the power supply from the outside is stopped. Before the power failure command is transmitted, as described above, the power failure warning signal is output from the main control board 4100, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is executed to perform processing such as command backup. Is executed.

The peripheral control board 4140 executes processing according to the mode in which the power supply is cut off. Specifically, when the power supply from the outside is stopped and the power supply to the entire game machine (main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140) is cut off, the power supply is cut off only to the main control board 4100. In this case, the power supply may be cut off only to the peripheral control board 4140. Each case will be described below.

[16-1. When the power is cut off only on the peripheral control board]
When the power supply is cut off only to the peripheral control board 4140 due to factors such as poor wiring contact, the game control on the main control board 4100 is continued. At this time, if the stored contents of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not lost, that is, if the stored contents of the peripheral control RAM 4150c match the stored contents of the backup management target work area 4150ca, hot start is performed as described above. To resume (continue) the production control.

Even when the effect control is restarted by the hot start, the peripheral control board 4140 may notify that the power supply is temporarily cut off. The power supply cutoff notification may be, for example, displaying an initial screen when the power is turned on, or displaying a screen notifying that the power is cut off.

Further, when the power supply is cut off, there is a possibility that the time measurement (timer) on the main control board 4100 and the time measurement on the peripheral control board 4140 may be deviated from each other. For example, there is a possibility that the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the peripheral control board 4140 may be different. In this case, since the variable display of the decorative symbol ends later, the special figure synchronization effect may be ended when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received. If it is necessary to display the initial symbol at the start of fluctuation, the default lost symbol or a predetermined symbol is displayed. The predetermined symbol may be a symbol other than the jackpot, and may be a symbol dedicated to the occurrence of a power failure.

In addition, if the power is cut off during the execution of the big hit game, the time measurement deviation may be corrected at the timing when the big winning opening closing display command or the ending command indicating the transition to the next round is received.

When the stored contents of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are lost, the value 0 is written in the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c to restart the effect control as a cold start.

If an effect (variation pattern) accompanied by a specific effect is executed at the timing when the effect control is restarted as a cold start, the execution of a series of specific effects is interrupted. On the other hand, in the case of a hot start, the production may be continued as it is as long as the progress information of the specific production is retained, or the lottery result of the scenario may be discarded and the scenario may be re-lottered. When drawing a lottery for a scenario when executing each specific effect, draw a lottery for the scenario for executing the subsequent specific effect until the timing when all the last specific effect ends so that the contents of each specific effect do not conflict. Instead, the specific effect may not be executed. In either case of cold start or hot start, the execution of the specific effect may be stopped when the power supply of the peripheral control board is cut off.

[16-2. When the power is cut off only on the main control board]
When only the power supply of the main control board 4100 is cut off and the power supply of the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied, the power interruption command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 switches the effect display during execution to the screen display (abnormality notification screen) when the power is cut off. After that, when the power supply to the main control board 4100 is resumed, a command to notify the game state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 together with the power-on command. The command for notifying the game status may be integrated with the power-on command.

When the gaming state notified together with the power-on command matches the effect content currently being executed, the peripheral control board 4140 returns to the effect screen and continues the effect as it is. At this time, if it is not possible to return to the effect screen only with the information notified together with the power-on command, an effect that the player does not misunderstand is executed. For example, the case where it is not possible to return to the effect being executed is, for example, a state in which the stop result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, a round effect during the big hit game, or the like. The effect that the player does not misunderstand is, for example, that all the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at high speed during the variable display of the decorative symbols, or the decorative symbols dedicated to an abnormality are displayed. Further, if the jackpot game is in progress, it is sufficient to display only that the jackpot game is in progress without displaying the number of rounds.

In addition, if the game state and the display state currently being produced are different, the abnormality notification screen is displayed. Then, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, the normal state is restored by performing an effect corresponding to the received command. It should be noted that the abnormality notification screen may be displayed to such an extent that the player can recognize that the abnormality has occurred. At this time, if the variation display is executed in the pseudo continuous effect or the fluctuation pattern of the story reach, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and even if the continuous look-ahead effect is continuing, the subsequent execution of the specific effect (scenario lottery). ) Is canceled.

[16-3. When the power of the main control board and peripheral control board is cut off]
When the power supply to the game machine is cut off, power is supplied to the main control board 4100 from the backup power supply, and the contents stored in the RAM are retained for a predetermined period. As described above, the power failure command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

After that, when power is supplied to the game machine again, the main control board 4100 transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 4140. At this time, the main control board 4100 notifies the peripheral control board 4140 of the game state, and when the game is not stopped as in the waiting state for customers, the peripheral control board 4140 notifies that the power supply has been cut off. After executing, switch to a production that does not give a misunderstanding to the player such as waiting for customers. After that, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, the normal state is restored by performing an effect corresponding to the received command. In this case, if the variation display is executed in the pseudo continuous effect or the fluctuation pattern of the story reach, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and even if the continuous look-ahead effect is continuing, the subsequent execution of the specific effect (scenario lottery). ) Is canceled.

[16-4. Summary when power is cut off]
With the above configuration, even if the power supply to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is cut off, whether to continue the execution of the variable display in the pseudo continuous effect or the variable pattern of the story reach. Whether or not it can be judged appropriately.

[17. Pre-reading production]
Next, the normal symbol type look-ahead effect (normal symbol look-ahead effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is received from the main control board 4100, the normal symbol look-ahead effect is executed. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal map look-ahead effect control process in the present embodiment. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of a normal map look-ahead effect of the present embodiment.

When the normal figure look-ahead effect control process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2201). As described above, the normal symbol look-ahead effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (FIG. 48) when the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is received. If the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2201 is "No"), the effect control program does not execute the normal figure look-ahead effect, and thus ends this process.

On the other hand, when the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2201 is "Yes"), the effect control program determines whether or not the normal figure look-ahead effect is currently being executed (step). S2202). When the normal map look-ahead effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is "Yes"), the processes after step S2207 are executed in order to continue the running normal figure look-ahead effect.

When the effect control program is not executing the normal figure look-ahead effect (the result of step S2202 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether or not the execution condition of the normal figure look-ahead effect is satisfied (step S2203). The execution condition of the normal figure look-ahead effect determines whether or not it can be satisfied according to, for example, a game state or an execution status of another effect. When the execution condition of the normal figure look-ahead effect is not satisfied (the result of step S2203 is "No"), the effect control program clears the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag (step S2209), and ends this process.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing of executing the normal drawing look-ahead effect is not particularly limited. For example, it may be executed independently of the execution state of the variation display of the decorative symbol (special symbol synchronization effect) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 90 (A), even while the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is variablely displayed, the normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed as shown in FIG. 90 (B). Further, the execution timing of the normal drawing look-ahead effect may be the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 90, the normal figure look-ahead effect may be executed in parallel even while the special figure look-ahead effect is being executed.

On the other hand, even when a command (normal symbol type look-ahead effect command) instructing execution of the normal figure look-ahead effect is received from the main control board from the 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the normal figure look-ahead effect can be executed. Is possible. For example, when an effect that the player pays attention to (for example, a reach effect) is being executed, or when a special effect is executed during the execution of the normal figure look-ahead effect, the execution condition of the normal figure look-ahead effect is set. As a failure, the execution of the normal map look-ahead effect may be restricted. In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect of the special lottery is executed, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect of the normal lottery is restricted by the processing on the peripheral control board 4140 side so that the advance notice effect of a plurality of types is not executed at the same time. May be good.

In the normal figure look-ahead effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), a star-shaped normal figure look-ahead effect area is displayed in the upper right part of the screen, and the symbols are variedly displayed within the area ( FIG. 90 (C). Then, as a result of the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the hit (“win”, FIG. 90 (D)) and the symbol corresponding to the miss (“-”, FIG. 90 (E)) are stopped and displayed, and the result of the general drawing lottery. Is notified. The player may launch the game ball aiming at the lower starting port 2102 provided with the movable piece 2106 when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped in the normal drawing look-ahead effect area. Further, when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped, the player may be notified to shoot the game ball aiming at the lower start port 2102. At this time, in the effect control program, in order to secure the time for the player to aim and fire at the lower start port 2102, the result of the normal drawing look-ahead effect is obtained before the predetermined time when the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction. Control to be displayed.

Further, when a plurality of movable modes of the movable piece 2106 are set depending on the type of winning of the ordinary lottery, it is usually used according to the advantage for the player (easiness of winning the game ball to the lower starting port 2102). It may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the figure look-ahead effect is satisfied. For example, as a movable mode of the movable piece 2106, the time during which the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction is set to be long (long opening), or the number of times the movable piece 2106 is moved is set to be large. At this time, the advance notice of the normal drawing may be executed only in the case of the movable mode which is advantageous to the player such as the long release.

In addition, a plurality of types of symbols other than hit and miss may be defined, and stop symbols may be set according to the degree of expectation that the normal lottery will be a big hit. Further, the stop symbol may correspond to the movable mode of the movable piece 2106. As a result of winning the regular drawing lottery, if the movable piece 2106 moves in the long open mode, a stop symbol is set to notify as a hit, and in the short open mode, it is neither a hit nor a miss. It may be a stop symbol of.

In the case of a time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is short, it is not necessary to execute the normal symbol type look-ahead effect. This is because the winning probability is high, the profit for the player is small even if the result of the ordinary lottery is announced, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is short, so that it is not possible to secure sufficient time to execute the normal map look-ahead effect. That is, it may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the normal map look-ahead effect according to the game state.

When the execution condition of the normal drawing look-ahead effect is satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “Yes”), the effect control program displays the normal figure look-ahead effect area (step S2204). Then, in order to set the time for variable display of the symbol in the normal figure look-ahead effect, the normal figure look-ahead effect timer is set (step S2205), and the normal figure look-ahead effect is started (step S2206). The time until the time-up of the normal-figure look-ahead effect timer may be fixed, may depend on the game state, may depend on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, or may be a combination of these.

Further, the effect control program determines whether or not the normal figure look-ahead effect timer has timed up when the normal figure look-ahead effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “yes”) (step S2207). If the normal figure look-ahead effect timer has not timed up (the result of step S2207 is “no”), this process ends in order to continue the normal figure look-ahead effect.

On the other hand, when the normal figure look-ahead effect timer times out (the result of step S2207 is "Yes"), the effect control program stops and displays the changing symbol in order to display the look-ahead result of the normal figure lottery ( Step S2208). Finally, the normal map look-ahead effect execution flag is cleared (step S2209), and this process is terminated.

Although the above-described normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, it may be executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side. In addition to displaying on the display device, the normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed by multiple effect devices such as operating a movable accessory, emitting a light emitting body such as a lamp, and outputting sound from a speaker. It may be possible, or it may be a combination of these plurality of effect devices. When executing a general drawing look-ahead effect in combination with a plurality of production devices, in addition to the case where the normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed by a plurality of production devices at the same time, the normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed by one of the multiple production devices. You may. For example, when performing a normal map look-ahead effect on the screen display and audio output, a state in which the normal figure look-ahead effect cannot be executed by the screen display (for example, when an error is being notified or another (look-ahead) effect is being executed, etc. In the case of), the execution of the effect by the display device is restricted, and only the normal map look-ahead effect by the audio output is executed. Further, instead of restricting the execution of the normal drawing look-ahead effect, the normal drawing look-ahead effect may be executed in an overlapping manner with other effects. In this case, the production mode of the normal drawing look-ahead effect is changed. For example, the screen display may be made semi-transparent to execute the normal drawing look-ahead effect, or the volume may be reduced to output the sound.

[18. Effect, etc.]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, by dynamically changing the range of the random number value according to the game state or the like, continuous production without contradiction is executed, such as preventing the fall without complicating the control. can do.

Further, if a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied during the execution of the effect including the specific effect, the flag for executing the specific effect and the initial value of the random number are cleared. The predetermined initialization condition is, for example, a case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the effect and the effect cannot be continued.

In addition, if there is a start prize that generates a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the production, or if there is a start prize that generates a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a rare fluctuation pattern with high expectations), the game Even when the transition condition of the state (game mode) is satisfied, the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped, and the flag and the initial value of the random number are cleared.

For example, in a specification in which the variation display based on the game ball winning the lower start port 2102 described above is executed with priority over the case where the upper start port 2101 is won, the result of the variation display executed with priority is When the above initialization conditions such as a big hit are satisfied, the flag and the initial value of the random number are cleared, and the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being interrupted due to the occurrence of an event such as the occurrence of a big hit or a change in the gaming state, and being restarted in a halfway state.

Further, the present invention may be applied not only to prevent falling down, but also to execute an effect that is continuously executed and has an order.

For example, it may be applied when selecting an effect for each round in a jackpot game. In this case, the effect of each round may be selected at the start of the big hit game, or the effect content may be selected every predetermined number of rounds (for example, every 3 rounds in the big hit game of 15 rounds). Further, the common effect may be executed up to the middle round (for example, 7 rounds out of 15 rounds), and the effect content may be selected for the subsequent rounds (for example, 8 rounds or later). At this time, for example, when the start memory of the variable display game executed after the end of the big hit game includes the start memory that becomes the big hit, the effect pattern in which the special effect is easily executed is selected, and the continuous big hit is performed. You may suggest (notify) to the player that there is.

As described above, the feature of the present invention is that it is possible to execute a variety of effects without complicating control by dynamically changing the range of random numbers according to a game state or the like. Become.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to hold a notice lottery table that covers all the selection patterns of the specific effect in the story reach, the pseudo continuous effect, and the continuous look-ahead effect, the storage capacity is increased due to the diversification of the effect. Can be suppressed.

[19. Prohibition of special figure look-ahead (judgment / directing)]
Here, the control in which the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 prohibits the special figure look-ahead determination and the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure look-ahead effect will be described.

[19-1. Control on the main control board side (prohibition of special figure look-ahead judgment)]
[19-1-1. command]
First, FIGS. 91 and 92 are examples of a table for explaining the detailed contents of the command related to the special figure look-ahead among the commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 91 is an example of a table showing a command modification example of “8-10. Other” described above in FIG. FIG. 92 shows the special figure 1 symbol type command of “8-1. Special figure 1 synchronization effect related” and the special figure 2 symbol type command of “8-2. Special figure 2 synchronization effect related” described in FIG. This is an example of a table showing details. The description of the same configuration as described above will be omitted.

The start opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect. Here, when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the mode value is set to "01H", and the lower start is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109. When a game ball enters the mouth 2102, the mode value is set to "02H".

Next, in the above (FIG. 16), the timing at which the special symbol 1 hold number changes (the timing at which the hold number (starting memory number) due to the winning of the game ball to the upper start port 2101 increases, or the upper special symbol display 1185 When the special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU4150a at the timing of the decrease in the number of reserved symbols due to the variable display) and the number of reserved special symbols 1 is further increased (when the game ball is won in the upper start port 2101), the special symbol 1 The command to specify the number of holds was sent. Therefore, the special symbol 1 storage command has 0 to 4 hold number information, and the mode values "00H" to "04H" are set accordingly. Further, as described above, the special symbol 1 hold number designation command notifies not only the hold number at the time of increase but also the presence / absence of the look-ahead effect. The special symbol 1 hold number specification command represents "pre-reading" information when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are "1", and "no pre-reading" information when the upper bit of the mode value is "0". Represents. Then, when the special symbol 1 hold number designation command is "pre-reading", it also plays a role of instructing the start of the pre-reading effect. The special symbol 2 storage command and the special symbol 2 hold number designation command have the same configuration except that the status value is different from that of the special symbol 1.

On the other hand, in the modified example (FIG. 91), the command to be transmitted differs depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols 1 is decreased (at the start of fluctuation) or increased (at the time of winning the starting opening). Special symbol 1 When the number of reserved balls decreases (the timing when the number of reserved balls decreases due to the fluctuation display on the upper special symbol display 1185), that is, at the start timing of the fluctuation display, the special symbol 1 storage command at the start of fluctuation indicating the number of reserved balls Is sent. Therefore, the variable start special symbol 1 storage command transmitted when the number of holds decreases has 0 to 3 pieces of hold number information, and the mode values "01H" to "04H" are set accordingly. On the other hand, at the timing when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is increased (the timing of the increase in the number of reserved balls due to the winning of the game ball to the upper start port 2101), the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command at the time of pre-reading indicating the number of reserved balls and the presence or absence of pre-reading is transmitted. To. Therefore, the look-ahead special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command transmitted when the number of holds increases has 1 to 4 pieces of hold number information, and the mode values "* 2H" to "* 5H" are set accordingly. The upper 4 bits "*" of the mode value are set to "0" in the case of "no look-ahead" and "1" in the case of "pre-reading". The setting of the presence / absence information of the look-ahead is performed in the process of step S242 (“no look-ahead”) and the process of step S280 (“with look-ahead”) of the storage look-ahead process (FIG. 93) described later. The special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command at the time of look-ahead and the above-mentioned special symbol 1 hold number specification command (FIG. 16) have the same information to be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU4150a, but the status value and mode value that make up the command are set. different. The special symbol 2 storage command at the start of fluctuation and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead command at the time of pre-reading have the same configuration except that the status value is different from that of the special symbol 1.

In addition, only when there is pre-reading (that is, when the start address of the mode value of the special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command is "1"), the symbol type pre-reading command, the variable pattern pre-reading command, and the variable type A look-ahead command is sent. In the modified example, the variable distribution table information look-ahead command is also transmitted. Therefore, in the modified example, a process of setting the transmission of the variable distribution table information look-ahead command when the look-ahead determination is performed is added to the above-mentioned memory look-ahead process (FIG. 24).

Here, the memory look-ahead processing of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the storage look-ahead processing of the modified example. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the above-mentioned storage look-ahead process (FIG. 24), and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the modified example, as described above, the variable distribution table information look-ahead command is transmitted when the look-ahead determination is performed. Therefore, the main control MPU4100a sets the command indicating the look-ahead result (symbol type look-ahead command, variation pattern look-ahead command, and variation type look-ahead command) in the command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). Occasionally, a variable distribution table information look-ahead command is also set in the command buffer (steps S279a and S279b). The variable distribution table information look-ahead command will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the command acquired in the process of step S284 is the target of the special symbol memory look-ahead command (FIG. 91) at the time of look-ahead of the corresponding special figure. As described above, the read-ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command has the same information as the special symbol 1 (2) hold number designation command (FIG. 16).

Return to FIG. The symbol type look-ahead command is missed, specified jackpot, or non-missing, depending on the results of the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S250, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S252, FIG. This is a command to specify a specific jackpot. Similarly, depending on the results of the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S510, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S512, FIG. 28) of the special symbol / flag setting process (FIG. 34) executed at the start of fluctuation. As a command for designating a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, there is a special figure 1 (2) symbol type command. The detailed configuration of these commands will be described.

The mode values of the symbol type look-ahead command (FIG. 91) and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command (FIG. 92) are associated with missed or jackpot symbol types 0 to 48. In the symbol type look-ahead command, the mode value "01H" is set for the loss, and the mode values "02H" to "46H" are set for each symbol type for the jackpot symbol types 0 to 44 indicating the specific jackpot, and are not specified. The same mode value "50H" is set for the jackpot symbol types 45 to 48 indicating the jackpot (small hit). On the other hand, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, mode values "47H" to "50H" are set for each symbol type even for the jackpot symbol types 45 to 48 indicating a non-specific jackpot (small hit). ..

As described above, the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command is a command for designating an effect pattern (variation pattern). The variation pattern value (variation pattern number) indicating the variation pattern is a random number 1 for the variation pattern and a random number 2 for the variation pattern in the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258, FIG. 29, FIG. 30) of the storage look-ahead process (FIG. 93). Set using. The random number 1 for the variation pattern is used to set the effect mode from a plurality of random numbers 1, and the random number 2 for the variation pattern is used to set the detailed effect content (effect pattern) according to the set effect mode.

The variation type look-ahead command is a command that specifies information (added value of time) as to whether or not to perform pseudo-continuous production for the set variation pattern. The time addition value is set by using the variation type random number in the variation type determination process (step S262, FIG. 31) of the storage look-ahead process (FIG. 93). When it is determined by the random number for the variation type that the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, the variation time of the set variation pattern is maintained. If it is determined that the random number for the variation type is used for the pseudo-ream effect, the random number for the variation type is used for the pseudo-ream corresponding to the variation type (any of types A to C) corresponding to the set variation pattern. The number of times the effect is executed (1 to 3 times) is determined. At this time, since the time addition value is associated with the execution number of times of the pseudo continuous effect, the time addition value is set by determining the execution number of each type. Therefore, when the pseudo continuous effect is performed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern is extended.

The variation distribution table information look-ahead command is a command for designating a variation distribution table used when determining a variation pattern in the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) at the start of variation. As described above, the variable distribution table includes the large hit variation selection information type table (big hit distribution table) used in the case of a big hit (“yes” in step S350), and the case of performing a reach effect although it is out of the question (step). The reach variation selection information status table (reach distribution table) used for (“yes”) in S372, and the loss variation selection information table (“no”) used when the reach effect is not performed due to the loss (“no” in step S372). A non-reach distribution table) is provided. Then, the variable distribution table at the start of the variation set in the variable distribution table information look-ahead command includes a reach or non-reach distribution table in addition to the above-mentioned three distribution tables. The reach or non-reach distribution table has a hold (starting memory) having a reach judgment random number that may change the result of the reach judgment as to whether or not to perform the reach effect when the number of reserved balls changes between the look-ahead time and the fluctuation start time. ) Is a table set for.

Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the merit of transmitting the variable distribution table information look-ahead command as one of the look-ahead commands will be described. FIG. 94 is an example of a simplified flowchart in which (A) the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the above-mentioned variation distribution table, and (B) corresponds to the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. This is an example of the reach execution enable / disable table.

As shown in FIG. 94 (A), in the variation pattern selection determination process, a jackpot determination is performed by a random number for jackpot determination, and when a jackpot is reached, a jackpot distribution table is set. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is incorrect, the reach determination is performed by the reach determination random number. In the reach judgment, the reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach judgment random number is smaller than the comparison value (reach threshold value), and the non-reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach judgment random number is larger than the comparison value. Set. After that, the effect mode is determined from the random number 1 for the variation pattern using the set table, and the variation pattern is determined from the random number 2 for the variation pattern in the effect mode.

In the reach determination, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), the comparison value (reach threshold value) fluctuates according to the number of reserved balls at the time of determination. Here, it is assumed that the comparison value when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is four is 10, and the comparison value is added every time the number of reserved balls decreases by one. In this case, when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9, the reach distribution table is set regardless of whether the number of reserved balls is 0 to 4. However, when the reach determination random number is 10 to 49, the reach determination result differs depending on the number of reserved balls, so either the reach distribution table or the non-reach distribution table is set. Further, when the reach determination random number is 50 or more, the non-reach distribution table is always set regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Therefore, the mode value of the variable distribution table information look-ahead command is "01H" when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, "02H" when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9, and the reach determination random number is set. When is 10 to 49, "03H" is set, and when the reach determination random number is 50 or more, "04H" is set.

In this way, by transmitting the variation distribution table information look-ahead command from the main control board to the peripheral control board at the time of look-ahead, the peripheral control MPU4150a can be held at the mode value of "03H" at the time of look-ahead and at the start of change. It is possible to execute the look-ahead effect control in consideration of the possibility that the result of the reach determination may differ when the number of reserved balls fluctuates. In the memory look-ahead process (FIG. 93), when the mode value of the variable distribution table information look-ahead command is "03H", the process of setting the hold command reference value when there is look-ahead in step S280 is not performed, and the step The state in which the hold command reference value at the time of no look-ahead of S242 is set may be maintained. That is, the main control MPU 4100a performs the look-ahead determination but does not transmit the look-ahead determination result information to the peripheral control board 4140. In this case, the special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command of "no look-ahead" is transmitted to the peripheral control board. As a result, the look-ahead effect control by the peripheral control MPU4150a can be simplified, and the control load can be reduced.

As described above, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command (special symbol 2 storage look-ahead command) transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board when the game ball is won in the upper start port 2101 (lower start port 2102) is reserved. Information on whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect (“pre-reading available” or “no pre-reading”) is included together with the number of balls information. Then, the symbol type look-ahead command, the variation pattern look-ahead command, the variation type look-ahead command, and the variation distribution table information look-ahead command are transmitted only in the case of "pre-reading", and these pre-reading commands are not transmitted in the case of "no look-ahead". .. The peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 can perform the look-ahead effect without waiting for the reception of other look-ahead commands as long as it receives the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command (special symbol 2 storage look-ahead command) transmitted when the start opening winning is generated. It is possible to determine whether or not it is an execution target. When the peripheral control MPU4150a receives the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command (special symbol 2 storage look-ahead command) of "pre-reading" (when it receives specific game information), it receives another look-ahead command or pre-reads effect. After executing the process of setting the execution flag (step S1408 of the received command analysis process, FIG. 48) to satisfy the execution condition of the look-ahead effect (first pre-process), the special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 42). Step S1027, second preprocessing) is executed, and the look-ahead effect is executed. Further, when the peripheral control MPU4150a receives the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command (special symbol 2 storage look-ahead command) of "no look-ahead", it can grasp that the look-ahead command is not transmitted later. It is possible to immediately decide not to execute the look-ahead effect (do not set the look-ahead effect execution flag) without waiting for the reception of the look-ahead command. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the special figure pre-reading effect control process (FIG. 83), which is the second pre-processing, without executing the first pre-processing, and the pre-reading effect execution flag is set. Since there is no such thing (“No” in step S2001), the special figure look-ahead effect control process is terminated without executing the look-ahead effect.

If the pre-reading determination is not performed on the main control board 4100 side (when the "no pre-reading" command is received), the command required for setting the pre-reading effect on the peripheral control board 4140 (symbol type pre-reading command, variation). Since the pattern look-ahead command, variable type look-ahead command, and variable distribution table information look-ahead command) are not transmitted, the command sent at the start opening winning (look-ahead) is simplified, and the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the look-ahead effect. It is possible to prevent erroneous control. Further, as will be described later, the main control board 4100 having a backup function for a defect of the look-ahead effect that may occur in the progress of the game can transmit the pre-reading presence / absence information to the peripheral control board 4140, so that an appropriate look-ahead effect can be achieved. Execution can be facilitated. The condition in which "no look-ahead" is set in the special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command (that is, the condition in which the main control board 4100 prohibits look-ahead) will be described later in FIG. 95.

In addition, the symbol type look-ahead command sent at the start opening winning (look-ahead) is set to a different mode value for each specific jackpot type for the specific jackpot (first specific result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. A common mode value is set for the non-specific jackpot (second specific result), which is a so-called small hit that does not involve the operation of the device, regardless of the type of non-specific jackpot. That is, when the pre-reading determination result is a specific jackpot (first specific result), the main control board 4100 issues a command (first specific information) in which a mode value is set so that the type of the specific jackpot can be specified. However, when the pre-reading determination result is a non-specific jackpot (second specific result), a command (second specific information) with a unified mode value is transmitted so that the non-specific jackpot type cannot be specified. Then, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command transmitted at the start of fluctuation, a different mode value is set for each type of non-specific jackpot as well as non-specific jackpot. As a result, with respect to the hold that is a non-specific big hit, which is a so-called small hit, the type of the hold cannot be grasped even by the peripheral control board 4140 until the start of the fluctuation. There is no risk of being read. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect that appropriately raises the degree of expectation, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

For example, it is provided with a V-zone winning structure of two types of blades in which a large winning opening is opened with a small hit and a big hit is generated by a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V zone) in the large winning opening. In pachinko machines, the ease of winning a game ball in a specific area differs depending on the type of small hit. That is, whether or not a big hit can be derived depends on the type of small hit. In addition, since the type of big hit to be derived differs depending on the type of small hit, the benefits (time reduction number of times, etc.) that the player can obtain are different. Therefore, the type information of the small hit becomes more important for the player. If a look-ahead effect that allows the type of small hit to be grasped is performed on such a pachinko machine, the player can make a distinction according to the type of small hit, and can easily aim for a big hit or a specific privilege. Therefore, by preventing the look-ahead effect according to the small hit type from being executed, the player is not given any predictable element (information) until the fluctuation is started. As a result, the fairness of the game can be maintained and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[19-1-2. Pre-reading judgment prohibition condition]
FIG. 95 is an example of a table showing the conditions under which the main control board 4100 of the modified example prohibits pre-reading, and is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting pre-reading at the time of transition to the state (B).

In the above-mentioned memory look-ahead process (FIG. 93), when the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different between the timing of the start winning of the game ball and the timing when the fluctuation is actually started (“yes” in step S244), or , When the look-ahead determination prohibition period is reached even if the table does not change (“yes” in step S246), the look-ahead determination is prohibited. When the look-ahead determination is prohibited, "no look-ahead" is set in the special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command.

Here, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), when the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different (“yes” in step S244), specifically, the probability state at the start winning is the probability at the start of fluctuation. There are cases where the state is different from the state, or the time saving state at the start winning is changed to the non-time saving state at the start of fluctuation, and the number of times the probability state and the time saving state are maintained (number of games) or the number of times the state of the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is maintained. Indicates when (number of games) corresponds to within 4 times. In this case, pre-reading judgment is prohibited regardless of the type of special symbol.

Further, in the case of the pre-reading determination prohibition period (“yes” in step S246), the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the upper start port (special figure 1 start port) 2101 is a time saving state or the condition device is operated. The case where the game is in a big hit game state or the game state when the game ball is won in the lower start port (special figure 2 start port) 2102 is a non-time saving state or a big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the game ball winning (occurrence of special symbol 2 hold) to the lower start port (special figure 2 start port) 2102 is limited to the time saving state, the lower start port (special figure 2) The look-ahead determination is prohibited when the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the 2102 (starting port) is a non-time saving state (a state that is not a time saving state). Further, even if the look-ahead determination is performed for the special symbol hold that occurred during the jackpot game, the normal (low) probability state and the non-time saving state are set during the jackpot game regardless of the game state up to that point. There is a high possibility that the game state will be different from the game state when the hold is exhausted (the game state after the big hit game), and there is a concern that the accuracy of the look-ahead determination may be reduced. Therefore, even when the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 (when the special symbol hold occurs) is a big hit game, the pre-reading determination is prohibited.

As shown in FIG. 95 (B), when the state A shifts to the state B after 100 fluctuation digestions, the maintenance count (remaining fluctuation count) of the state A becomes 4 times (97 in the state A). Pre-reading judgment is prohibited at the start of the first fluctuation). Then, the period from the state A to the state B is set as the look-ahead determination prohibition period.

Winning 1 that occurs immediately before the start of the 97th change in state A is digested as the 97th change if there is no hold in all the hold memory 1 to 4 areas, but the hold is held in the hold memory 1 to 4 areas. If there is, it is stored in the hold storage 2 to 4 areas as the 2nd to 4th holds, respectively. Then, it is digested as the 98th to 100th fluctuation. Further, if the hold is stored in all the hold storage areas 1 to 4, the prize will be overflowed and the hold will not be stored.

As described above, in the prize 1, the variation is executed in the state A even when the variation digestion is slow. If there is no state transition between the time of winning and the start of fluctuation, the look-ahead information (big hit judgment result, fluctuation pattern, etc.) determined at the time of winning is not different from the fluctuation information determined at the start of fluctuation. However, in the winning 2 generated after the winning 1, that is, after the start of the 97th fluctuation in the state A, the state may shift between the winning and the starting of the fluctuation depending on the number of reserved balls at the time of the winning. .. If the number of balls on hold at the time of winning 2 is 3, and the winning 2 is stored in the holding storage 4 area as the fourth hold, the state is A at the time of winning but the state is B at the start of fluctuation. It becomes. In this case, the look-ahead information determined at the time of winning and the variation information determined at the start of the variation may not be the same because the states on which various determinations are premised are different. In particular, when the state A is more advantageous to the player than the state B, the pre-reading effect based on the pre-reading information has a high expectation, but the fluctuation is actually low. Events can occur that can significantly discourage the player.

Therefore, depending on the number of reserved balls at the time of winning, the period during which the state transition can occur between the time of winning and the time of the start of fluctuation, that is, the 100th fluctuation from the start of the 97th fluctuation in the state A ends and the state from the state A Look-ahead is prohibited during the period until the transition to B. In this way, when the period until the table for selecting the variation pattern is changed is a predetermined period (here, the number of remaining maintenance times of the state is 4 variation), the look-ahead effect is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being deteriorated due to the execution of the look-ahead effect that is excessive (dissociated) compared to the actual fluctuation, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the look-ahead effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, the state transition includes a transition from a high probability state to a normal probability state by ST count digestion, a transition from a time saving state to a non-time saving state by time saving number digestion, and a state transition by effect mode transition according to the number of fluctuations. Be done. When the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern may change between the time of winning (at the time of look-ahead) and the time of the start of fluctuation due to these state transitions, the main control MPU4100a does not perform the look-ahead determination and wins the peripheral control MPU4150a. Only the number of reserved balls of the special symbol corresponding to the starting port and the information without pre-reading are transmitted.

By performing the read-ahead prohibition control at the time of such a state transition, for example, when a power failure occurs during the time saving state and the power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a conventionally grasps the remaining number of time saving times. Since it cannot be done, it will be possible to execute the look-ahead effect that was prohibited after the power is restored. Specifically, as described above, the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern differs between the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state. Further, the main control MPU 4100a counts the number of fluctuations (time reduction number) in the time reduction state, but the time reduction number information is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 side. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control MPU4150a receives the information in the time saving state, but cannot grasp the progress status (remaining time saving number of times) in the time saving state. For this reason, even if an attempt is made to prohibit the look-ahead effect when the number of remaining time reductions before the transition from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state is 4 times or less, the determination cannot be made and the time reduction state ends after the power is restored. I had no choice but to prohibit the look-ahead production. On the other hand, in the present invention, the main control MPU4100a performs read-ahead prohibition control at the time of state transition. The main control MPU4100a does not perform the look-ahead determination when the number of remaining time reductions before the state transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state is 4 times (predetermined number of times) or less. Do not transmit to the control board 4140. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU4150a does not perform the look-ahead effect. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute the look-ahead effect in the time saving state according to the command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a even when the power is restored due to the power interruption during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the period during which the look-ahead effect is not performed, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

Further, in the explanation of the variable distribution table information look-ahead command (FIGS. 91 and 94), when the mode value is "03H", the reach determination result is obtained when the number of reserved balls changes between the look-ahead time and the change start time. I mentioned earlier that it can be different, that is, the table that selects the variation pattern can change. Whether or not the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern may change depending on the result of the reach determination can be determined by the reach determination random number and the upper and lower limits of the comparison value used for the reach determination. The comparison value is set from the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls. If the special symbol reach probability is predetermined, these values can be acquired by the look-ahead determination without setting the variable distribution table information look-ahead command. In such a case, it may be a target for determining whether or not to be a look-ahead target before executing the look-ahead determination (steps S248 to 280) in the storage look-ahead process (FIG. 93). When both the reach and non-reach distribution tables may be selected, the main control MPU4100a determines that the tables for selecting the variation pattern are different (“yes” in step 244).

Since the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention has a configuration in which the special symbol 2 hold is preferentially digested over the special symbol 1 hold and can be held and stored up to an upper limit of 4 each, the number of state maintenance (number of games) before the transition is increased. Pre-reading is prohibited when the number of times remaining is 4 or less, but this is not limited to this. The number of determination thresholds (here, 4 times) may be changed according to the specifications applied to the pachinko machine 1. Further, the control that does not execute the special figure look-ahead determination performed on the main control board side may be a control that does not perform the special figure look-ahead effect on the peripheral control board side that will be described later.

[19-2. Control on the peripheral control board side (prohibition of special figure look-ahead effect)]
Subsequently, the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure look-ahead effect will be described.

In the above description, the special figure look-ahead prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has been described, but the look-ahead prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a alone is not sufficient to prevent the occurrence of a defect related to the look-ahead effect. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers power from a power failure, the main control MPU4100a can grasp the power recovery information (game backup information), but the peripheral control MPU4150a cannot. When the hold exists at the time of the power failure, the main control MPU4100a transmits the information on the number of hold balls to the peripheral control board 4140, but the look-ahead information (result information, fluctuation pattern, etc., etc.) for the number of hold balls is read ahead. The contents of the command) are not sent. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU4150a cannot execute the look-ahead effect on the hold at the time of the power failure, which was in the hold state at the time of the power failure. Further, the look-ahead information for the hold generated after the power is restored is transmitted from the main control MPU4100a, but there is a concern about the execution of the look-ahead effect of the hold generated after the power is restored until all the hold at the time of power failure is exhausted.

For example, when the probability state after power recovery is a high probability state and the hold at the time of power failure includes a hold that becomes a low probability state, the main control MPU4100a determines the look-ahead of the hold that occurred after power recovery. It is executed in the high probability state, but the probability state changes from the high probability state to the low probability state by the variable execution of the corresponding hold. That is, it is a low probability state when the hold generated after the power is restored is exhausted. Therefore, even if the pre-reading effect of the hold generated after the power is restored is a highly expected effect, the variable effect of the hold may be an unusual effect, which significantly disappoints the player's expectations and the game. There is a risk of causing a decline in interest.

Therefore, in the first modification, the peripheral control MPU4150a prohibits the look-ahead effect even if the special figure look-ahead command is received until the fluctuation of a predetermined number of times (8 times) is started after the power is turned on including the time of power recovery. The predetermined number of times is the maximum number of hold of special symbol 1 hold and special symbol 2 hold. Further, as described above, the look-ahead effect is also prohibited even when the mode value of the received look-ahead variable distribution table information command is "03H". In the following, with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97, the look-ahead effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU4150a of the first modification will be described.

Further, as a modification 2, if there is an unknown hold (hold when the power is turned off) when the power is turned on, the peripheral control MPU4150a prohibits the look-ahead effect even if the special figure look-ahead command is received until the unknown hold is exhausted. To do. Further, in the modification 2, when the peripheral control MPU4150a receives the special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command at the time of look-ahead of "no look-ahead" regardless of the game state, the hold of the command is treated as an unknown hold, and similarly. , The look-ahead effect is prohibited until the unknown hold is exhausted. In the following, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, the look-ahead effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU4150a of the second modification will be described.

[19-2-1. Deformation example 1 (when the power is turned on, pre-reading the specified number of fluctuations is prohibited)]
First, the first modification will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the received command analysis process of the first modification. The processes common to the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 48) are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the read-ahead prohibition counting process in the received command analysis process of the first modification.

As described above, in the reception command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transmits various commands from the main control board 4100 to the reception command storage area 4150cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. Remember. Then, the command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (step S1402), and processing according to the read command is executed.

In the first modification, when the read command is a power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU4150a sets a flag for prohibiting read-ahead of 8 fluctuations after the command is turned on and a flag corresponding to other commands (Yes). Step S1422), the received command analysis process is terminated. After the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, first, when the power of the main control board 4100 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands (instruction of production start and game state) according to the game backup information to the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the first command received by the peripheral control board 4140 after the power is turned on is the power-on state command.

Then, when the read command is a special figure fluctuation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the look-ahead prohibition count process (step S1430). After that, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis process is completed.

Here, the look-ahead prohibition counting process will be described with reference to FIG. 97. The look-ahead prohibition count process is a process for setting whether or not the special symbol variation display game has been started eight times after the power is turned on so that it can be determined even when the special figure look-ahead command is received.

First, the peripheral control MPU4150a determines whether or not the 8-variation look-ahead prohibition flag is set after the input (step S1431). Then, when the flag is set (Yes in step S1431), "8" is set in the look-ahead prohibition count of the subtractive method provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S1432). After that, the 8-variation look-ahead prohibition flag is released after the input (step S1433). As a result, the pre-reading prohibition count setting is completed at the start of the first special symbol variation display game after the power is turned on.

Further, if the peripheral control MPU4150a is not set with the 8-variation look-ahead prohibition flag after being turned on (No in step S1431), the peripheral control MPU4150a shifts to the process of step S1434 described later.

Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a determines whether or not the read-ahead prohibition count is “0” (step S1434). If the look-ahead prohibition count is not "0" (No in step S1434), the look-ahead prohibition count is decremented by 1 to update (step S1435), and the look-ahead prohibition count process ends. On the other hand, when the read-ahead prohibition count is "0" (Yes in step S1434), the look-ahead prohibition count process ends as it is.

The explanation will be given over time. After the power is turned on, the process of Yes → step S1432 → step S1433 is executed in step S1431 at the start of the first fluctuation, and the look-ahead prohibition count for counting the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is set. After that, in step S1434, the process of No → step S1435 is executed, and the look-ahead prohibition count becomes “7”. After that, at the start of the second fluctuation, the process of No in step S1431 → No in step S1434 → Step S1435 is executed, and the look-ahead prohibition count becomes “6”. The same process is repeated at the start of the 3rd to 8th fluctuations, and the look-ahead prohibition count becomes "0" at the start of the 8th fluctuation. Therefore, at the start of the subsequent fluctuation, the process of No in step S1431 → Yes in step S1434 is repeated.

In this way, in the look-ahead prohibition count process, the value of the look-ahead prohibition count and the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on are linked and linked, so that it is possible to determine whether or not the look-ahead prohibition state is in the read-ahead prohibition state. ..

Return to FIG. 96. In the peripheral control MPU4150a, the read command is a special figure look-ahead effect command (pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command, look-ahead symbol type look-ahead command, look-ahead fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, look-ahead change type look-ahead command , (Yes in step S1407), an ambiguous command (reach or non-reach distribution table) with a status value of "69H" and a mode value of "03H" as the special figure look-ahead effect command. (Step S1441), it is determined whether or not the look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command) indicating is received. Then, when the ambiguous command is received (Yes in step S1441), the look-ahead effect is not executed, so that the reception command analysis process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU4150a does not receive an ambiguous command, that is, when it receives a look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command of another mode value (No in step S1441), the look-ahead prohibition count is set. It is determined whether or not it is "0" (step S1442). If the look-ahead prohibition count is not "0" (No in step S1442), the fluctuation has not started eight times after the power is turned on (the look-ahead prohibition state), so the look-ahead effect is not executed. Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the look-ahead prohibition count is "0" (Yes in step S1442), since the start of fluctuation eight times after the power is turned on has been completed, the peripheral control MPU4150a is instructed to execute the look-ahead effect. The figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S1408), and the reception command analysis process is terminated. When the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the special figure look-ahead effect in the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 83) executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to do so.

As described above, in the look-ahead effect prohibition control of the first modification, the look-ahead effect is not performed after the power is turned on until a predetermined number of fluctuation starts, which is the upper limit of the hold, is executed. Therefore, the hold at the time of power failure does not affect the look-ahead effect of the hold that occurs after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems, suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game, and provide an appropriate look-ahead effect. Further, since the predetermined number of times is set to the total holding upper limit number of the special symbol 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold, the look-ahead effect can be permitted after the hold at the time of power failure is surely exhausted (variation starts).

Although it was stated that the look-ahead effect prohibition control was always performed after the power was turned on, the above-mentioned problem occurs when the power is turned on by restoring power from a power failure. It does not occur at the time of normal power-on such as executing RAM clear on the main control board 4100. A command that distinguishes between the two is transmitted from the main control board 4100, but the peripheral control board 4140 does not distinguish between the two in order to simplify the process. However, prohibiting the look-ahead effect until the RAM is cleared, which does not cause a problem, may also reduce the interest of the game. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 may determine whether or not the RAM is cleared, and if the RAM is cleared, the look-ahead effect may be permitted. By removing the prohibition on the unnecessary look-ahead effect in this way, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game and provide an appropriate look-ahead effect.

For example, when the probability state after power recovery is a high probability state and the hold at the time of power failure includes a hold that becomes a low probability state, the main control MPU4100a determines the look-ahead of the hold that occurred after power recovery. It is executed in the high probability state, but the probability state changes from the high probability state to the low probability state by the variable execution of the corresponding hold. That is, it is a low probability state when the hold generated after the power is restored is exhausted. Therefore, even if the pre-reading effect of the hold generated after the power is restored is a highly expected effect, the variable effect of the hold may be an unusual effect, which significantly disappoints the player's expectations and the game. There is a risk of causing a decline in interest.

[19-2-2. Modification 2 (Unknown hold No look-ahead until digested)]
Next, the second modification will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the received command analysis process of the modified example 2. The processing common to the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 96) of the modification 1 is designated by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the input unknown flag setting process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of unknown count processing in the reception command analysis processing of the second modification. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure look-ahead execution determination process in the received command analysis process of the modified example 2.

As described above, in the modified example 2, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is held by the modified example 1 when the power is turned on (held when the power is cut off), and the special symbol 1 at the time of pre-reading without pre-reading from the main control board 4100.
(2) The hold when the memory look-ahead command is received is treated as an "unknown hold" in which the look-ahead information for executing the look-ahead effect is unknown. Then, the look-ahead production is prohibited until the unknown hold is exhausted.

The reception command analysis process of the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 98. First, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU4150a sets a read-ahead prohibition (unknown flag) due to unknown hold. The process is executed (step S1450). After that, a flag corresponding to another command is set (step S1423), and the received command analysis process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 99, the unknown flag setting process at the time of input (step S1450) will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a special figure 1 hold number (unknown hold number) and a special 2 hold number (unknown hold), respectively, in addition to the special 1 unknown count and the special 2 unknown count of the subtractive method provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c for each special symbol. Number) is set (step S1451). In the case of power recovery from the occurrence of power failure, the number of holds at the time of power failure will be set as power recovery information (backup game information).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU4150a determines whether or not the set special 1 unknown count is “0” (step S1452). Then, when the special 1 unknown count is not "0" (No in step S1452), the special 1 unknown flag indicating the prohibition of the look-ahead effect of the special 1 hold is set (step S1453), and the process proceeds to step S1454. To do. On the other hand, when the special 1 unknown count is "0" (Yes in step S1452), it means that there is no special 1 unknown hold at the time of power failure, or it is the initial start, not at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1454 without setting the flag.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU4150a determines whether or not the set special 2 unknown count is “0” (step S1454). Then, when the special 2 unknown count is not "0" (No in step S1454), the special 2 unknown flag indicating the prohibition of the look-ahead effect of the special 2 hold is set (step S1455), and the unknown flag setting process at the time of input is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when the special 2 unknown count is "0" (Yes in step S1454), it means that there is no special 2 unknown hold at the time of power supply, or it is the initial start, not at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the flag is not set and the unknown flag setting process is terminated at the time of input.

In this way, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, a look-ahead effect prohibition setting (unknown flag set) is performed for each special symbol based on the presence or absence of unknown hold according to the state at the time of turning on. Specifically, when there is a hold at the time of power failure, the look-ahead effect prohibition setting of the special symbol to be held at the time of power failure is set.

Return to FIG. 98.

Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes an unknown count process (step S1460) when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403). After that, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis process is completed.

Here, the unknown count process (step S1460) will be described with reference to FIG. 100. The unknown count process is a process of determining whether or not to release the read-ahead prohibition (clear the unknown flag) by digesting the unknown hold. Specifically, the unknown count of the special symbol whose fluctuation is to be started is subtracted to make an unknown hold digestion judgment (pre-reading effect prohibition release judgment), and when digested, the unknown flag (look-ahead effect prohibition) is released. ..

Peripheral control MPU4150a first determines whether or not the unknown flag of the special symbol to be changed is set (step S1461). Then, if the unknown flag of the target special figure is not set (No in step S1461), the unknown count process ends.

On the other hand, when the unknown flag of the target special figure is set (Yes in step S1461), the peripheral control MPU4150a updates the unknown count of the target special figure by 1 subtraction (step S1462), and updates the target special figure after the update. It is determined whether or not the unknown count in the figure is "0" (step S1463). Then, if the unknown count is not "0" (No in step S1463), the unknown count process ends. On the other hand, when the unknown count is "0" (Yes in step S1463), the unknown flag of the target special figure is cleared (step S1464), and the unknown count process ends.

In this way, in the unknown count process, the value of the unknown count and the number of fluctuations until the unknown hold is exhausted (the number of balls held when the unknown hold information is received) are linked and linked to indicate the presence or absence of the unknown hold. When the value of is "0", the unknown flag is cleared. As a result, in the special figure look-ahead execution determination process (step S1470, FIG. 101 in FIG. 98), which will be described later, it is possible to determine whether or not the look-ahead prohibition state is in the state of the unknown flag, and it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect of the pending hold is executed. I am trying to be able to.

Return to FIG. 98.

By the way, in the modification 2, not only the hold at the time of power failure, but also the hold when the special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command at the time of look-ahead without look-ahead is received from the main control board 4100 is treated as “unknown hold”. Therefore, the setting of the unknown flag due to the occurrence of the unknown hold (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) is the pre-reading of the hold (game ball winning to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102) that occurs not only when the power is turned on but also after the power is turned on. It is also performed when a command is received.

When the command read in the process of step S1402 is a look-ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command indicating the number of reserved balls at the time of the start opening winning and the presence / absence of the held look-ahead information that has occurred (peripheral control MPU4150a) Yes) in step S1469, and the special figure look-ahead execution determination process is executed (step S1470). In the special figure look-ahead execution determination process, the unknown flag for each special symbol is set (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) according to the presence or absence of the read-ahead information of the received command, and the look-ahead effect is executed according to the state of the look-ahead information and the unknown flag. Set flags.

Here, the details of the special figure look-ahead execution determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 101. The peripheral control MPU4150a first determines whether or not the received look-ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command is a command targeting the special symbol 1 (step S1471). Then, if it is the command of the special symbol 1 (Yes in step S1471), it is determined whether or not the command is "pre-reading" (step S1472a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the beginning of the mode value of the received look-ahead special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command is "1".

When the received look-ahead special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command is not "pre-reading available" (No in step S1472a), the peripheral control MPU4150a has other look-ahead commands (look-ahead symbol type look-ahead command, look-ahead fluctuation pattern). Since the look-ahead command, look-ahead variation type look-ahead command, and look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command) are not transmitted from the main control board 4100, the special 1 unknown flag that prohibits the special 1 look-ahead effect is set (step S1473a). At this time, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command at the time of look-ahead is set to the special 1 unknown count (step S1474a), and the special figure look-ahead execution determination process is terminated. If the special 1 unknown flag has already been set, the set state is confirmed in the process of step S1473a, and the value of the special 1 unknown count is rewritten to the value of the new number of reserved balls in the process of step S1474a. Do. It is always updated so that the digestion of the unknown hold, which is new in the memory order, is the condition for canceling the pre-reading production prohibition.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the received look-ahead special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command is "pre-reading available" (Yes in step S1472a), other look-ahead commands are transmitted from the main control board 4100. , It is determined whether or not "6903H" (ambiguous command) is received as the look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command (step S1475a). This is the same as the process of step S1441 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 96) of the above-described modification 1. Then, when the ambiguous command is received, that is, when the look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command of "6903H" is received (Yes in step S1475a), the special figure look-ahead execution determination process is terminated.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU4150a has not received an ambiguous command, that is, has received a look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command of a mode value other than "03H" (No in step S1475a), the special feature. 1 It is determined whether or not the unknown flag is set (step S1476a). Then, when the special 1 unknown flag is set (Yes in step S1476a), the special 1 look-ahead effect execution is prohibited, so the special figure look-ahead execution determination process is terminated.

Further, when the special 1 unknown flag is not set in the peripheral control MPU4150a (No in step S1476a), the special 1 look-ahead effect execution is permitted, so the special figure look-ahead effect execution instructing the execution of the special 1 look-ahead effect is executed. The flag is set (step S1477a), and the special figure look-ahead execution determination process is terminated. When the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the special figure look-ahead effect in the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 83) executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to do so.

In the process of step S1471, when the received look-ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command does not target the special symbol 1, that is, the command targets the special symbol 2 (No in step S1471). The processing of steps S1472b to S1477b to be executed is a process in which the target is changed to the special symbol 2 from the processing of steps S1472a to S1477a for the special symbol 1 described above.

In the special figure look-ahead execution determination process, when a look-ahead special symbol 1 (2) memory look-ahead command without look-ahead is received, the unknown flag of the target special symbol is set, and the target is set until the corresponding unknown hold is exhausted. Pre-reading production of special symbols is prohibited. Therefore, even if the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command with pre-reading is received, the pre-reading effect is not executed while the unknown flag of the target special symbol is set. Further, even if the received look-ahead variable distribution table information command is an ambiguous command, the look-ahead effect is not executed.

As described above, in the look-ahead effect prohibition control of the second modification, the hold at the time of power failure received as the power recovery information at the time of turning on the power is set to "unknown hold", and even if the power is restored, the look-ahead effect is not executed. In addition, when there is an unknown hold (that is, when there is a hold in which the look-ahead information (specific game information) is not transmitted and the peripheral control MPU4150a cannot specify the look-ahead determination result), the target special symbol until the unknown hold is exhausted. Do not perform look-ahead production in. Then, if the unknown hold is exhausted, the look-ahead effect is permitted. Therefore, the hold at the time of power failure (unknown hold) does not affect the look-ahead effect after the power is restored. Further, since the pre-reading effect prohibition period is set for each special symbol according to the number of unknown pending numbers, more appropriate pre-reading effect prohibition control can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the pre-reading effect and the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, even when a read-ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command without look-ahead is received from the main control board 4100, the corresponding hold is set as "unknown hold", and the look-ahead in the target special symbol is set until the unknown hold is exhausted. Since the effect is prohibited, by executing this pre-reading effect prohibition control together with the pre-reading determination prohibition control at the time of state transition by the main control board 4100 described above, a more appropriate pre-reading effect can be provided to the player. For example, when shifting from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state at the time of the above-mentioned state transition, if the number of times the time-saving state is maintained is 4 fluctuations or less remaining, the main control MPU4100a prohibits the look-ahead determination. Therefore, the special symbol 2 hold that occurred during the read-ahead determination prohibition period is not determined to be read-ahead, and is recognized by the peripheral control MPU4150a as an unknown hold. Therefore, the look-ahead effect in the special symbol 2 is prohibited in the non-time saving state after the state transition until the special symbol 2 hold (upper limit of 4) generated during the time saving state of the remaining 4 fluctuations is digested. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 for preferential digestion of the special symbol 2, the unknown reserved special symbol 2 is digested before the special symbol 1 after the state transition. In this way, the hold that occurred during the four fluctuations immediately before the transition state is not subject to the look-ahead determination on the main control board 4100 side, and the peripheral control board 4140 side also receives the hold that can be pre-read until the hold is exhausted. By not targeting the look-ahead effect, it is possible to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead effect during the period when a problem is likely to occur. The hold that occurs in the non-time saving state after the state transition is mainly the special symbol 1 hold. At this time, since the look-ahead effect prohibition control is executed for each special symbol, it is for the special symbol 2 hold. Therefore, it does not interfere with the execution of the look-ahead effect on the special symbol 1 side in the non-time saving state.

Further, in the second modification, the look-ahead effect prohibition control for the unknown hold other than the hold at the time of power failure is performed at the timing when the number of holds changes. Specifically, the pre-reading effect prohibition is started at the timing when the special symbol 1 (2) memory pre-reading command (unknown command) at the time of pre-reading without pre-reading is received, and the unknown hold corresponding to the unknown command is digested and the fluctuation starts. It will be released at the timing of. In this way, the look-ahead effect is prohibited when an unknown hold occurs in the hold storage area, and the look-ahead effect is permitted at the same time as the last unknown hold is digested. Therefore, it is possible to execute more accurate look-ahead effect prohibition control, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the look-ahead effect and the game entertainment.

Further, as described in the first modification, the look-ahead effect prohibition control at the time of turning on the power does not have to be targeted at the time of clearing the RAM. In this case, in the above-mentioned input unknown flag setting process (FIG. 99), a determination process for confirming the reception of the RAM clear command is added before the process of S1451, and when the RAM clear command is received (when the RAM is cleared), after that. It is sufficient to end the unknown flag setting process at the time of input without executing the process of. Normally, the peripheral control board 4140 receives the RAM clear command, but does not read it from the received command storage area 4150cc in order to share the control when the RAM is cleared and when the power is turned on. In this way, by controlling so as to allow the look-ahead effect when the RAM is cleared, it is possible to eliminate the prohibition of the unnecessary look-ahead effect, suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game, and provide an appropriate look-ahead effect. ..

Further, in the modified example 1 and the modified example 2, an ambiguous command (a read-ahead variable distribution table information command having a mode value "03H" indicating a reach or non-reach distribution table) is received for the pending hold with the look-ahead. If it is, it is not subject to the look-ahead effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the second modification, the look-ahead effect may be prohibited when a hold that becomes a non-specific hit (small hit) occurs in a high probability state. Specifically, in the above-mentioned special figure look-ahead execution determination process (FIG. 101), when a read-ahead special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command with look-ahead is received (Yes in step S1472a), a small hit (mode value "50H") ”) Is added to determine whether or not the symbol type look-ahead command (status value“ 66H ”) has been received, and to determine whether or not the current probability state is a high probability state when it is received. If it is executed and the command is received and the probability is high, the processes of step S1473a and step S1474a may be executed. Here, at the stage of pre-reading, the small hit type information is not transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. Some small hit types return the high-probability state to the low-probability state (normal probability state). If the look-ahead effect is performed even after the small hit hold that induces the transition to the low probability state occurs, the look-ahead effect occurs after the small hit hold, and the big hit is determined when the look-ahead is performed in the high probability state. An event may occur in which a shift is determined at the start of fluctuation in a low-probability state in which the hold is shifted to the small hit. At this time, if the hit confirmation effect is performed in the look-ahead effect, the actual fluctuation result (missing) not only significantly disappoints the player's expectations, but may also lead to distrust of the game effect. Therefore, even if a look-ahead command with look-ahead is received, if the small hit symbol type look-ahead command "6650H" is received in a high probability state, the result of the small hit is determined at the start of fluctuation (pending digestion). ) Is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game and a distrust of the player's production due to the excessive (wrong) pre-reading effect being executed with respect to the actual fluctuation result, and also to prevent the pre-reading effect. You can increase the reliability of.

[19-2-3. At the start of the jackpot game (clear look-ahead information)]
By the way, the hold that occurs during the big hit is prohibited from the look-ahead effect because the pre-reading determination is not executed by the main control MPU4100a, but the hold that has already occurred and is stored at the start of the big hit depends on the game state at the time of occurrence. It has pre-reading information by pre-reading determination, and the peripheral control MPU4150a can perform pre-reading effect. However, the game state after the big hit, which is digested (variation starts) at the start of the big hit, may be different from the game state at the time of the look-ahead determination (the fluctuation pattern table is different). On the other hand, there is a risk that the pre-reading effect will not be appropriate. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a holds the hold information of the look-ahead command received from the main control board 4100 for the hold at the start of the big hit, and clears the look-ahead effect information set based on the hold information at the start of the big hit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which an appropriate look-ahead effect is not performed. Hereinafter, the control process by the peripheral control MPU4150a will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot display process. The jackpot display process is a process (step S1700) executed in the above-mentioned effect control process (FIG. 49).

The peripheral control MPU4150a first executes the jackpot opening display process in response to the jackpot start command (step S1710). Next, the jackpot display process for displaying the display indicating that the jackpot 2003 will be opened on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and performing the display effect (for example, round display) during the jackpot game state is executed (step). S1720). After that, the jackpot ending display process for producing the end effect of the jackpot game state is executed (step S1730), the process selection flag is updated to "0" (step S1740), and then the jackpot display process is terminated.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening display process. The jackpot opening display process is a process (step S1710) executed in the jackpot display process (FIG. 102) described above.

Peripheral control MPU4150a first determines whether or not the start flag is set (step S1711). The start flag is a flag set when the jackpot opening command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received in the process of step S1411 of the above-mentioned reception command analysis process (FIG. 48). Then, if the start flag is not set (No in step S1711), the jackpot opening display process ends.

On the other hand, when the start flag is set (Yes in step S1711), the peripheral control MPU4150a has the effect information (preliminary) corresponding to the look-ahead command from the schedule data storage area 4150cae (predetermined storage area) in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. (Notification mode) is cleared (step S1712). The schedule data storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 4100 are set, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the effect information stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The production is controlled. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU4150a has a function (preliminary notification mode identifiable setting means) for setting the look-ahead effect information (preliminary notification mode) in a predetermined storage area, and the advance notification mode on condition that the jackpot game is executed. It also has a function to set non-identifiable (advance notification mode unspecified setting means). The effect information cleared here is set based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table when the look-ahead command is received.

Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a again sets the effect information corresponding to the look-ahead command in the schedule data storage area 4150cae based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table that are switched and set in the wake of this big hit (step S1713). ..

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU4150a clears the start flag (step S1714), executes a display setting process for setting an opening display such as a fanfare effect (step S1715), and then ends the jackpot opening display process. After that, when the jackpot symbol display command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received when the jackpot 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, the next jackpot display process (step S1720 in FIG. 102) is executed.

In this way, in the jackpot opening display process, the effect display indicating the start of the jackpot is performed, and the pre-reading effect information of the hold stored at the start of the jackpot is changed from the one corresponding to the game state at the time of the hold to the jackpot game state. It can be rewritten as a new one. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU4150a deletes the look-ahead effect information that was selected under the normal probability state when the hold occurs, and re-uses the look-ahead effect information under the high probability state that can be switched when the jackpot occurs. Reselect. Further, the target of the effect information clearing process in step S1712 is the look-ahead effect information, which is the hold information of the look-ahead command received from the main control board 4100 (number of reserved balls, presence / absence of look-ahead, symbol type, variation pattern, variation type). , Distribution table) is retained, so that the effect information based on the hold information can be reset in the effect information setting process of the next step S1713. The timing of resetting is not limited to the start of the big hit. For example, it may be reset by the big hit round confirmation effect. As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate look-ahead effect according to the situation for the hold at the start of the big hit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the look-ahead effect and the interest of the game.

The target of the above-mentioned effect information clearing process (step S1712) is not limited to the hold stored at the start of the jackpot. Pre-reading with pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) Even when a pre-reading command is received from the main control board 4100 and other pre-reading commands are received, an abnormal change in the number of holds (holds at the time of the previous reception). When the number of hold information received this time is increased to 4 even though the number information is 0), the hold effect information stored at this time may be cleared. If an abnormality determination condition is set and the hold stored when it is satisfied is targeted for the effect information clearing process (step S1712), it is possible to prevent a defect in the look-ahead effect for the hold in advance, and an appropriate look-ahead can be performed. It leads to the provision of production.

The control that does not execute the special figure look-ahead effect performed on the peripheral control board side may be a control that does not perform the special figure look-ahead determination on the main control board side.

[20. Production mode transition]
By the way, in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIGS. 48, 96, 98), when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), step S1404 The variation pattern reception flag is set by the process of. Then, when the variation pattern reception flag is set, the decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 52) for starting the special symbol synchronization effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU4150a has an effect pattern (decorative symbol stop symbol, reach effect type, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern and the winning information received from the main control board 4100 based on the effect mode corresponding to the gaming state among the plurality. It is determined whether or not the advance notice effect can be executed, the mode of the advance notice effect, the presence / absence of the extension effect, etc.), and the effect of the effect pattern is executed as the special figure synchronization effect.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 104, an example of the effect transition in the probabilistic time saving state in which the time saving number of times is 64 times will be described. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of the effect transition in the probability variation time saving state. When the game state enters the probabilistic time reduction state, the special figure synchronization effect (time reduction time effect) of the specific A effect mode is executed from 1 to 30 times of the time reduction, and the special figure of the specific B effect mode is executed after the time reduction of 31 times. Synchronized production (probability change confirmation production) is executed. In the special figure synchronization effect of the specific A effect mode, the continuous effect of whether or not the time reduction state is continued is executed when the number of time reductions is 10, 20, or 30 times, and the normal effect is executed for other variations. Will be done.

At this time, the main control MPU4100a manages the number of time reductions, and sets a variation pattern (normal effect pattern, continuous effect pattern, probability variation confirmation effect pattern) according to the time reduction number in the variation pattern command. Specifically, the main control MPU4100a first selects one table from a plurality of provided tables according to the number of time reductions (the number of times the lottery game is executed in the time reduction state). At this time, the table to be selected differs depending on the number of time reductions. Then, a variation pattern (game pattern) according to the lottery game is selected from the selected table. As shown in FIG. 104, the variation pattern in which the number of time reductions is 1 to 9 times, 11 times to 19 times, and 21 times to 29 times in the probability variation time reduction state is selected from the table in which the normal effect pattern is set, and the time reduction number of times is 10 times. The fluctuation patterns of 20 times and 30 times are selected from the table in which the continuous effect pattern is set, and the fluctuation patterns of the time reduction number of 31 times or more are selected from the table in which the probability variation confirmation effect pattern is set. Further, as the continuous effect pattern, a success effect pattern in which the time saving state continues and a failure effect pattern in which the time saving state ends are provided. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU4150a can determine and execute the effect corresponding to the number of time reductions (number of fluctuations) by following the received fluctuation pattern even if the peripheral control MPU4150a itself does not manage the number of time reductions (number of fluctuations). As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform an appropriate effect at the time of power recovery even if the data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared such as when the power is cut off. It should be noted that the effect mode of each effect differs depending on the effect mode set by the peripheral control MPU4150a. In FIG. 104, the peripheral control MPU 4150a selects the effect mode in the specific A effect mode when the time reduction number is 1 to 30 times, and selects the effect mode in the specific B effect mode after the time reduction number of 31 times.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 105, the effect mode transition process in which not only the effect determination but also the effect mode transition is executed based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control MPU4100a will be described.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode transition process executed by the peripheral control MPU450a. The effect mode transition process is executed, for example, when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of variation is received in the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 46). The transition of the effect mode is taken as an example of the transition from the specific A effect mode of FIG. 104 to the specific B effect mode.

Peripheral control MPU4150a first determines whether or not the effect mode is in the specific A effect mode (step S1751). Here, the specific A effect mode is a transition condition to the specific B effect mode that the continuous effect (success or failure) is executed every predetermined number of times in a time saving state and the continuous success effect is executed three times. It is a production mode to do. If the peripheral control MPU4150a is not currently in the specific A effect mode (No in step S1751), the effect mode transition process ends.

Then, when the peripheral control MPU4150a is currently in the specific A effect mode (Yes in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU4150a receives a success command (variation pattern command) indicating a success effect pattern among the continuation effect patterns from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (step S1752). Then, if the success command has not been received (No in step S1752), the effect mode transition process ends.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU4150a receives the success command (Yes in step S1752), the peripheral control MPU4150a updates the count of the number of successes by 1 (step S1753). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of successes after the update has reached 3 (step S1754). If the number of successes is not 3 (No in step S1754), the effect mode transition process ends. When the number of successes is 3 (Yes in step S1754), the effect mode is changed from the special A effect mode to the special B effect mode (step S1755). After that, the effect mode transition process ends. The number of successes can be added during the special A effect mode, and the count is cleared at the end of the special A effect mode.

In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a switches the effect mode when receiving a predetermined number of specific variation pattern commands from the main control MPU 4100a, and is in a specific gaming state (here, a time saving state) according to the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 4100a. ), It is possible to appropriately determine the transition effect (normal effect, continuous success effect, continuous failure effect) in a series of effect modes (specific A effect mode) without knowing the number of fluctuations. Since the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine an appropriate effect based on the command received from the main control board 4100 side where the game information is always backed up, it can be restored even if the data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared, such as when the power is cut off. It is possible to perform the appropriate effect at the time of electricity.

The gaming machine represented by the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the present embodiment can be represented as the following technical idea.

[Technical Thought 1]
The game machine of the technical idea 1 has a reception port capable of accepting a game ball, a display means having a display area on which a symbol variation effect is performed, and starting information acquired based on the reception of the game ball at the reception port. The holding means for holding the symbol, the lottery means for drawing lots using the start information, the fluctuation time from the start of the variation effect of the symbol to the final stop of the symbol, and the variation and stop of the symbol. Based on a main control means having at least a variation mode determining means for determining a variation effect mode of a symbol including the number of times of execution of a repetitive effect performed a plurality of times, and a command transmitted from the main control means. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means capable of controlling the variation effect of the symbol in the mode determined by the variation mode determining means, and the effect control means is specified when the repeated effect is performed a predetermined number of times. When the condition is satisfied, the repetitive effect of at least a part of the predetermined number of times is performed on the start information held before the start information without changing the fluctuation time determined by the change mode determining means. It is characterized by having a special effect control means for controlling the variation effect of the symbol.

Explaining the game machine of the technical idea 1 in more detail, it is acquired based on an entrance that can accept a game ball, a display means having a display area on which a pattern variation effect is performed, and acceptance of the game ball into the entrance. A holding means that holds the started information until the variable condition is satisfied, a lottery means that draws a lottery using the starting information, and a period from the acquisition of the starting information to the establishment of the variable condition for the starting information. In the meantime, the mode of the variation effect of the symbol performed based on the establishment of the variation condition for the start information is the variation time from the start of the variation effect of the symbol to the final stop of the symbol. A main control means having at least a variation mode determining means for determining a mode of the symbol variation effect including the number of times of execution of the repeated effect in which the symbol is changed and stopped a plurality of times, and a transmission from the main control means. Based on the command, between the time when the variation condition is satisfied and the result of the lottery being shown, the variation effect of the symbol in the mode determined by the variation mode determining means including the repeat effect. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means that can be controlled so that the operation is performed in the display area, the hold means is configured to be able to hold a plurality of the start information, and the effect control means is for one start information. When a specific condition is satisfied even though a command to execute the repeat effect N times is transmitted from the main control means, at least a part of the N times of the repeat effect or the N times A determination means for determining that at least a part of the repetitive effect performed in addition to the above is performed in a symbol variation effect for other start information acquired before the one start information, and a part thereof. When it is determined that the repeat effect of the above is performed in the variation effect of the symbol for the other start information, the partial repeat effect is performed without changing the variation time determined by the variation mode determining means. It is characterized by having a special effect control means for controlling other start information so as to be performed in a symbol variation effect.

According to the game machine of the technical idea 1, when the variation effect mode of the symbol is determined by the variation mode determining means (corresponding to the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means), the symbol in the determined variation effect mode is determined. The variation effect is performed in the display area. The variation effect mode determined by the variation mode determining means also includes the variation time and the number of times the repeated effect is executed. The fluctuation time is the time from when the hold state of the start information is released and the fluctuation effect of the symbol (that is, the symbol variation) is started until the symbol is finally stopped (that is, until the result of the lottery is confirmed and displayed). is there. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time are first determined based on the result of the lottery, and then the number of repeated effects and the addition time are determined. Here, the fluctuation time described in the above technical idea 1 includes the addition time. However, regarding whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions when the repeat effect is executed, for example, the number of repeat effects is once in the fluctuation time 20 s of the fluctuation pattern 20, and the repeat effect is performed in the fluctuation time 30 s of the fluctuation pattern 21. Whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions may be incorporated in the fluctuation pattern, such as twice (whether or not to execute the repeat effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined, and when it is executed, the execution thereof). The number of times may also be determined). The variation mode determining means corresponds to the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means of the present embodiment. The repetitive effect is an effect in which the symbol is changed and stopped a plurality of times, and corresponds to the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect described in the present embodiment.

Both the lottery means and the variation mode determining means are possessed by the main control means, and information such as the variation pattern and the variation time is command-transmitted from the main control means to the effect control means. The effect control means controls so that a predetermined display effect is performed based on the information transmitted from the main control means. That is, within the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control means, it is controlled so that the fluctuation effect of the symbol is performed in the variation effect mode determined by the variation mode determining means.

In the present embodiment, the repetitive effect determined by the variation mode determining means uses a plurality of symbols using a special symbol between the start of the variation of the plurality of symbols and the display of the lottery result. Is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the plurality of temporarily stopped symbols is restarted to give the player a sense of expectation, which is a so-called pseudo-continuous production. Further, the effect control means is displayed when, in addition to such a pseudo-continuous effect, a plurality of symbols are temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous effect while maintaining the fluctuation of at least one of the plurality of symbols. By temporarily stopping and displaying a specific image (corresponding to the XTREME symbol of the present embodiment) that is indistinguishable from or difficult to distinguish from the production image, a false continuous production similar to the pseudo continuous production is performed.

However, in the technical idea 1, not only that, the effect control means satisfies a specific condition when a predetermined number of repeated effects (corresponding to both the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) are performed. When this is done, at least a part of the repeated effects (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) of the predetermined number of times is performed in the pattern variation effect of the start information held before the start information. It has a special effect control means to control. Here, the repetitive effect performed by the symbol variation effect on the start information held before the start information is not the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect but a fake pseudo-continuous effect. Therefore, even if a part of the repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) is performed by the variable effect of the symbol for the start information held before the start information. When it is determined by the variation mode determining means that the repeating effect is to be executed (when the information to execute the repeating effect is transmitted from the main control means), the determined variation time (mainly). A repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-ream effect of the embodiment, but also corresponding to the pseudo-repeated effect when a fake pseudo-ream effect is added) is performed within the variable time (variable time when a command is transmitted from the control means). It should be noted that the repetitive effect performed by the symbol variation effect on the start information held before the start information corresponds to the command pseudo-continuous effect instead of the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect as described above, but this command The determination as to whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous effect may be determined by the main control means and a command may be transmitted to the effect control means, or may be determined by the effect control means.

More specifically, when the main control means determines whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect, the main control means (specifically, the variable mode determining means) includes the variation time and the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. It is determined whether or not to execute the game, and whether or not to execute the game including the number of times the fake pseudo-continuous effect is executed within the determined fluctuation time. Then, the information related to the fluctuation time, the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is command-transmitted from the main control means to the effect control means. The effect control means determines the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous effect and the pseudo-continuous effect based on the information transmitted from the main control means. Here, it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed at a predetermined timing within the variation effect of the symbol for the start information, but the false continuous effect is the start information reserved before the start information. The timing is determined including the variation effect of the design.

[Technical Thought 2]
In the game machine of the technical idea 2, the lottery means for drawing a lot based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol to the final stop, and the fluctuation and stop of the symbol are performed. The variation mode determining means for determining the variation effect mode of the symbol including the number of executions of the repeated effect, and the number of executions determined by the variation mode determining means when it is determined to execute the repeat effect. The effect control means includes an effect control means for controlling the variation effect mode including the repetitive effect to be displayed in a predetermined display area over a variation time determined by the variation mode determining means, and the effect control means is the variation. The repetitive effect in which the symbol is changed and stopped without changing the fluctuation time determined by the mode-determining means is performed more times than the number of times the repetitive effect determined by the variable mode-determining means is executed. It is characterized by having a special effect executing means that can be executed over a period of time.

According to the game machine of the technical idea 2, when the variation effect mode of the symbol is determined by the variation mode determining means (corresponding to the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means), the symbol in the determined variation effect mode is determined. The variation effect is performed in a predetermined display area. The variation effect mode determined by the variation mode determining means also includes the variation time and the number of times the repeated effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time are first determined based on the result of the lottery, and then the number of repeated effects and the addition time are determined. Here, the fluctuation time described in the above technical idea 2 includes the addition time. However, regarding whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions when the repeat effect is executed, for example, the number of repeat effects is once in the fluctuation time 20 s of the fluctuation pattern 20, and the repeat effect is performed in the fluctuation time 30 s of the fluctuation pattern 21. Whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions may be incorporated in the fluctuation pattern, such as twice (whether or not to execute the repeat effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined, and when it is executed, the execution thereof). The number of times may also be determined). The variation mode determining means corresponds to the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means of the present embodiment. The repetitive effect is an effect in which the symbol is changed and stopped a plurality of times, and corresponds to the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect described in the present embodiment.

Both the lottery means and the variation mode determining means are possessed by the main control means, and information such as the variation pattern and the variation time is command-transmitted from the main control means to the effect control means. The effect control means controls so that a predetermined display effect is performed based on the information transmitted from the main control means. That is, within the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control means, it is controlled so that the fluctuation effect of the symbol is performed in the variation effect mode determined by the variation mode determining means.

However, the technical idea 2 is not limited to that, and the effect control means determines whether or not to add a repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) in which the symbol is changed and stopped. .. Then, when it is decided to add the repetitive effect, the effect control means performs the repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) more times than the number of times determined by the variable mode determining means. It has a special effect executing means capable of repeatedly performing a repetitive effect (corresponding to both the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment). However, since the fluctuation time of the symbol is managed by the main control means, the special effect execution means is more than the number of executions of the repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect of the embodiment) determined by the variation mode determining means. Even when the repetitive effect is executed over the number of times of, the repetitive effect (corresponding to both the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) is performed within the variation time determined by the variation mode determining means. It is configured to run on.

In the present embodiment, the repetitive effect determined by the variation mode determining means is provisionally set to a plurality of symbols using a special symbol between the start of the variation of the plurality of symbols and the display of the lottery result. It is an effect that can give a sense of expectation to the player by stopping and restarting the fluctuation of the plurality of temporarily stopped symbols, which is a so-called pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the effect control means is displayed when, in addition to such a pseudo-continuous effect, a plurality of symbols are temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous effect while maintaining the fluctuation of at least one of the plurality of symbols. By temporarily stopping and displaying a specific image (corresponding to the XTREME symbol of the present embodiment) that is indistinguishable from or difficult to distinguish from the production image, a false continuous production similar to the pseudo continuous production is performed. However, it is not always necessary for the effect control means to determine whether or not to add a repeat effect (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) in which the symbol is changed and stopped, and the main control means. The additional number of times may be sent as a command to the effect control means after being determined by. Even in this case, the number of times of execution of the repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) determined by the variable mode determining means is larger than the number of times within the variable time determined by the variable mode determining means. It is possible to execute the repetitive effect over.

As a result, within the fluctuation time determined by the variation mode determining means, the repetition effect is performed more times than the number of executions of the repeat effect (corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect of the embodiment) determined by the variation mode determining means. It is possible to perform (corresponding to both the pseudo-continuous production and the fake pseudo-continuous production of the embodiment). In particular, in the case of a gaming machine in which the degree of expectation for the lottery result increases as the number of times the repeated effect is executed increases, the effect of efficiently raising the degree of expectation for the result of the lottery is performed without prolonging the fluctuation time. It becomes possible.

When the game ball is accepted at the start port, the game machine acquires start information such as a random number, and the start information is a predetermined number (up to 4 in this embodiment) until the symbol variation condition is satisfied. ) Is reserved. In the present embodiment, the variation effect mode of the symbol is determined by the variation mode determining means when the start information is reserved, but from the time when the start information is reserved until the symbol variation condition is satisfied. If there is, it may be performed at any timing. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to add the repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) (determination by the effect control means) is performed when the start information is reserved. (It is necessary to send a command from the main control means when the start information is held), but at any timing from the time when the start information is held until the symbol variation condition is satisfied. You may. Then, when the change condition of the symbol is satisfied for the one start information in the hold state, the hold state is released, and if only the change effect mode determined for the one start information (the change mode determined by the change mode determination means). It is controlled by the effect control means so that the pattern variation effect is performed by the effect control means (including the repetitive effect added by the effect control means). Therefore, when it is determined that the reserved start information is to be repeatedly produced (corresponding to both the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment), the repeated effect is a variation of the start information. It will be performed in the variation production of the design performed based on the condition being satisfied.

[Technical Thought 3]
The game machine of the technical idea 3 has a reception port capable of accepting a game ball, a display means having a display area on which a pattern variation effect is performed, and starting information acquired based on the reception of the game ball at the reception port. A mode of a symbol variation effect, including a hold means for holding the symbol, a lottery means for performing a winning lottery using the start information, and a repeat effect capable of performing the symbol variation and stop a plurality of times. Control so that the variation effect of the symbol in the mode determined by the variation mode determining means is performed based on the main control means having at least the variation mode determining means for determining the above and the command transmitted from the main control means. A gaming machine including a possible effect control means, the specific condition is satisfied even though it is determined that the main control means executes the repeated effect N times for one start information. Occasionally, it is necessary to have a deciding means for deciding that at least a part of the repeated effects of the N times is to be performed in the symbol variation effect for other start information acquired before the one start information. It is a feature.

Explaining the game machine of the technical idea 3 in more detail, it is acquired based on an entrance that can accept a game ball, a display means having a display area in which a variation effect of a symbol is performed, and acceptance of the game ball into the entrance. A holding means that holds the started information until the variable condition is satisfied, a lottery means that draws a lottery using the starting information, and a period from the acquisition of the starting information to the establishment of the variable condition for the starting information. In the meantime, the mode of the symbol variation effect performed in the display area based on the establishment of the variation condition for the start information can be repeated a plurality of times to change and stop the symbol. About the start information after the variation condition for the start information is satisfied based on the main control means having at least the variation mode determining means for determining including the execution of the effect and the command transmitted from the main control means. The effect control means capable of controlling the variation effect of the symbol in the mode determined by the variation mode determining means including the repeat effect in the display area until the result of the lottery is shown. When it is determined that the holding means can hold a plurality of the starting information and the main control means executes the repeated effect N times for the starting information. When a specific condition is satisfied, a determination means for deciding that at least a part of the repeated effects of the N times will be performed in a symbol variation effect for other start information acquired before the start information. When it is determined that the repetitive effect is to be executed N times for the start information, the effect control means executes the repetitive effect N times in the variation effect of the symbol for the one start information. However, when a command to perform the partial repetitive effect in the symbol variation effect for the other start information is transmitted from the main control means, the N in the symbol variation effect for the start information. It is characterized by having a special effect control means for controlling a part of the repeated effect to be performed in a symbol variation effect for the other start information without executing all of the repeated effects of the times. Is.

According to the game machine of the technical idea 3, when the variation effect mode of the symbol is determined by the variation mode determining means (corresponding to the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means), the symbol in the determined variation effect mode is determined. The variation effect is performed in the display area. The variation effect mode determined by the variation mode determining means also includes the variation time and the number of times the repeated effect is executed. The fluctuation time is the time from when the hold state of the start information is released and the fluctuation effect of the symbol (that is, the symbol variation) is started until the symbol is finally stopped (that is, until the result of the lottery is confirmed and displayed). is there. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time are first determined based on the result of the lottery, and then the number of repeated effects and the addition time are determined. Here, the fluctuation time described in the technical idea 3 includes the addition time. However, regarding whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions when the repeat effect is executed, for example, the number of repeat effects is once in the fluctuation time 20 s of the fluctuation pattern 20, and the repeat effect is performed in the fluctuation time 30 s of the fluctuation pattern 21. Whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions may be incorporated in the fluctuation pattern, such as twice (whether or not to execute the repeat effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined, and when it is executed, the execution thereof). The number of times may also be determined). The variation mode determining means corresponds to the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means of the present embodiment. The repetitive effect is an effect in which the symbol is changed and stopped a plurality of times, and corresponds to the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect described in the present embodiment.

Both the lottery means and the variation mode determining means are possessed by the main control means, and information such as the variation pattern and the variation time is command-transmitted from the main control means to the effect control means. The effect control means controls so that a predetermined display effect is performed based on the information transmitted from the main control means. That is, within the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control means, it is controlled so that the fluctuation effect of the symbol is performed in the variation effect mode determined by the variation mode determining means.

In the present embodiment, the repetitive effect determined by the variation mode determining means uses a plurality of symbols using a special symbol between the start of the variation of the plurality of symbols and the display of the lottery result. Is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the plurality of temporarily stopped symbols is restarted to give the player a sense of expectation, which is a so-called pseudo-continuous production. Further, the effect control means is displayed when, in addition to such a pseudo-continuous effect, a plurality of symbols are temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous effect while maintaining the fluctuation of at least one of the plurality of symbols. By temporarily stopping and displaying a specific image (corresponding to the XTREME symbol of the present embodiment) that is indistinguishable from or difficult to distinguish from the production image, a false continuous production similar to the pseudo continuous production is performed.

However, in the technical idea 3, not only that, the main control means satisfies a specific condition when a predetermined number of repeated effects (corresponding to both the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) are performed. When this happens, it has a special effect control means for controlling at least a part of the repeated effects of the predetermined number of times to be performed in the pattern variation effect of the start information held before the start information. Here, the repetitive effect performed by the symbol variation effect on the start information held before the start information may be either the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect or the fake pseudo-continuous effect. Therefore, if it is decided that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed as a partial repetitive effect by the variable effect of the symbol for the start information held before the start information, the main control means has already been determined. A fluctuation time shorter than the determined fluctuation time is redetermined, and the redetermined fluctuation time information is sent as a command to the effect control means. On the other hand, if it is decided that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed as a partial repetitive effect by changing the symbol of the start information held before the start information, the main control means is changed. The already determined fluctuation time information is sent as a command to the effect control means without resetting the time.

More specifically, the main control means (specifically, the variable mode determining means) determines whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect including the variation time and the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and also includes the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The main control means decides whether or not to execute. That is, the number of executions for each of the pseudo continuous effect and the pseudo continuous effect is determined on the main control means side. Further, the main control means determines the execution timing for each of the pseudo continuous effect and the false continuous effect. Here, the timing of each of the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect is determined, including the variation effect of the symbol for the start information held before the start information. Then, the fluctuation time, the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous effect, the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the information related to the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous effect are sent from the main control means to the effect control means. Will be done. The effect control means controls so that the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect are performed based on the information transmitted from the main control means.

The specific condition described in the above technical idea 3 is that, in determining the execution timing for each of the above-mentioned pseudo-ream effect and fake pseudo-ream effect, a part of the pseudo-ream effect and the fake pseudo-ream effect is more than the start information. It corresponds to the fact that it was decided to perform the change production of the symbol for the start information that was previously held. When such a specific condition is satisfied (when it is determined that a part of the pseudo-ream effect and the fake pseudo-reaction effect is performed in the symbol variation effect of the start information held before the start information). , Not only at the time of the symbol variation effect for the one start information, but also at the time of the symbol variation effect for other start information held before the one start information, the pseudo continuous effect or / and the fake Pseudo-continuous production will be executed.

Here, the start information held before the one start information is not limited to only the start information held before the one start information, but is held before the one start information. This also applies to start information that has been set and is still on hold (that is, the symbol variation effect has not yet started). For example, in the case where three repeated effects (corresponding to both the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect of the present embodiment) are performed, one repeated effect is two times before the start information of the one. When it is decided that one fake pseudo-ream effect will be performed at the time of the variation effect of the start information held before the one start information, and at the time of the variation effect of the start information held before the one start information. , The start information held two times before the one start information, the start information held one before the one start information, and the repetitive effect in each variation effect of the one start information. It will be done once. However, since continuity is required for the repetitive effect, a lost image is displayed at the end of the variable effect (when the symbol is finally stopped) for the start information held before the one start information. It is preferable to display a specific image (corresponding to the XTREME symbol of the present embodiment) when the symbol is stopped, as in the case where the repeat effect is performed at the time of the symbol variation effect for the one start information. ..

As a result, not only can the effect of raising the expectation for the result of the lottery from the variation effect of the start information prior to the one start information to the one start information be executed, but also a high degree of freedom in the variation effect of the symbol. It becomes possible to have. For example, when the time (variation time) of the symbol variation effect for the one start information is short, a part of the repeat effect is applied to the other start information while maintaining the expectation for the lottery result. It is possible to perform an effect with a high degree of freedom, such as when an effect of changing the pattern of. Further, in the case of a game machine in which the degree of expectation for the result of the lottery is increased as the number of times the repeated effect is executed increases, or the degree of expectation for the result of the lottery is increased as the fluctuation time becomes longer. If the lottery result for the start information of is a hit, the fluctuation effect of the symbol will be performed over a longer fluctuation time than usual, but according to the technical idea 3, the lottery performed for the one start information While maintaining the degree of expectation for the result, it is possible to shorten the time for producing the fluctuation of the symbol for the one start information.

When the game ball is accepted at the start port, the game machine acquires start information such as a random number, and the start information is a predetermined number (up to 4 in this embodiment) until the symbol variation condition is satisfied. ) Is reserved. In the present embodiment, the variation effect mode of the symbol is determined by the variation mode determining means when the start information is reserved, but from the time when the start information is reserved until the symbol variation condition is satisfied. If there is, it may be performed at any timing. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to add the repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) (determination by the effect control means) is performed when the start information is reserved. However, it may be performed at any timing from the time when the start information is held until the condition for changing the symbol is satisfied. Then, when the symbol variation condition is satisfied for the one start information in the hold state, the hold state is released, and the symbol variation effect is started for the one start information.

[Technical Thought 4]
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 can perform a lottery means for drawing a lot based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a repeating effect in which the symbol is changed and stopped in a predetermined display area a plurality of times. It is provided with a return effect executing means and a progress effect executing means capable of executing a progress effect that can grasp that the number of times the repeated effect is performed has increased when the repeated effect is performed. The repeat effect is configured so that the expectation for the result of the lottery increases as the number of times of the repeat effect increases, and the progress effect execution means starts from N times when a specific condition is satisfied. Despite the fact that only a few repetitive effects are performed, the same or similar effect as the progress effect executed when the N times repetitive effect is performed is executed, and expectations for the result of the lottery are expected. It is characterized by having a means for executing an effect of increasing the degree of expectation that can increase the degree.

According to the game machine of the technical idea 4, when the variation effect mode of the symbol is determined, the variation effect of the symbol in the determined variation effect mode is performed in the display area. This variation effect mode also includes the variation time and the number of executions of the repeat effect (corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect of the present embodiment). The fluctuation time is the time from when the hold state of the start information is released and the fluctuation effect of the symbol (that is, the symbol variation) is started until the symbol is finally stopped (that is, until the result of the lottery is confirmed and displayed). is there. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time are first determined based on the result of the lottery, and then the number of repeated effects and the addition time are determined. Here, the fluctuation time described in the technical idea 4 includes the addition time. However, regarding whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions when the repeat effect is executed, for example, the number of repeat effects is once in the fluctuation time 20 s of the fluctuation pattern 20, and the repeat effect is performed in the fluctuation time 30 s of the fluctuation pattern 21. Whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions may be incorporated in the fluctuation pattern, such as twice (whether or not to execute the repeat effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined, and when it is executed, the execution thereof). The number of times may also be determined). In the present embodiment, the variation effect mode is determined by the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means on the main control means side.

The lottery means, the variable pattern lottery means, and the status value lottery means are all possessed by the main control means, and information such as the variable pattern and the variable time is command-transmitted from the main control means to the effect control means. The effect control means controls so that a predetermined display effect is performed based on the information transmitted from the main control means. That is, within the variation time transmitted from the main control means, it is controlled so that the variation effect of the symbol is performed in the variation effect mode determined by the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means.

In the present embodiment, the repetitive effect determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means on the main control means side is from the start of the change of a plurality of symbols until the result of the lottery is displayed. In addition, it is an effect that can give a player a sense of expectation by temporarily stopping a plurality of symbols using a special symbol and restarting the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped plurality of symbols, which is a so-called pseudo continuous effect. Is. Further, the effect control means is displayed when, in addition to such a pseudo-continuous effect, a plurality of symbols are temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous effect while maintaining the fluctuation of at least one of the plurality of symbols. By temporarily stopping and displaying a specific image (corresponding to the XTREME symbol of the present embodiment) that is indistinguishable from or difficult to distinguish from the production image, a false continuous production similar to the pseudo continuous production is performed. The repetitive effect described in the technical idea 4 is an effect in which the symbol is changed and stopped a plurality of times, and corresponds to the pseudo-continuous effect and / or the fake pseudo-continuous effect described in the present embodiment.

By the way, in a gaming machine in which the repeated effect (corresponding to both the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect of the present embodiment) is executed a plurality of times, a lottery is performed as the number of times the repeated effect is executed increases. It is configured to raise expectations for the results of. Further, when the repeat effect is executed, the progress effect that can grasp the number of times the repeat effect is executed is performed by the progress effect execution means. In the present embodiment, the number of times that the specific image (corresponding to the XTREME symbol of the present embodiment) is stopped is displayed, such as "1st" or "2nd". As a result, the number of times the repeated effect is executed can be grasped.

However, in the technical idea 4, not only that, the progress effect execution means is "1st" or "2nd" as if the specific image was stopped even though the specific image was not actually stopped. By displaying the progress effect such as "3rd" or "3rd", there is a means for executing the expectation addition effect that can increase the expectation for the lottery result. In particular, in the pseudo-continuous production of the present embodiment, only the specific symbol (for example, the middle symbol) is temporarily stopped at the specific image while maintaining the variable state for the non-specific symbol (for example, the left and right symbols), so that the specific image is stopped. Even if the progress effect such as "1st", "2nd", or "3rd" is displayed even though it has not been performed, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the repeated effect has been executed. As a result, although the number of repetitive effects is actually less than N times, the progress effect is the same as when N times of pseudo-ream is performed, or it is similar to the extent that it is visually indistinguishable from this. It is possible to raise expectations for the result of the lottery by performing the production. It should be noted that, for example, while maintaining the fluctuating state of all the symbols, the player can be given the recognition that the repeat effect has been executed even though the repeat effect has not actually been executed. It is more preferable to scroll the image slowly so that the image can be visually recognized, and to perform a progress effect or an effect similar thereto.

When the game ball is accepted at the start port, the game machine acquires start information such as a random number, and the start information is a predetermined number (up to 4 in this embodiment) until the symbol variation condition is satisfied. ) Is reserved. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery means on the main control means side and the status value lottery means determine the variation effect mode of the symbol when the start information is reserved, but the symbol is determined from the time when the start information is reserved. It may be performed at any timing until the fluctuation condition of is satisfied. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to add the repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) (determination by the effect control means) is performed when the start information is reserved. However, it may be performed at any timing from the time when the start information is held until the condition for changing the symbol is satisfied. Then, when the symbol variation condition is satisfied for the one start information in the hold state, the hold state is released, and the symbol variation effect is started for the one start information.

[Technical Thought 5]
The game machine of the technical idea 5 has a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a display means having at least a display area for performing a variation effect of a symbol, and a relatively low degree of expectation for the result of the lottery. After the normal reach effect, the reach effect executing means capable of executing the special reach effect having a relatively higher expectation than the normal reach effect, and the repeated effect in which the symbol is changed and stopped are performed a plurality of times. The repetitive effect includes an effect control means having a repetitive effect executing means capable of performing the repetitive effect, and the repetitive effect raises expectations for the result of the lottery as the number of times of the repetitive effect increases, and the usual It is configured so that the expectation for the result of the lottery is increased when the reach effect is reached by being performed before the reach effect is executed, and the effect control means is such that the repeat effect is performed. When the normal reach effect is executed, the normal reach effect is performed until the normal reach effect is executed, but when a specific condition is satisfied, the special repeat effect control is controlled so as to be performed after the special reach effect is reached after the normal reach effect. It is characterized by having means.

According to the game machine of the technical idea 5, when the variation effect mode of the symbol is determined, the variation effect of the symbol in the determined variation effect mode is performed in the display area. In this variable effect mode, there are a normal reach effect (normal effect) in which the expectation for the result of the lottery is relatively low, and a special reach effect (super) in which the expectation for the result of the lottery is relatively higher than the normal reach effect. The reach effect mode such as (reach effect), and the number of times the repeated effect is executed (corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect of the present embodiment is executed) are also included. The fluctuation time is the time from when the hold state of the start information is released and the fluctuation effect of the symbol (that is, the symbol variation) is started until the symbol is finally stopped (that is, until the result of the lottery is confirmed and displayed). is there. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time are first determined based on the result of the lottery, and then the number of repeated effects and the addition time are determined. Here, the fluctuation time described in the technical idea 5 includes the addition time. However, regarding whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions when the repeat effect is executed, for example, the number of repeat effects is once in the fluctuation time 20 s of the fluctuation pattern 20, and the repeat effect is performed in the fluctuation time 30 s of the fluctuation pattern 21. Whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions may be incorporated in the fluctuation pattern, such as twice (whether or not to execute the repeat effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined, and when it is executed, the execution thereof). The number of times may also be determined). In the present embodiment, the variation effect mode is determined by the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means on the main control means side.

In the technical idea 5, the special reach effect is performed after the normal reach effect, and the expectation for the result of the lottery is increased as the number of times the repeated effect is executed increases. Therefore, when the normal reach effect is performed after the repeated effect is performed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the special reach effect may be developed. However, on the other hand, if the repeat effect is not performed, or even if the repeat effect is performed, the expectation for the result of the lottery is low, such as once or twice. Even if it develops from reach production to special reach production, we cannot expect much from the result of the lottery. In that case, the special reach production itself may become meaningless, even though it has developed into a special reach production in which expectations for the result of the lottery are relatively high. Therefore, in the technical idea 5, when the repeat effect is performed, it is usually performed until the reach effect is executed, but when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, the repeat effect is performed in the special reach effect). (When determined by lottery), it has a special repetitive effect control means that controls so that it is performed after the normal reach effect is developed and then the special reach effect is developed. As a result, even if the repeat effect is not performed, or even if the repeat effect is performed only a small number of times and the special reach effect is developed, the repeat effect is performed in the special reach effect. By doing so, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the lottery result and suppress a decline in interest.

By the way, the lottery means, the fluctuation pattern lottery means, and the status value lottery means are all possessed by the main control means, and information such as the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time is command-transmitted from the main control means to the effect control means. The effect control means controls so that a predetermined display effect is performed based on the information transmitted from the main control means. That is, within the variation time transmitted from the main control means, it is controlled so that the variation effect of the symbol is performed in the variation effect mode determined by the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means.

In the present embodiment, the repetitive effect determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means on the main control means side is from the start of the change of a plurality of symbols until the result of the lottery is displayed. In addition, it is an effect that can give a player a sense of expectation by temporarily stopping a plurality of symbols using a special symbol and restarting the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped plurality of symbols, which is a so-called pseudo continuous effect. Is. Further, the effect control means is displayed when, in addition to such a pseudo-continuous effect, a plurality of symbols are temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous effect while maintaining the fluctuation of at least one of the plurality of symbols. By temporarily stopping and displaying a specific image (corresponding to the XTREME symbol of the present embodiment) that is indistinguishable from or difficult to distinguish from the production image, a false continuous production similar to the pseudo continuous production is performed. The repetitive effect described in the technical idea 5 is an effect in which the symbol is changed and stopped a plurality of times, and corresponds to the pseudo-continuous effect and / or the fake pseudo-continuous effect described in the present embodiment. Further, the repetitive effect performed in the special reach effect corresponds to the pseudo-continuous effect described in the present embodiment.

When the game ball is accepted at the start port, the game machine acquires start information such as a random number, and the start information is a predetermined number (up to 4 in this embodiment) until the symbol variation condition is satisfied. ) Is reserved. In the present embodiment, the variation effect mode of the symbol is determined by the variation mode determining means when the start information is reserved, but from the time when the start information is reserved until the symbol variation condition is satisfied. If there is, it may be performed at any timing. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to add the repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) (determination by the effect control means) is performed when the start information is reserved. However, it may be performed at any timing from the time when the start information is held until the condition for changing the symbol is satisfied. Then, when the symbol variation condition is satisfied for the one start information in the hold state, the hold state is released, and the symbol variation effect is started for the one start information.

[Technical Thought 6]
The game machine of the technical idea 6 has a reception port capable of accepting a game ball, a display means having a display area on which a symbol variation effect is performed, and starting information acquired based on the reception of the game ball at the reception port. The holding means for holding the symbol, the lottery means for drawing lots using the start information, the fluctuation time from the start of the variation effect of the symbol to the final stop of the symbol, and the variation and stop of the symbol. Based on a main control means having at least a variation mode determining means for determining a variation effect mode of a symbol including the number of times of execution of a repetitive effect performed a plurality of times, and a command transmitted from the main control means. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means capable of controlling the variation effect of the symbol in the mode determined by the variation mode determining means, and the effect control means is specified when the repeated effect is performed a predetermined number of times. When the condition is satisfied, the repetitive effect of at least a part of the predetermined number of times is held before the start information without changing the fluctuation time determined by the change mode determining means. The special effect control means has a special effect control means for controlling to be performed in the variation effect of the symbol of the above, and the special effect control means is described in the variation effect of the symbol for the other starting information even though the specific condition is satisfied. When the condition for performing the repetitive effect is not satisfied, it is characterized by having a repetitive effect non-execution means for non-execution of the repetitive effect in the variable effect of the symbol for the other start information. is there.

Explaining the game machine of the technical idea 6 in more detail, it is acquired based on an entrance that can accept a game ball, a display means having a display area on which a pattern variation effect is performed, and the acceptance of the game ball into the entrance. A holding means that holds the started information until the variable condition is satisfied, a lottery means that draws a lottery using the starting information, and a period from the acquisition of the starting information to the establishment of the variable condition for the starting information. In the meantime, the mode of the variation effect of the symbol performed based on the establishment of the variation condition for the start information is the variation time from the start of the variation effect of the symbol to the final stop of the symbol. A main control means having at least a variation mode determining means for determining a mode of the symbol variation effect including the number of times of execution of the repeated effect in which the symbol is changed and stopped a plurality of times, and a transmission from the main control means. Based on the command, between the time when the variation condition is satisfied and the result of the lottery being shown, the variation effect of the symbol in the mode determined by the variation mode determining means including the repeat effect. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means that can be controlled so that the operation is performed in the display area, the hold means is configured to be able to hold a plurality of the start information, and the effect control means is for one start information. When a specific condition is satisfied even though a command to execute the repeat effect N times is transmitted from the main control means, at least a part of the repeat effect of the N times is said to be the one. A deciding means for deciding to perform in the symbol variation effect for other start information acquired before the start information, and a part of the repeat effect is performed in the symbol variation effect for the other start information. When it is determined, a special effect for controlling the partial repetitive effect to be performed in the pattern variation effect for the other start information without changing the variation time determined by the variation mode determining means. When the special effect control means has a control means and the condition for performing the repeat effect is not satisfied in the variation effect of the symbol for the other start information even though the specific condition is satisfied. It is characterized by having a repetitive effect non-execution means for non-execution of the repetitive effect in the symbol variation effect for the other start information.

According to the game machine of the technical idea 6, when the variation effect mode of the symbol is determined by the variation mode determining means (corresponding to the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means), the symbol in the determined variation effect mode is determined. The variation effect is performed in the display area. The variation effect mode determined by the variation mode determining means also includes the variation time and the number of times the repeated effect is executed. The fluctuation time is the time from when the hold state of the start information is released and the fluctuation effect of the symbol (that is, the symbol variation) is started until the symbol is finally stopped (that is, until the result of the lottery is confirmed and displayed). is there. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time are first determined based on the result of the lottery, and then the number of repeated effects and the addition time are determined. Here, the fluctuation time described in the technical idea 6 includes the addition time. However, regarding whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions when the repeat effect is executed, for example, the number of repeat effects is once in the fluctuation time 20 s of the fluctuation pattern 20, and the repeat effect is performed in the fluctuation time 30 s of the fluctuation pattern 21. Whether or not the repeat effect is executed and the number of executions may be incorporated in the fluctuation pattern, such as twice (whether or not to execute the repeat effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined, and when it is executed, the execution thereof). The number of times may also be determined). The variation mode determining means corresponds to the variation pattern lottery means and the status value lottery means of the present embodiment. The repetitive effect is an effect in which the symbol is changed and stopped a plurality of times, and corresponds to the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect described in the present embodiment.

Both the lottery means and the variation mode determining means are possessed by the main control means, and information such as the variation pattern and the variation time is command-transmitted from the main control means to the effect control means. The effect control means controls so that a predetermined display effect is performed based on the information transmitted from the main control means. That is, within the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control means, it is controlled so that the fluctuation effect of the symbol is performed in the variation effect mode determined by the variation mode determining means.

In the present embodiment, the repetitive effect determined by the variation mode determining means uses a plurality of symbols using a special symbol between the start of the variation of the plurality of symbols and the display of the lottery result. Is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the plurality of temporarily stopped symbols is restarted to give the player a sense of expectation, which is a so-called pseudo-continuous production. Further, the effect control means is displayed when, in addition to such a pseudo-continuous effect, a plurality of symbols are temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous effect while maintaining the fluctuation of at least one of the plurality of symbols. By temporarily stopping and displaying a specific image (corresponding to the XTREME symbol of the present embodiment) that is indistinguishable from or difficult to distinguish from the production image, a false continuous production similar to the pseudo continuous production is performed.

However, in the technical idea 6, not only that, the effect control means satisfies a specific condition when a predetermined number of repeated effects (corresponding to both the pseudo-continuous effect and the fake pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) are performed. When this is done, at least a part of the repeated effects (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) of the predetermined number of times is performed in the pattern variation effect of the start information held before the start information. It has a special effect control means to control. Here, the repetitive effect performed by the symbol variation effect on the start information held before the start information is not the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect but a fake pseudo-continuous effect. Therefore, even if a part of the repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) is performed by the variable effect of the symbol for the start information held before the start information. When it is determined by the variation mode determining means that the repeating effect is to be executed (when the information to execute the repeating effect is transmitted from the main control means), the determined variation time (mainly). A repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-ream effect of the embodiment, but also corresponding to the pseudo-repeated effect when a fake pseudo-ream effect is added) is performed within the variable time (variable time when a command is transmitted from the control means). It should be noted that the repetitive effect performed by the symbol variation effect on the start information held before the start information corresponds to the command pseudo-continuous effect instead of the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect as described above, but this command The determination as to whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous effect may be determined by the main control means and a command may be transmitted to the effect control means, or may be determined by the effect control means.

More specifically, when the main control means determines whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect, the main control means (specifically, the variable mode determining means) includes the variation time and the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. It is determined whether or not to execute the game, and whether or not to execute the game including the number of times the fake pseudo-continuous effect is executed within the determined fluctuation time. Then, the information related to the fluctuation time, the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is command-transmitted from the main control means to the effect control means. The effect control means determines the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous effect and the pseudo-continuous effect based on the information transmitted from the main control means. Here, it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed at a predetermined timing within the variation effect of the symbol for the start information, but the false continuous effect is the start information reserved before the start information. The timing is determined including the variation effect of the design.

On the other hand, when the effect control means determines whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect, the variation time transmitted from the main control means (specifically, the variable mode determining means) and the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed are included. Information on whether or not to execute the command is transmitted from the main control means to the effect control means. Then, the effect control means determines whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect. When it is decided not to execute the fake pseudo-ream effect, the execution timing of the pseudo-ream effect is determined, and when it is decided to execute the fake pseudo-ream effect, the execution timing for each of the pseudo-ream effect and the fake pseudo-ream effect is determined. To determine. Here, too, it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed at a predetermined timing within the variation effect of the symbol for the start information, but the false continuous effect is the start information reserved before the start information. The timing is determined including the variation effect of the design.

As a specific condition, for example, a part of the repeated effects (corresponding to both the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment and the pseudo-continuous effect) performed N times (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment). When it is decided to perform the pattern variation effect on the other start information acquired before the one start information, the special effect control means is used to perform a partial repetitive effect (the fake of the embodiment). (Corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect) is performed at the time of the variable effect of the start information held before the one start information, and the remaining repetitive effect is performed at the time of the variable effect of the one start information. It will be.

Here, the start information held before the one start information is not limited to only the start information held before the one start information, but is held before the one start information. This also applies to start information that has been set and is still on hold (that is, the symbol variation effect has not yet started). For example, in the case where three fake pseudo-ream effects are performed, one fake pseudo-ream effect is performed at the time of variable production of the start information held two times before the one start information, and once. When it is decided that the pseudo-ream effect is to be performed at the time of the variable effect of the start information held one before the one start information, the start information held two before the one start information , The fake pseudo-continuous effect is performed once for each variation effect of the start information held one before the start information of the one and the start information of the one. However, since continuity is required for the pseudo-continuous production, which is one aspect of the repeated production, at the end of the variable production of the start information held before the start information of the one (the symbol is finally stopped). Instead of displaying a lost image, a specific image (XTREME symbol of the present embodiment) is displayed in the same manner as when a pseudo-continuous effect is performed when the symbol is stopped and a symbol variation effect is performed for the one start information. It is preferable to display (corresponding to).

As a result, not only can the effect of raising the expectation for the result of the lottery be executed from the variable effect of the start information prior to the one start information to the one start information, but also the design of the one start information can be executed. There is time to spare for the variation effect of the game, and it is possible to perform the variation effect of the pattern that is easy for the player to understand. In other words, if the design effect (variable time) for one start information is prolonged, not only the game will be delayed, but also the consumption amount per unit time in the hall will be reduced, so for both the player and the hall. Although it is not preferable, if the time for producing the design is shortened, the production itself becomes difficult to understand, which may reduce the interest. In this regard, according to the technical idea 6, it is possible to perform a variation effect of a pattern that is easy for the player to understand without prolonging the variation time unnecessarily. In particular, in the case of a gaming machine in which the degree of expectation for the lottery result increases as the number of times the repeated effect is executed increases, the effect of efficiently raising the degree of expectation for the result of the lottery is performed without prolonging the fluctuation time. It becomes possible.

By the way, despite the fact that the specific conditions are satisfied, that is, a part of the repetitive effects (corresponding to both the pseudo-ream effect of the embodiment and the pseudo-repeated effect) (the fake pseudo-repeated effect of the embodiment) Despite the fact that it was decided to perform (corresponding to) in the symbol variation effect for other start information acquired prior to the one start information, in the symbol variation effect for other start information. The conditions for performing the repetitive effect may not be satisfied. For example, when the condition for executing the repeated effect is not satisfied, such as when the variation time of the symbol variation effect for other start information is short, the acquisition is performed before the start information of the one. Even if it is decided to perform the repetitive effect in the pattern variation effect for the other start information, it cannot be realized. Therefore, in the technical idea 6, when the condition for performing the repeat effect in the symbol variation effect for other start information is not satisfied, the repeat effect is not executed in the symbol variation effect for other start information. I am trying to do it. In this way, when the condition for performing the repeat effect in the symbol variation effect for other start information is not satisfied even though the specific condition is satisfied, in the present embodiment, the one start information is used. It is decided by re-lottery whether or not to execute the repeat effect in the variable effect of the symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the repeat effect is not executed in the symbol variation effect for other start information, and the symbol variation effect for the one start information is the symbol for other start information. In the variation effect of the above, the variation effect of the symbol may be performed in the mode already determined as the one in which the repeat effect is executed.

When the game ball is accepted at the start port, the game machine acquires start information such as a random number, and the start information is a predetermined number (up to 4 in this embodiment) until the symbol variation condition is satisfied. ) Is reserved. In the present embodiment, the variation effect mode of the symbol is determined by the variation mode determining means when the start information is reserved, but from the time when the start information is reserved until the symbol variation condition is satisfied. If there is, it may be performed at any timing. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to add the repetitive effect (corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect of the embodiment) (determination by the effect control means) is performed when the start information is reserved. However, it may be performed at any timing from the time when the start information is held until the condition for changing the symbol is satisfied. Then, when the symbol variation condition is satisfied for the one start information in the hold state, the hold state is released, and the symbol variation effect is started for the one start information.

It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko gaming machine, for example, a slot machine or It can also be applied to a fusion game machine (a machine that plays a slot game using a game ball) in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused.

1 Pachinko game machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 192 Handle relay terminal board 400 Operation unit (operation unit)
470 Upper plate side liquid crystal display device 650 Ball launcher 740 Prize ball device 784 External terminal board 851 Power supply board 860a Operation switch (error release unit)
860b Error LED display 1100 Game area 1900 Game board side liquid crystal display 4100 Main control board 4100a Main control MPU
4110 Payout control board 4120 Payout control unit 4120a Payout control MPU
4140 Peripheral control board 4150 Peripheral control unit 4160 Liquid crystal and sound control unit 4165 RTC control unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board

Claims (1)

It is provided with an entrance capable of accepting a game ball and a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball at the entrance, and the player is asked based on the result of the lottery being a specific result. It is a game machine in which an advantageous hit game is executed.
An effect including a variation effect of a plurality of symbols is displayed, and a display means for displaying the result of the lottery depending on the stop mode when the symbol is stopped.
From the start of the variation effect of the plurality of symbols to the display of the result of the lottery, the special effect execution means for performing the special variation effect by the plurality of symbols in a form different from the normal variation effect. With
The special effect executing means is
A special symbol suggesting the execution of the special variation effect can be displayed, and the special symbol is not used when displaying the result of the lottery, and when the special variation effect is executed. It is stopped by the display means only in
The special effect executing means is
The first special variation effect that can execute an effect with a higher expectation of hit by stopping all the fluctuating plurality of symbols and fluctuating the plurality of symbols even after the plurality of symbols are stopped. And, while the plurality of symbols are being changed, only the special symbol is stopped, and even after the special symbol is stopped, the plurality of symbols are changed to produce a more promising effect. The second special variation effect that can be executed can be executed as the special variation effect.
The special symbol is used not only as the second special variation effect but also as a symbol to be stopped in the first special variation effect.
As the effect displayed by the display means, a special stage effect configured so that the hit expectation is different depending on the stage is provided, and the fluctuation period of the plurality of symbols and the special symbol before the special symbol is stopped are The special stage effect can be executed during the fluctuation period of the plurality of symbols after being stopped.
After the special symbol is stopped, a special stage effect that has a higher expectation than the stage of the special stage effect performed in the fluctuation period of the plurality of symbols before the special symbol is stopped is performed. It is feasible to use the area where the special symbol overlaps with the stopped area during the fluctuation period of the plurality of symbols.
The second special variation effect is shorter than the time from the change of the plurality of symbols in the first special variation effect to the stop of all the plurality of symbols, and the plurality of the second special variation effects. It is possible to perform the effect from the change of the symbol to the stop of the special symbol.
In the variation effect of the plurality of symbols performed in response to one lottery by the lottery means, only the first special variation effect is executed a predetermined number of times as the special variation effect, and the special variation effect is described as the above. The first special variation effect and the second special variation effect may be executed a predetermined number of times in total, and in any case, if the predetermined number of times is a specific number of times, the result of the lottery is a win.
The dynamic display mode of the special symbol from the appearance of the special symbol to the stop in the first special variation effect and the period from the appearance of the special symbol to the stop in the second special variation effect. It is possible to display the dynamic display mode of the special symbol in the same display mode.
The special effect executing means is
The number-of-times suggestion display indicating the number of times the special variation effect is executed can be displayed on the display means, and the same display mode is used when the first special variation effect is executed and when the second special variation effect is executed. By displaying the number-of-times suggestion display, it is not possible to distinguish which of the first special variation effect and the second special variation effect is executed by the appearance of the number-of-times suggestion display. Game machine.